Siemens ET 790 Series Technical information

© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA
Building Management Systems
Catalog ET G1 • 2009/2010
Answers for infrastructure.
© Siemens AG 2008
Related Catalogs
ALPHA Distribution Boards and
Terminal Blocks
Order No.:
pdf only:
(E86060-K8210-A101-A9-7600)
Contents
ET A1
·
ALPHA SIMBOX Small Distribution Boards SIMBOX 63,
SIMBOX LC, SIMBOX WP ALPHA 160 - DIN Wall-Mounted
Distribution Boards ALPHA 400 - DIN Wall-Mounted
Distribution Boards ALPHA 630 - DIN Floor-Mounted
Distribution Boards ALPHA AS Modular Distribution Boards
ALPHA Modular Distribution Boards up to1600 A
ALPHA 400-ZS Meter Cabinets ALPHA BOX ALPHA 8HP
Molded-Plastic Distribution Systems Planning and
Configuration ALPHA FIX terminal blocks: Screw Terminals,
Terminals with Spring-Loaded Connection, Combination Plug-In
Terminals, Plug-In Terminals, Insulation Displacement
Terminals, Accessories for Terminal Blocks
·
·
··
· ·
·
·
·
·
· Region Z2 · Region Z3 · Region Z4
ALPHA 400-ZS Meter Cabinets
Order No.:
Regional catalogs available on
request
(available in German only)
ET A2
Region Z1
BETA Low-Voltage Circuit
Protection
Order No.:
pdf only:
(E86060-K8220-A101-B1-7600)
ET B1
Protecting: Miniature Circuit Breakers Residual Current Protective Devices Low-VoltageFuse Systems
SITOR Semiconductor Fuses SR60 Busbar Systems
Overvoltage Protection Devices
Switching: Switches and Light Indicators Switching Devices
Timers Transformers, Bells and Socket Outlets
Measuring: Three-Phase Measuring Devices Single-Phase
Measuring Devices
Monitoring: Monitoring of Electrical Values Monitoring of
Plants and Devices
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
GAMMA Building Management
Systems
Order No.:
pdf only:
(E86060-K8230-A101-A9-7600)
ET G1
·
·
·
·
DELTA Switches and Socket Outlets ET D1
Order No.:
pdf only:
(E86060-K8240-A101-A9-7600)
·
·
CA 01
·
·
·
· ·
·
· ·
·
·
·
·
i-system DELTA line DELTA vita DELTA miro DELTA profil
DELTA style DELTA natur DELTA ambiente m-system
Surface-Mounting Product Range Switching/Pushbutton
Control/Dimming Motion Detectors Shutter/Blind Controls
Room Temperature Controllers Data and Communication
Systems Remote Control Systems Smoke Detectors
GAMMA Bus Coupling Unit
·
·
·
·
The Offline Mall
Order No.:
E86060-D4001-A510-C7-7600
(DVD)
·
··
·
·
·
·
Display, Operation Output Devices Input Devices
Combination Devices Lighting Sun Protection, Anti-glare
Protection, Utilization of Daylight Heating, Cooling, Ventilation,
Air-conditioning Load Management Safety Quick-assembly
Systems · Gateways, Interface Converters Physical Sensors
Control and Automation Devices System Products System
Accessories Counters Wave
·
·
·
All products of automation, drives and installation technology,
including those in the catalogs listed above.
The Online Mall
Internet:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall
All products of automation, drives and installation technology,
including those in the catalogs listed above.
Catalog-PDF
Internet:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/et
All catalogs for electrical installation technology can be downloaded as PDF files.
Registered trademarks
Technical Assistance
All product designations may be registered trademarks or
product names of Siemens AG or other supplying companies. Third parties using these trademarks or product
names for their own purposes may infringe upon the rights
of the trademark owners.
Further information about electrical installation is available
on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/et
Expert technical assistance
for Low-voltage controls and
electrical installation.
Tel: +49 (0) 180 5050 222 *
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050 223 *
E-Mail:
ad.support@siemens.com
*0.14 /min. from a German
landline network, mobile
telephone prices may vary
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA instabus
Display, Operation
Output Devices
2
Input Devices
3
Combination Devices
4
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
5
Sun-Protection, Anti-Glare
Protection, Utilization of Daylight
6
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation,
Air-Conditioning
7
Load Management
8
Safety
9
Quick-Assembly Systems
10
Gateways, Interface Converters
11
Physical Sensors
12
Control and Automation Devices
13
System Products
14
System Accessories
15
Counters
16
GAMMA wave
GAMMA wave Radio System
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1
17
Application Examples
18
Technical Information
19
Appendix
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Explanations
DT (delivery time
class)
Preferred types are device types that can be delivered immediately ex works, i.e. they are dispatched
within 24 hours.
DT
Meaning
}
preferred type
A
two workdays
B
one week
C
three weeks
D
six weeks
X
on request
If ordered in normal quantities, the products are usually delivered within the specified delivery times,
calculated from the date we receive your order.
In exceptional cases, delivery times may vary from those specified.
The delivery times are valid ex works from Siemens AG (products ready for dispatch).
Shipping times depend on the destination and the method of shipping. The standard shipping time for
Germany is one day.
The delivery time classes specified in the catalog are valid as of 10/2008 and are constantly being
optimized. For more up-to-the-minute information, please visit our site at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall.
PU (price unit)
The PU column (price unit) specifies the quantity to which the price and weight refer.
PS/P. unit
(packaging size/
packaging unit)
The first digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) indicates the minimum order quantity. You can only order this
specified quantity or a multiple thereof.
The second digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) specifies the number of units contained in larger packaging
(e.g. in a carton). You must order this quantity or a multiple thereof if you want the item to be delivered in a larger packaging quantity.
Examples:
PS/P. unit
Significance
1
You can order one item or a multiple thereof.
5
For example, five units are packed in a bag. Because the bags cannot be opened, you can only order a multiple of
the quantity contained in the bag: 5, 10, 15, 20 etc.
5/100
One carton contains (for example) 20 bags, each containing 5 units, i.e. a total of 100 units. If only cartons are
available for delivery, you need to order a multiple of the carton quantity: 100, 200, 300, etc.
Ordering a quantity of 220 units, would produce the following delivery: two cartons, each containing 100 units
(= 200 units) and 4 bags, each containing 5 units (= 20 units).
PG (Price Group)
Each product is assigned to a price group.
Weight
The value specified in the Weight column specifies the weight in kg for the quantity specified in the PU column (price unit).
Dimensions
Unless stated otherwise, all dimensions are specified in mm.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA
Building Management Systems
GAMMA instabus
Display, Operation
1
Output Devices
2
Input Devices
3
Combination Devices
4
Catalog ET G1 · 2009/2010
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
The products and
systems listed in this
catalog are developed
and manufactured using
a quality management
system certified by VDE
and according to
EN ISO 9001:2000.
5
Sun-Protection, Anti-Glare
Protection, Utilization of Daylight
6
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation,
Air-Conditioning
7
Load Management
8
Safety
9
Quick-Assembly Systems
10
Supersedes:
Catalog ET G1 · 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
The products in this catalog can also be found
in the electronic Catalog CA 01.
Order No.:
E86060-D4001-A510-C7-7600 (DVD)
11
Physical Sensors
12
Contact your local Siemens sales office
for further information
Control and Automation Devices
13
System Products
14
System Accessories
15
Counters
16
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave
GAMMA wave Radio System
17
Application Examples
18
Technical Information
19
Appendix
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Innovation is the key to success.
Energy-efficiency and environmental
protection is our business principle.
Close customer relations are our USP.
We continue to invest heavily in the research and development of new technologies. We have our own experimental and
test laboratories where we carry out intensive basic research on the climate in buildings and on fire, gas and explosion protection. This gives us the experience and the
opportunity to create solutions that continuously flow into our new products and
systems. At special test premises, such as
airport buildings and hospital premises, we
test the interoperability of the individual
systems. This empirical data is incorporated
into industry-specific solutions that continually set new standards and underscore
our claim to technological leadership.
And this business principle applies crosscompany and to each and every employee:
We are committed to environmental protection and the careful use of resources. Since
1994, we have been involved in more than
1300 energy efficiency projects, which
have jointly contributed to the saving of
around 1.5 billion euro in energy costs and
reduced the annual CO2 burden on the environment by approx. 700,000 t. So, as you
can see, intelligent solutions in technical infrastructures benefit not only the owners
and operators of buildings, but also those
who have nothing to do with them.
This is not just a soundbite, we make every
effort to ensure close customer relations.
We have in-depth knowledge of their
business and involve them in the development of our innovations. Our skills make us
an expert provider of industry-specific
solutions and services, a preferred partner
during the life cycle of a building - and allow
us to enjoy mutual growth with our
customers.
2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Answers for Infrastructure.
Siemens Industry meets the great challenges of our time
head on. With solutions for technical infrastructure in
industrial and non-residential buildings, residential
buildings and public facilities, Siemens ensures enhanced
comfort and energy efficiency in buildings, as well as the
protection and safety of persons, property and business
processes. As a longstanding and professional partner
with all-round expertise in the industry sector, we offer
tailored solutions that generate sustainable added value
for our customers.
Gain a competitive edge - with integrated building solutions.
Total Building Solutions means more innovation from a single source for enhanced
functionality under one roof. When it
comes to delivering turnkey buildings
equipped with cutting edge power distribution, buildingautomation and safety and
fire-protection equipment from a single
source, Siemens is in a league of its own.
And just to show that we are more than just
the sum of our parts, our portfolio includes:
• Electrical installation
Distribution boards and terminal blocks,
low-voltage circuit protection, building
management systems, switches and
socket outlets
• Building automation
Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning
controls, overall energy solutions
offering guaranteed savings
• Safety solutions
Access control, video monitoring, burglar protection, alarm control centers,
operation of alarm control centers
• Fire protection
Fire alarms, alerting, evacuation,
extinction and complete fire protection
solutions
Take a closer look at all the options available
from Siemens. Check out the opportunities
our products provide and discover how we
can help you sustainably enhance your
competitive edge.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
3
© Siemens AG 2008
Integrated power distribution
from one source.
Totally Integrated Power.
4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Communication
BACnet
IEC 61850
Industrial Ethernet
KNXnet/IP
PROFINET
PROFIBUS
Processes / industrial automation
KNX
Products und systems
Medium voltage
Transformers
Low-voltage
distribution
Installation and
low-voltage
circuit protection
Building
automation
Planning and system configuration
I2_16004
Electrical power distribution in
buildings requires integrated solutions.
Our response: Totally Integrated Power.
This means innovative and integrated,
interface-optimized products and systems
which have been optimally coordinated and
complemented with communication and
software modules that link power
distribution to building automation or
industrial automation. Totally Integrated
Power accompanies power distribution
projects from one end to the other.
From A to Z. From the planning to the
building’s use: Totally Integrated Power
offers significant advantages in every
project stage and to everyone involved in
the project – the investors, electrical
planning engineers, electricians, users
and building facility managers.
Our portfolio comprises everything from
engineering tools to the matching
hardware: from switchgear and distribution
systems for medium voltage to
transformers, from switching and circuitprotection devices to low-voltage
switchgear and busbar trunking systems,
as far as to the small distribution board and
the wall outlet. It goes without saying that
both the medium-voltage switchgear,
which requires no maintenance, and the
low-voltage switchgear are type-tested,
and their busbar connections, too.
Comprehensive protection systems ensure
the safety of man and machine at any time.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
5
© Siemens AG 2008
Electrical Installation from A to Z
ALPHA Distribution Boards and Terminal Blocks
The ALPHA range comprises small distribution boards, meter
cabinets, distribution boards and molded-plastic distribution
boards. The ALPHA FIX terminal blocks meet all your needs for
clear and manageable wiring using a full range of connection
methods.
BETA Low-Voltage Circuit Protection
Siemens is the only manufacturer to offer an all-round protection
concept with an optimally coordinated device range for line protection, personal and fire protection, lightning and overvoltage
protection, device and system protection. Switching, measuring
and monitoring devices complete the low-voltage circuit protection. Based on an all-round protection concept, our device range
offers a complete spectrum of protection devices, such as fuses,
miniature circuit breakers, residual current-operated circuit
breakers and surge suppressors, as well as switching devices,
measuring instruments and monitoring devices.
GAMMA Building Management Systems
Buildings should be energy efficient and easy to adapt quickly
and cost-effectively to user requirements. Lighting, sun protection
and indoor environment should be achieved in an energy-saving
and user-friendly manner, while persons and property are protected against hazards and damage. The tried and tested
GAMMA instabus building management systems support the flexible networking of electrical devices and functions in buildings
over two wires of the bus cable and connection to the systems
over KNXnet/IP – thus providing greater efficiency, safety, flexibility and comfort.
DELTA Switches and Socket Outlets
The DELTA switch and socket outlet range combines a wide
range of different design interfaces with innovative and safe
technology. And because the operator interfaces are simple to
interchange, you can enjoy complete safety – even when your
taste or the environment changes.
6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Modern electrical switching and installation technology
These days it's hard to imagine daily life without electricity.
Modern electrical switching and installation technology is an
essential requirement for ensuring that our use of electricity is
safe and user-friendly.
Shaping the future with innovations
Without innovations there can be no progress. That is a wellknown fact. And that is why we make every endeavor to
continue producing innovations in the area of electrical
installation technology, as well as improving existing products
and developing new applications. All this with the aim of
offering innovative and high-quality products across the
whole spectrum of electrical installation technology in order
to further increase our competitive edge and open up new
market opportunities.
Industry
Our factory in Regensburg and our branches worldwide
Siemens has been developing products and innovative solutions
for industry and for residential and non-residential buildings
since 1883. While production began in Berlin, our production
has now been based in Regensburg for the last 60 years. Today,
this factory is one of the key international manufacturers of
installation technology. We use cutting edge equipment: CAD,
simulation and automated laboratory equipment.
Non-residential buildings
We now have more than 17 production sites in Europe, Asia
and America - which is the best way to ensure compliance
with country-specific standards - and the best way to ensure
that our customers enjoy local support.
Residential buildings
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
7
© Siemens AG 2008
Quality and the Environment
Quality in the context of the environment
Increasing urbanization and a growing global population have
meant that it has become one of our key challenges to look after
and preserve our natural resources – one we are happy to
meet head on.
Acting responsibly
As part of the ecologically responsible and and globally active
Siemens Group, we are setting the bar high. Our environmental
protection objectives are an integral part of our rigorous quality
management.
Even during the development of our products and systems, we
take a critical look at their possible effects on the environment.
So, without exception, they all comply with the EC Directive RoHS
(Restriction of Hazardous Substances). During this development
phase, we also lay the foundations for the highest quality: from
the very outset, we define reliability requirements and the related
quality assurance measures, and these are incorporated into all
drafts.
All products and systems are also subject to strict quality
specifications during production and testing. We take great
care to ensure compliance with these specifications in order to
guarantee our customers nothing but the very best quality.
Our many certificates bear witness to our success.
Pioneers in recycling
As a founder member of a non-profit association for the active
promotion of the environment-friendly recycling of disabled
LV HRC fuse links, Siemens takes a pro-active approach to recycling. The aim of the association is to create a voluntary system for the environment-friendly recycling of LV HRC fuse
links, which is simple and free for participating collectors.
All proceeds are used to support a range of projects in the
training and research sector.
Energy saving with GAMMA instabus
The functions of the GAMMA Building Management Systems
make a huge contribution to environmental protection. For
example, GAMMA instabus links the management functions
lighting, sun protection and indoor environment.
The automatic shutter/blind control controls the blind slats so
that maximum daylight is allowed to penetrate without dazzling. A constant light level control ensures that the level of
light is always just right. This saves electricity – which is good
for the environment – and also reduces energy costs. The optimum shading of a building also considerably reduces energy
8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
requirements for air-conditioning and ventilation systems,
thus enhancing the energy efficiency of the building.
These are just a few examples of the wide range of options offered by GAMMA instabus that help save energy and make
building management more cost-efficient. Thus the convenience of modern technology pro-actively supports environmental protection.
Pro-Active environmental protection
It goes without saying that we are certified to ISO 14001 – as are
all Siemens premises. Furthermore, as an active member of ZVEI
(German Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association),
we pro-actively support the protection of the environment with
a wide range of measures, such as the development of binding
environmental management systems.
In 2006 - following 1995, 1999 and 2002 - our factory in Regensburg was presented with its fourth Environmental Award
of the City of Regensburg for its strong commitment to environmental issues. This latest prize was awarded for the fact
that we have voluntarily renounced the use of hazardous substances in our products and for our consistent application of
this aim in our galvanic processes.
© Siemens AG 2008
Our Added Extra
Build on a sound basis
Comprehensive support
With our basic and advanced courses, you can lay the
foundations for your business success. In our modern training
center in Regensburg you will learn the necessary theoretical
and practical essentials from lecturers who are experts in their
fields. Dynamic and easy to understand training with
multimedia teaching equipment and many practical examples.
Available in German and English. If required, we also provide
training in-house or in one of our more local Siemens branches.
We offer all-round support: if you have any queries regarding
our products, the planning of your electrical installation or the
availability of technical documentation.
Our range of training courses covers the whole span of electrical
installation. You will get to know our entire portfolio of products
and their application. Step-by-step we will familiarize you with
the entire spectrum of modern installation options, thus
opening up a whole new world of business opportunities.
Oh, and by the way: In 1991, the Training Center was the first
certified training center in the world to offer KNX training
courses, and is still the only manufacturer training center to
offer the whole range of KNX-certified courses in both
German and English.
Just give us a call:
Tel.: +49 (0) 180 50 50 222
(0.14 €/minute from a German landline)
Fax: +49 (0) 180 50 50 223
e-mail: ad.support@siemens.com
Installation technology on the net
Visit us on the Internet. Our Web site offers information on all
our products – ALPHA Distribution Boards and Terminal Blocks,
BETA Low-Voltage Circuit Protection, GAMMA Building Management Systems and DELTA Switches and Socket Outlets, so
visit us at:
http://www.siemens.com/e-installation
For details of our current range of courses, please visit our
Web site at:
http://www.siemens.de/installationstechnik/kurse
Or contact us:
Tel.: +49 (0) 941 790 2950
e-mail: cscet.aud@siemens.com
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
9
© Siemens AG 2008
Software at your Services
Labeling software for complete electrical installations
The Siemens labeling software means it has never been easier
to label your switches and socket outlets, distribution boards
and low-voltage controls.
Each product is labeled using a standard printer on prepunched adhesive film or simply on DIN A4 paper. Generally any
device used in electrical installation can be labeled using this
labeling system. This allows you to create a neat and tidy distribution board and clearly labeled switches and socket outlets
– long after installation.
The benefits:
• Your work is made easier and your installation has a uniform appearance, thanks to a single and consistent labeling system
• Adhesive labels are durable, simple to apply and can be
used for all devices.
Labeling tool, example GAMMA
The program is simple to use and available free of charge on
the Internet:
http://www.siemens.com/labeling-tool
Labeling tool, example DELTA
10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA Planer and Installation Engineer Tool
This tool lets you call up the "Siemens. GAMMA Catalog" for
building management systems, compile product descriptions
and specifications and download them in a range of formats –
online, STLB-Bau-compliant and free of charge.
The "Siemens. GAMMA Planner Tool" enables the simple creation of STLB-Bau-compliant and test-safe master specifications
on the basis of the Siemens. GAMMA Catalog. The fact that
prices for material and labor are also taken into account
means that cost estimates can be drawn up in no time at all.
The free calculation software for installation engineers
"Siemens. GAMMA Installation Engineer Tool" enables the
simple creation of offers for building management systems on
the basis of Siemens GAMMA Catalog in a minimum of time.
http://www.din-bauportal.de/siemens
Visualization
The visualization function provides an overview of all the relevant building states and allows the appropriate action to be taken where required. It is also suitable for remote control. This
forms the basis of an efficient building management system.
The visualization is scalable for all applications and the functions are of modular design (see chapter "Display, Operation").
ETS
ETS is the software for the planning and configuration of intelligent KNX building management systems. This commissioning tool is based on the KNX standard and is maintained by
the KNX Association. It is used for the manufacturer-independent commissioning of all KNX products. You only need ETS
for Siemens products – no other tools are necessary. This allows users to create up-to-the-minute and complete project
documentation at the touch of a button.
http://www.knx.org
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
11
© Siemens AG 2008
12
Display, Operation
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation,
Air-Conditioning
Output Devices
Load Management
Input Devices
Safety
Combination Devices
GAMMA instabus
GAMMA instabus
GAMMA Building Management Systems
Quick-Assembly Systems
Lighting
Gateways, Interface Converters
Sun Protection, Anti-Glare Protection,
Utilization of Daylight
Physical Sensors
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
System Accessories
GAMMA instabus
GAMMA instabus
Control and Automation Devices
Counters
GAMMA wave
GAMMA wave Radio System
Buildings should be energy-efficient and easy to adapt quickly and cost-effectively to user requirements.
Lighting, sun protection and the indoor environment should be achieved in an energy-saving and user-friendly manner,
while persons and property are protected against hazards and damage.
The tried and tested GAMMA instabus building controls support the flexible networking of electrical devices and functions
in buildings over two wires of the bus cable and connection to building management systems over KNXnet/IP - thus providing greater efficiency, safety, flexibility and comfort.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
13
© Siemens AG 2008
New Developments
Weather systems
Brightness controllers
Combination switch actuators
Compact weather systems with integrated sensor technology for the sun protection control of
your building
→ Page 6/8
Brightness measurement and dimmer control
for energy-saving room and workplace lighting
→ Page 5/15
Compact and universal
Motion detectors
Powerful switching actuator technology
Flush-mounting switching actuator technology
Outer motion detector IP 55 with integrated
KNX interface
→ Page 12/7
Switches eight loads up to 16 A
Dual sensors
Modular switching actuator technology
The IP 54 dual sensor offers light-responsive
control of shutters/blinds and lighting
→ Page 5/15
Combining the advantages of large and small
→ Page 2/5
14
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
→ Page 2/6
→ Page 4/6
Distributed installation shortens cable routes and
reduces the amount of work required for cabling
→ Page 2/6
© Siemens AG 2008
IP Viewer
Easy-to-use mini viewer
Touch panels
→ Page 1/43
All functions at a glance
Scene/event modules
DELTA style platinum metallic
Unrivaled flexibility and performance
→ Page 13/4
Clarity in form and function
KNX/SIMATIC S7 connection
→ Page 1/36
The perfect combination of KNX and Simatic S7
→ Page 11/18
Visualization
→ Page 1/7
Combridge Studio for individual visualization
→ Page 1/38
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
15
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA instabus – available in all DELTA Product
Ranges
DELTA line
Titanium white
Electrical white
Aluminum metallic
Carbon metallic
Carbon metallic/chrome/
carbon metallic
Gold/gold/titanium white
DELTA vita
Titanium white/red/titanium Aluminum metallic/green/
white
aluminum metallic
Color elements: platinum/chrome/gold/dark red/dark blue/green/red/blue/orange/yellow/titanium white
16
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
DELTA miro glass
Crystal green/
aluminum metallic
White/
titanium white
N
Black/
aluminum metallic
N
Orient/
carbon metallic
N
Arena/
electrical white
N
DELTA miro aluminum
Natural/
aluminum metallic
N
Titanium/
carbon metallic
N
Graphite/
titanium white
N
Yellow oxide/
titanium white
N
DELTA miro wood
Maple red/
aluminum metallic
Maple/
aluminum metallic
Beech/
aluminum metallic
Aluminum metallic
Carbon metallic
Cherry/
aluminum metallic
Wenge/
aluminum metallic
DELTA miro color
Titanium white
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17
© Siemens AG 2008
DELTA profil
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
DELTA style
Titanium white
Platinum metallic
DELTA ambiente
Arctic white
18
Arctic white/steel
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
N
Basalt black
Pearl gray
1
© Siemens AG 2008
Display, Operation
1/2
Introduction
1/4
1/8
Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons for DELTA bus coupling
units
Surface-mounting pushbuttons, IP44
1/10
1/15
1/16
Multifunction Pushbuttons
Introduction
Pushbuttons with room temperature
controllers
Pushbuttons with motion detectors
Pushbuttons with IR receiver
1/19
Displays
1/21
1/22
1/23
1/24
1/25
1/26
1/27
1/28
1/29
1/30
1/31
1/32
1/33
Pushbutton Accessories
Introduction
DELTA line frames
DELTA vita frames
DELTA miro color frames
DELTA miro glass frames
DELTA miro real wood frames
DELTA miro aluminum frames
DELTA profil frames
DELTA style frames
DELTA ambiente frames
Surface-mounting enclosures
Pictographs
Accessories for trunking systems
1/36
Touch panels
1/37
Remote controls
1/38
Visualization, software
1/43
Visualization, server
1/12
1/13
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Introduction
■ Overview
1/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Pushbuttons
No matter which style you prefer, DELTA has the right
switch and socket outlet product range.
1/4
Multifunction pushbuttons
These include pushbuttons with IR receivers, with room
temperature controllers, motion detectors and LCD.
1/12
Displays
A space-saving combination that offers optimum display 1/19
and operator friendliness.
Pushbutton accessories
More information on rockers, color elements, pictographs, 1/21
frames, intermediate frames and accessories for trunking
systems.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Introduction
Application
Page
Touch panels
Touch panels are visually attractive and easy to use.
1/36
Remote controls
A range of room functions, such as lighting, can be
wirelessly operated over either infrared or radio control.
1/37
Visualization, software
Use a PC for display, operation and archiving – from one 1/38
or more operator terminals.
Visualization, server
Display and operation on the PC – quick and easy to
install.
1/43
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/3
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbuttons
■ Technical specifications
907802
904101 IKE 281
904201 IKE 282
904301 IKE 283
--
241D01
--
241401 UP 284
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
UP 287
--
907602
--
UP 246
--
DELTA
millennium
241901
211301 UP 241
--
241301 UP 245
908502
--
UP 286
222001 UP 222E
--
UP 244
908402
--
DELTA
ambiente
907502
212001 UP 221E
--
UP 285
230201 UP 223
--
221301 UP 243
221501 UP 222
Application program
211501 UP 221
Type
UP 242
DELTA
profil/style
i-system
907402
Design
Enclosure data
Module for channel installation
Dimensions
• Height
• Width
• Depth
mm 55
mm 55
mm 11
65 (DELTA profil), 68 (DELTA style)
65 (DELTA profil), 68 (DELTA style)
14
65
65
14
80
166
41
Display/control elements
Individual pushbuttons
2
4
6
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
2
4
Pushbutton pairs
1
2
3
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
--
--
--
Operation
(v: vertical, h: horizontal)
LED per pushbutton pair for status indication
or configurable as orientation light
Red luminous bar for status indication
or configurable as orientation light
Separate LED for orientation light
(ON/OFF configurable)
Labeling field
Individually engravable pushbutton
Pictographs supplied
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
✔
---
---
✔
---
---
✔
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
✔
✔
---
--
✔
---
--
✔
---
--
✔
---
--
✔
---
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
---
9
9
9
9
9
9
13
13
38
38
13
13
38
38
13
13
38
38
13
13
38
38
9
9
27
27
38
38
12
12
27
27
38
38
28
28
28
28
28
28
Switching ON/OFF
Switching OVER
Pushbutton function (bell function)
Dimming
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
--
✔
--
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
---
✔
--
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dimming with stop telegram (4-bit)
Short button press, ON/OFF
Long button press, BRIGHTER/DARKER
Dimming with cyclic transmission (4-bit)
Short button press, ON/OFF
Long button press, BRIGHTER/DARKER
One-pushbutton dimming
Value transmission
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
Value transmission (8-bit)
Shutter/blind
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
--
✔
--
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Shutter/blind control
Short button press, slat OPEN/CLOSED or STOP
Long button press, UP/DOWN
One-pushbutton operation
-Scene
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
Store and call up scene, 8-bit
2
2
Store and call up scene, 1-bit
in conjunction with scene module
Short or long button press (store/call up scene), ✔
configurable
Status
4
4
6
6
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
---
-2
---
-4
---
---
-8
---
---
-8
-1
-2
-4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
Display of any status objects
(1-bit)
Display of pushbutton objects
--
--
--
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Plug onto UP 110 bus coupling unit
Plug onto UP 114 bus coupling unit
General functions
Max. number of group addresses
Max. number of assignments
Input functions
Switching
1/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbuttons
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
i-system
UP 221
UP 221 pushbuttons1)2)
u
Single, neutral
•
•
•
•
Electrical white
Titanium white
Carbon metallic
Aluminum metallic
B
}
B
A
5WG1 221-2AB01
5WG1 221-2AB11
5WG1 221-2AB21
5WG1 221-2AB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.025
0.025
0.025
0.025
B
}
B
A
5WG1 222-2AB01
5WG1 222-2AB11
5WG1 222-2AB21
5WG1 222-2AB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.025
0.025
0.025
0.025
B
}
B
A
5WG1 223-2AB01
5WG1 223-2AB11
5WG1 223-2AB21
5WG1 223-2AB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.025
0.025
0.025
0.025
B
}
B
A
5WG1 221-2EB01
5WG1 221-2EB11
5WG1 221-2EB21
5WG1 221-2EB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.025
0.048
0.025
0.025
B
}
B
A
5WG1 222-2EB01
5WG1 222-2EB11
5WG1 222-2EB21
5WG1 222-2EB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.025
0.048
0.025
0.025
5WG1 221-2AB11
UP 222
UP 222 pushbuttons1)2)
u
Double, neutral
•
•
•
•
Electrical white
Titanium white
Carbon metallic
Aluminum metallic
5WG1 222-2AB11
UP 223
UP 223 pushbuttons1)2)
u
Triple, neutral
•
•
•
•
Electrical white
Titanium white
Carbon metallic
Aluminum metallic
5WG1 223-2AB11
UP 221E
UP 221E pushbuttons1)2)
u
Single, with status LED, neutral
•
•
•
•
Electrical white
Titanium white
Carbon metallic
Aluminum metallic
5WG1 221-2EB11
UP 222E
UP 222E pushbuttons1)2)
u
Double, with status LED, neutral
•
•
•
•
Electrical white
Titanium white
Carbon metallic
Aluminum metallic
5WG1 222-2EB11
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/5
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbuttons
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA profil
UP 241
UP 241 pushbuttons1)2)
Single, neutral
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
B
}
B
A
5WG1 241-2AB01
5WG1 241-2AB11
5WG1 241-2AB21
5WG1 241-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.036
0.036
0.036
0.036
B
B
B
B
5WG1 242-2AB01
5WG1 242-2AB11
5WG1 242-2AB21
5WG1 242-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.036
0.036
0.036
0.036
B
}
B
A
5WG1 243-2AB01
5WG1 243-2AB11
5WG1 243-2AB21
5WG1 243-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.036
0.036
0.036
0.036
B
}
B
B
5WG1 244-2AB01
5WG1 244-2AB11
5WG1 244-2AB21
5WG1 244-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.036
0.036
0.036
0.036
B
}
B
A
5WG1 245-2AB01
5WG1 245-2AB11
5WG1 245-2AB21
5WG1 245-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.036
0.036
0.036
0.036
B
}
B
B
5WG1 246-2AB01
5WG1 246-2AB11
5WG1 246-2AB21
5WG1 246-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.036
0.036
0.036
0.036
5WG1 241-2AB11
UP 242
UP 242 pushbuttons1)2)
Single, with I/O symbols
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
5WG1 242-2AB11
UP 243
UP 243 pushbuttons1)2)
Double, neutral
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
5WG1 243-2AB11
UP 244
UP 244 pushbuttons1)2)
Double, with I/O symbols
• Pearl gray
• Titanium white
• Anthracite
• Silver
5WG1 244-2AB11
UP 245
UP 245 pushbuttons1)2)
Quadruple, neutral
• Pearl gray
• Titanium white
• Anthracite
• Silver
5WG1 245-2AB11
UP 246
UP 246 pushbuttons1)2)
Quadruple, with I/O symbols
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
5WG1 246-2AB11
1) The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2) The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
1/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbuttons
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA style
UP 285
UP 285 pushbuttons1)2)
Single, neutral
N
}
B
B
5WG1 285-2AB11
5WG1 285-2AB21
5WG1 285-2AB41
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.036
022 0.036
022 0.036
N
}
B
B
5WG1 286-2AB11
5WG1 286-2AB21
5WG1 286-2AB41
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.036
022 0.036
022 0.036
N
}
B
B
5WG1 287-2AB11
5WG1 287-2AB21
5WG1 287-2AB41
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.036
022 0.036
022 0.036
• Arctic white/arctic white
• Arctic white/steel
B
B
5WG1 284-2AB01
5WG1 284-2AB03
1
1
1
1
022 0.035
022 0.035
IKE 281
IKE 281 pushbuttons,
single, for channel installation
D
5WG1 281-8AB01
1
1
030 0.356
IKE 282
IKE 282 pushbuttons,
double, for channel installation
D
5WG1 282-8AB01
1
1
030 0.362
IKE 283
IKE 283 pushbuttons,
quadruple, for channel installation
D
5WG1 283-8AB01
1
1
030 0.360
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
• Platinum metallic
5WG1 285-2AB11
UP 286
UP 286 pushbuttons1)2)
Double, neutral
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
• Platinum metallic
5WG1 286-2AB11
UP 287
UP 287 pushbuttons1)2)
Quadruple, neutral
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
• Platinum metallic
5WG1 287-2AB11
DELTA ambiente
UP 284
UP 284 pushbuttons1)2) (to be discontinued)
Quadruple
5WG1 284-2AB01
DELTA millennium
Note:
The text for the labeling field and the symbol for the
pushbutton are engraved. Please specify the text
and symbols you require when placing your order
(see page 1/33 "Ordering data").
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
5WG1 283-8AB01
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/7
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbuttons for DELTA bus coupling units
■ Technical specifications
Type
Application program
UP 116
UP 116/11
UP 116/21
UP 116/31
211001
221001
210F01
220F01
✔
✔
✔
71
71
32
71
71
32
71
71
32
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1
1
1
1
✔
✔
✔
✔
1
2
--
--
--
--
1
2
✔
✔
✔
✔
4
4
8
8
3
3
4
5
Switching ON/OFF
Switching OVER
Dimming
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dimming with stop telegram (4-bit)
Short button press, ON/OFF
Long button press, BRIGHTER/DARKER
Dimming with cyclic transmission (4-bit)
Short button press, ON/OFF
Long button press, BRIGHTER/DARKER
Shutter/blind
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
Shutter/blind control
Short button press, slat OPEN/CLOSED or STOP
Long button press, UP/DOWN
Scene
✔
✔
--
✔
Store and call up scene, 1-bit
in conjunction with scene module
Short or long button press (store/call up scene),
configurable
Status
1
2
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
Display of any status objects (1-bit)
Display of pushbutton objects
✔
---
--
--
✔
✔
Enclosure data
✔
For installation in flush-mounting switch and
socket boxes with ∅ = 60 mm and depth = 60 mm
Dimensions
• Height
mm 71
• Width
mm 71
• Depth
mm 32
Mounting type
Claw fixing
Screw fixing
Display/control elements
LED per pushbutton pair for status indication
or configurable as orientation light
Mounting of rockers from the DELTA
product ranges
Rocker button, intermediate position
(pushbutton with 2 operating points)
Rocker button, pushbutton position
(pushbutton with 1 operating point)
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
General functions
Max. number of group addresses
Max. number of assignments
Input functions
Switching
✔
For selection and ordering data, see page 1/9.
1/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbuttons for DELTA bus coupling units
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
UP 116
DELTA UP 116 bus coupling units1)
UP 116/21 Single
• Intermediate position
• Pushbutton position
}
}
5WG1 116-2AB01
5WG1 116-2AB21
1
1
1
1
030 0.080
030 0.080
}
}
5WG1 116-2AB11
5WG1 116-2AB31
1
1
1
1
030 0.080
030 0.080
5WG1 116-2AB01
UP 116/11 DELTA UP 116 bus coupling units1)
UP 116/31 Double
• Intermediate position
• Pushbutton position
5WG1 116-2AB11
1)
The required single or multiple rocker (with or without window) and the frame in
matching DELTA design (see Catalog ET D1) must be ordered separately.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/9
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Surface-mounting pushbuttons, IP44
■ Technical specifications
Type
Application program
AP 115
AP 115/11
AP 115/21
AP 115/31
211001
221001
210F01
220F01
✔
✔
✔
✔
IP44
IP44
IP44
IP44
75
66
52
75
66
52
75
66
52
1
--
1
--
1
2
--
--
--
--
1
2
✔
✔
✔
✔
4
4
8
8
3
3
4
5
Switching ON/OFF
Switching OVER
Dimming
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dimming with stop telegram (4-bit)
Short button press, ON/OFF
Long button press, BRIGHTER/DARKER
Dimming with cyclic transmission (4-bit)
Short button press, ON/OFF
Long button press, BRIGHTER/DARKER
Shutter/blind
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
Shutter/blind control
Short button press, slat OPEN/CLOSED or STOP
Long button press, UP/DOWN
Scene
✔
✔
--
✔
Store and call up scene, 1-bit
in conjunction with scene module
Short or long button press (store/call up scene),
configurable
Status
1
2
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
Display of any status objects (1-bit)
Display of pushbutton objects
✔
---
--
--
✔
✔
Enclosure data
Surface-mounting enclosures
Degree of protection
Dimensions
• Height
• Width
• Depth
mm 75
mm 66
mm 52
Display/control elements
LED per pushbutton pair for status indication
or configurable as orientation light
Rocker button, intermediate position
(pushbutton with 2 operating points)
Rocker button, pushbutton position
(pushbutton with 1 operating point)
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
General functions
Max. number of group addresses
Max. number of assignments
Input functions
Switching
✔
For selection and ordering data, see page 1/11.
1/10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Surface-mounting pushbuttons, IP44
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
AP 115
AP 115 pushbuttons
AP 115/21 Single, IP44
• Intermediate position
• Pushbutton position
}
}
5WG1 115-3AB01
5WG1 115-3AB21
1
1
1
1
022 0.080
022 0.080
}
}
5WG1 115-3AB11
5WG1 115-3AB31
1
1
1
1
022 0.080
022 0.080
5WG1 115-3AB01
AP 115/11 AP 115 pushbuttons
AP 115/31 Double, IP44
• Intermediate position
• Pushbutton position
5WG1 115-3AB11
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/11
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Multifunction Pushbuttons
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
1/12
Application
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Page
Pushbuttons with
room temperature controllers
Pushbuttons with integrated room temperature controller 1/13
in designs DELTA profil and DELTA style
Pushbuttons with
motion detectors
Pushbuttons with integrated motion detectors in designs 1/15
DELTA profil and DELTA style
Pushbuttons with IR receiver
Pushbuttons with IR receiver pass on commands from
the remote control.
1/16
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Multifunction Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with room temperature controllers
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
UP 231/3
UP 231/3 pushbuttons
• Vertical operation
• Two wide inner rocker buttons
• Function can be user-assigned: switching OVER, switching
ON/OFF, switching ON/OFF and dimming, shutter/blind, value
transmission, store and call up scenes of up to four 1-bit scenes
in conjunction with scene module
• Short and long button press for ON/OFF/OVER, BRIGHTER/
DARKER for dimming, and UP/DOWN and adjustment of slats
for shutter/blind control
• Operation/status indication over one LED per rocker button
• Integrated room temperature sensors and controllers for
heating only, cooling only or combined heating/cooling
• Control over an algorithm for adaptive control and/or a two-point
algorithm
• With monitoring of room temperature over a room temperature
sensor integrated in the controller and an external room temperature sensor connected to the KNX, and with adjustable weighting
between the measured indoor and outdoor temperature
UP 252H
• Two narrow outer rocker buttons for setpoint offsetting in comfort
mode and one for switching between comfort and standby
mode
• Operating modes that can be switched over KNX: comfort
mode, standby mode, night mode, frost or heat protection
mode, with adjustable offset of the room temperature setpoint
for comfort mode
• Adjustable dead zone, selectable either symmetric to the
setpoint for comfort mode or between the heating and cooling
setpoint for comfort mode
• Selectable sequence control for heating and cooling mode
(required e.g. for the combination of floor and radiator heating)
• Output of the control variable(s) either as ON/OFF switch command
or as positioning command in the range 0 % ... 100 %, with
LEDs for the indication of the current operating mode and
setpoint offsetting
• For plugging onto a UP 114 bus coupling unit
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 65 x 65 x 15 mm
UP 252H multifunction controllers
• For direct control of the valves and the fan of the fan coil or a
split unit
• Preselection of the required control function of directly connected
heaters/refrigerators using the ETS
• Integrated room temperature sensors
• P or PI control of the room temperature for heating, cooling or
heating and cooling mode
• For adjustment of comfort, pre-comfort, night and protection
modes over the bus
• Adjustment of temperature setpoint for comfort mode
• Adjustment of temperature setpoints over the ETS for all other
operating modes
• Fixed dead zone (1K) between heating and cooling in comfort
mode
• Presence pushbutton to locally switch over between comfort
and pre-comfort and for extending comfort mode through
activation of the night mode
• Pulse-width modulated control signal output
• Eight operator buttons for the manual adjustment of the comfort
temperature setpoint, for the selection of the operating mode
and ventilator speed step and the ON/OFF switching of a load
(e.g. room lighting)
• A red status LED per operator button
• An LCD with three digits for the representation of the current
setpoint or room temperature
• A binary input for the direct connection of a floating window
contact
• A binary input for 12 V DC for the direct connection of a presence
detector
• An analog input for the optional connection of a temperature
sensor mounted in the intake air flow of a ventilator convector
(NTC sensor, 10 kOhm at 25 °C),
• Five binary outputs 24 V AC (relay contacts for 2 A, p.f. = 1) for
the control of electrothermal valve actuators, for the switching
of ventilator speed steps, etc. depending on the configured
application.
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection via bus terminal
• Integrated power supply for 24 V AC
• Double hanging bracket for mounting on two combined hollowwall or flush-mounting boxes with at least ∅ 58 mm and at least
40 mm depth or an equivalent double flush mounting box
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/13
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Multifunction Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with room temperature controllers
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA profil
UP 231/3
UP 231/3 pushbuttons1)2)3)
Double, with adaptive room temperature controller
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
B
B
B
B
5WG1 231-2AB03
5WG1 231-2AB13
5WG1 231-2AB23
5WG1 231-2AB73
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.036
0.036
0.036
0.036
B
B
5WG1 231-2EB13
5WG1 231-2EB23
1
1
1
1
022 0.036
022 0.036
C
5WG1 252-2HV11
1
1
030 0.225
5WG1 231-2AB13
DELTA style
UP 231/3
UP 231E pushbuttons1)2)3)
Double, with adaptive room temperature controller
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
5WG1 231-2EB13
Design-independent
UP 252H
UP 252H multifunction controllers
N
5WG1 252-2HV11
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
3)
The pictographs must be ordered separately, see page 1/32.
1/14
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Multifunction Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with motion detectors
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
UP 230
UP 230 pushbuttons
• Vertical operation
• Four rocker buttons
• Function can be user-assigned: switching ON/OFF/OVER,
switching ON/OFF/OVER and dimming, shutter/blind, value
transmission, store and call up scenes of up to eight 1-bit
scenes in conjunction with scene module
• Short and long button press for ON/OFF/OVER, BRIGHTER/
DARKER for dimming, and UP/DOWN and adjustment of slats
for shutter/blind control
• Operation/status indication over one LED each for the middle
rocker buttons and over two LEDs each for the outer rocker
buttons
• With LED windows in the outer rocker buttons for the insertion of
pictographs
• With integrated motion detector and brightness sensor,
transmission of brightness value over KNX
• Motion detector with operation either dependent on and/or
independent of brightness
• With brightness operating point adjustable in various steps
• Adjustable sensing range 90° or 180°
• Adjustable cyclic transmission time
• Integrated LED for indication of detected movements
• For plugging onto a UP 110 or UP 114 bus coupling unit
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 65 x 65 x 17 mm.
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA profil
UP 230
UP 230 pushbuttons1)2)3)
Quadruple, with motion detectors
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
B
B
B
B
5WG1 230-2AB02
5WG1 230-2AB12
5WG1 230-2AB22
5WG1 230-2AB72
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.036
0.036
0.036
0.036
B
B
5WG1 230-2EB11
5WG1 230-2EB21
1
1
1
1
022 0.036
022 0.036
5WG1 230-2AB12
DELTA style
UP 230E
UP 230E pushbuttons1)2)3)
Quadruple, with motion detectors
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
5WG1 230-2EB11
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
3)
The pictographs must be ordered separately, see page 1/32.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/15
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Multifunction Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with IR receiver
■ Overview
The flush-mounting UP pushbuttons with IR receivers use the UP
114 bus coupling unit and an application program to carry out
actions, such as issuing commands to actuators for defined
ON/OFF switching or for dimming lighting, for the raising/lowering
of shutters/blinds, adjustment of slats or other configurable
functional units.
■ Technical specifications
DELTA
profil
Design
Type
Application program
UP 233
DELTA
style
DELTA
ambiente
UP 234
UP 235
UP 285E
UP 286E
UP 287E
UP 284E
900B02
Display/control elements
Individual pushbuttons
Pushbutton pairs
2
1
4
2
8
4
2
1
4
2
8
4
8
4
Operation (v: vertical, h: horizontal)
LED per pushbutton pair for status indication
or configurable as orientation light
Separate LED for orientation light
(ON/OFF configurable)
Labeling field
Pictographs supplied
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
Switching ON/OFF
Switching OVER
Pushbutton function (bell function)
Dimming
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dimming with stop telegram (4-bit)
Short button press, ON/OFF
Long button press, BRIGHTER/DARKER
Dimming with cyclic transmission (4-bit)
Short button press, ON/OFF
Long button press, BRIGHTER/DARKER
Value transmission
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Value transmission (8-bit)
Shutter/blind
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Shutter/blind control
Short button press, slat OPEN/CLOSED or STOP
Long button press, UP/DOWN
Scene
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Store and call up scene, 1-bit
in conjunction with scene module
Short or long button press (store/call up scene),
configurable
Status
2
4
8
2
4
8
8
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Display of any status objects (1-bit)
Display of pushbutton objects
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Bus connection
Plug onto UP 114 bus coupling unit
Inputs
IR receiver/decoder
Integration of 14 further pushbutton pairs of
IR hand-held/wall-mounted transmitters
General functions
Max. number of group addresses
Max. number of assignments
Input functions
Switching
For selection and ordering data, see page 1/17.
1/16
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Multifunction Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with IR receiver
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA profil
UP 233
UP 233 pushbuttons1)2)
Single, with IR receiver, neutral
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
B
B
B
B
5WG1 233-2AB01
5WG1 233-2AB11
5WG1 233-2AB21
5WG1 233-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.038
0.038
0.038
0.038
B
B
B
B
5WG1 234-2AB01
5WG1 234-2AB11
5WG1 234-2AB21
5WG1 234-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.038
0.038
0.038
0.038
B
B
B
B
5WG1 235-2AB01
5WG1 235-2AB11
5WG1 235-2AB21
5WG1 235-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.038
0.038
0.038
0.038
N
C
B
B
5WG1 285-2EB11
5WG1 285-2EB21
5WG1 285-2EB41
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.038
022 0.055
022 0.055
N
C
B
B
5WG1 286-2EB11
5WG1 286-2EB21
5WG1 286-2EB41
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.038
022 0.036
022 0.055
5WG1 233-2AB11
UP 234
UP 234 pushbuttons1)2)
Double, with IR receiver, neutral
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
5WG1 234-2AB11
UP 235
UP 235 pushbuttons1)2)
Quadruple, with IR receiver, neutral
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
5WG1 235-2AB11
DELTA style
UP 285E
UP 285E pushbuttons1)2)
Single, with IR receiver, neutral
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
• Platinum metallic
5WG1 285-2EB11
UP 286E
UP 286E pushbuttons1)2)
Double, with IR receiver, neutral
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
• Platinum metallic
5WG1 286-2EB11
1) The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2) The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/17
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Multifunction Pushbuttons
Pushbuttons with IR receiver
Type
Version
UP 287E
UP 287E pushbuttons1)2)
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Quadruple, with IR receiver, neutral
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
• Platinum metallic
N
}
B
B
5WG1 287-2EB11
5WG1 287-2EB21
5WG1 287-2EB41
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.038
022 0.036
022 0.055
B
B
5WG1 284-2EB01
5WG1 284-2EB03
1
1
1
1
022 0.084
022 0.084
5WG1 287-2EB11
DELTA ambiente
UP 284E
UP 284E pushbuttons1)2) (to be discontinued)
Quadruple, with IR receiver
• Arctic white/arctic white
• Arctic white/steel
5WG1 284-2EB01
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
1/18
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Displays
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
UP 587/1
UP 587/2
UP 587/1 text displays
Text displays with UP 587/2 timers
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Horizontal operation of three pushbutton pairs
Up to nine freely configurable operator functions
Switching ON/OFF, switching OVER
Switching ON/OFF and dimming
Value transmission
Sun protection control
Store and call up 1-bit scenes with the respective scene modules
Store and call up 8-bit scenes, text display, warning and alarm
indication
• With distinction between short and long button press for dimming,
scenes and the control of sun protection equipment
• An LCD with two lines, each with 11 characters, which are
assigned as a block to the upper two pushbutton pairs
UP 584
UP 585
UP 586
• LCD contrast and brightness can be user adjusted
• LCD backlighting as orientation light
• Four LEDS for switching status indication
• Buzzer for acoustic alarm indication
• Display and input of date and time
• For mounting on UP 117 bus transceiver modules
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 55 x 55 x 11 mm
UP 587/2 also offers:
• Time-controlled switching (weekly switching schedule) for up to
40 time switching commands: Switching ON/OFF, switching
ON/OFF and dimming, value transmission, sun protection
control, call up of 1-bit and 8-bit scenes
• Adjustable time switching commands on the text display
UP 584, UP 585, UP 586 display/control units
• Graphical LCD with a resolution of 132 x 65 pixels
• Display of up to 30 characters per line and up to 5 lines
(font Arial 12 pt)
• Text and special characters uploaded from any Windows fonts
and/or freely defined characters and symbols
• Display of up to 16 freely configurable indications
• Indication text lengths of maximum 3 lines, comprising fixed
and variable text parts
• Selection of data type for switching for each indication,
floating-point value 2/4 byte, percentage value 1 byte, count
value 1/2/4 byte, static text, variable text (max. 14 ASCII characters), time or date, with scaling, conversion and text display
of values (1/2/4 byte)
• Selection of alarm sound output and/or flashing at each alarm
indication, with individual acknowledgement of each alarm
indication
• Operation of up to 16 bus functions, such as switching,
changing dimming values, changing position of shutters/blinds
and/or slats or changing a temperature setpoint value by
changing the displayed status or value
• Limit setting and specification of step sizes for the possible
transmission values
• Set green/yellow display backlighting as permanent,
time-controlled or to be switched ON/OFF over the bus
• Two pushbuttons for selection of indication to be displayed
• Two additional pushbuttons for operation of configurable bus
functions
• Powered over the bus line (double bus load)
• Includes special bus coupling unit
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 65 x 65 x 20 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
i-system
UP 587/1
UP 587/1 text displays1)2)
•
•
•
•
UP 587/2
B
5WG1 587-2AB01
5WG1 587-2AB11
5WG1 587-2AB21
5WG1 587-2AB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
}
B
A
5WG1 587-2AB02
5WG1 587-2AB12
5WG1 587-2AB22
5WG1 587-2AB32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
B
}
B
B
5WG1 585-2AB01
5WG1 585-2AB11
5WG1 585-2AB21
5WG1 585-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.113
0.113
0.113
0.113
}
B
A
UP 587/2 text displays with time-controlled
switching1)2)
•
•
•
•
5WG1 587-2AB11
5WG1 587-2AB12
Electrical white
Titanium white
Carbon metallic
Aluminum metallic
Electrical white
Titanium white
Carbon metallic
Aluminum metallic
B
DELTA profil
UP 585
UP 585 display/control units1)
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
5WG1 585-2AB11
1) The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
2) The bus transceiver module must be ordered separately, see page 14/3.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/19
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Displays
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA style
UP 585
UP 585 display/control units1)
UP 584
UP 584 display/control units1)
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
• Platinum metallic
N
}
5WG1 585-2AB11
1
1
022 0.113
B
B
5WG1 584-2AB21
5WG1 584-2AB41
1
1
1
1
022 0.113
022 0.113
B
5WG1 586-2AB01
1
1
022 0.113
5WG1 585-2AB11
DELTA ambiente
UP 586
UP 586 display/control units1) (to be discontinued)
• Arctic white
5WG1 586-2AB01
1)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
1/20
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
Application
Page
Frames, DELTA design
No matter which frame you require – we have models
available in single to quintuple versions.
1/22
Surface-mounting enclosures
Available in the designs of DELTA line, DELTA profil and 1/31
DELTA style
Pictographs
Offer a clear overview of the functions of multifunction
pushbuttons
Accessories for trunking systems It's easy to select modules and accessories for the
flexibly designed DELTA millennium.
1/32
1/33
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/21
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
DELTA line frames
■ Technical specifications
• For horizontal and vertical mounting
• Degree of protection IP20
DELTA line
Single
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
mm 80
mm 80
Double
Triple
Quadruple Quintuple
151
80
222
80
293
80
364
80
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Frames
80 mm
5TG2 551-0
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9010)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
}
A
5TG2 551-0
5TG2 552-0
5TG2 553-0
5TG2 554-0
5TG2 555-0
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.013
0.023
0.033
0.044
0.055
• Electrical white (RAL 1013)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
A
A
5TG2 581-0
5TG2 582-0
5TG2 583-0
5TG2 584-0
5TG2 585-0
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.013
0.023
0.033
0.044
0.055
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9006)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
}
A
5TG2 551-3
5TG2 552-3
5TG2 553-3
5TG2 554-3
5TG2 555-3
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.015
0.026
0.038
0.050
0.063
• Carbon metallic (similar to RAL 7016)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
A
A
A
5TG2 551-6
5TG2 552-6
5TG2 553-6
5TG2 554-6
5TG2 555-6
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.015
0.026
0.038
0.050
0.063
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9010)
- Single
- Double, horizontal
- Double, vertical
- Triple, horizontal
- Triple, vertical
- Quadruple, horizontal
- Quadruple, vertical
A
A
A
}
A
A
A
5TG2 551-1
5TG2 552-1
5TG2 552-2
5TG2 553-1
5TG2 553-2
5TG2 554-1
5TG2 554-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
021
021
021
021
021
021
021
0.016
0.028
0.028
0.041
0.041
0.054
0.054
• Electrical white (RAL 1013)
- Single
- Double, horizontal
- Double, vertical
- Triple, horizontal
- Triple, vertical
- Quadruple, horizontal
- Quadruple, vertical
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
5TG2 581-1
5TG2 582-1
5TG2 582-2
5TG2 583-1
5TG2 583-2
5TG2 584-1
5TG2 584-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
021
021
021
021
021
021
021
0.019
0.028
0.028
0.041
0.041
0.054
0.054
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9006)
- Single
- Double, horizontal
- Double, vertical
A
A
A
5TG2 551-4
5TG2 552-4
5TG2 552-5
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
021 0.017
021 0.031
021 0.031
• Carbon metallic (similar to RAL 7016)
- Single
- Double, horizontal
- Double, vertical
A
A
A
5TG2 551-7
5TG2 552-7
5TG2 552-8
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
021 0.017
021 0.031
021 0.031
Frames
80 mm, with labeling field1)
5TG2 551-1
1)
You can create individual labels with our free labeling tool.
Download at: http://www.siemens.com/labeling-tool
1/22
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
DELTA vita frames
■ Technical specifications
Color elements
• For horizontal and vertical mounting
• Degree of protection IP20
• Size of color elements: 62 mm x 62 mm
• For installing in frames
Frames
• For horizontal and vertical mounting
• Degree of protection IP20
Note:
Frames can only be used with color elements, see Introduction.
DELTA vita
Single
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
mm 83
mm 83
Double
Triple
Quadruple Quintuple
154
83
225
83
296
83
367
83
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Frames
83 mm
5TG1 141
5TG1 178
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9010)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
A
A
A
5TG1 141
5TG1 142
5TG1 143
5TG1 144
5TG1 145
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.012
0.019
0.027
0.041
0.065
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9006)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
A
A
A
5TG1 161
5TG1 162
5TG1 163
5TG1 164
5TG1 165
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.014
0.022
0.031
0.046
0.071
• Carbon metallic (similar to RAL 7016)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
A
A
A
A
5TG1 151
5TG1 152
5TG1 153
5TG1 154
5TG1 155
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.014
0.022
0.031
0.046
0.071
• Gold (similar to RAL 1036)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
A
A
A
5TG1 171
5TG1 172
5TG1 173
5TG1 174
5TG1 175
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.014
0.022
0.031
0.046
0.071
Color elements
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9010)
• Yellow (similar to RAL 1021)
• Green (translucent)
• Orange (translucent)
• Red (translucent)
• Blue (translucent)
• Dark red (painted)
• Dark blue (painted)
• Platinum (galvanized, matt)
• Chrome (galvanized, polished)
• Gold (galvanized, polished)
}
A
}
A
A
}
}
A
}
}
}
5TG1 178
5TG1 188-1
5TG1 182
5TG1 183
5TG1 184
5TG1 185
5TG1 186
5TG1 187
5TG1 177
5TG1 181
5TG1 180
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
021
021
021
021
021
021
021
021
021
021
021
0.008
0.008
0.008
0.008
0.008
0.008
0.009
0.009
0.009
0.009
0.009
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/23
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
DELTA miro color frames
■ Technical specifications
• For horizontal and vertical mounting
• Degree of protection IP20
DELTA miro
Single
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
mm 90
mm 90
Double
Triple
Quadruple Quintuple
161
90
232
90
303
90
374
90
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Frames
90 mm, plastic
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9010)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
A
A
A
A
5TG1 111-0
5TG1 112-0
5TG1 113-0
5TG1 114-0
5TG1 115-0
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/3
021
021
021
021
021
0.022
0.035
0.046
0.060
0.100
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9006)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
A
}
A
A
5TG1 111-1
5TG1 112-1
5TG1 113-1
5TG1 114-1
5TG1 115-1
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/3
021
021
021
021
021
0.022
0.035
0.046
0.060
0.100
• Carbon metallic (similar to RAL 7016)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
A
A
A
A
A
5TG1 111-2
5TG1 112-2
5TG1 113-2
5TG1 114-2
5TG1 115-2
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/3
021
021
021
021
021
0.022
0.035
0.046
0.060
0.100
5TG1 111-0
5TG1 111-1
5TG1 111-2
1/24
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
DELTA miro glass frames
■ Technical specifications
• For horizontal and vertical mounting
• Degree of protection IP20
DELTA miro glass
Single
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
mm 90
mm 90
Double
Triple
Quadruple Quintuple
161
90
232
90
303
90
374
90
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Frames
90 mm, real glass
• Crystal green
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
}
}
5TG1 201
5TG1 202
5TG1 203
5TG1 204
5TG1 205
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
021
0.197
0.243
0.305
0.370
0.480
• White
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
}
}
5TG1 201-1
5TG1 202-1
5TG1 203-1
5TG1 204-1
5TG1 205-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
021
0.097
0.157
0.220
0.282
0.480
• Black
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
}
}
5TG1 201-2
5TG1 202-2
5TG1 203-2
5TG1 204-2
5TG1 205-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
021
0.097
0.157
0.220
0.282
0.480
• Orient
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
}
}
5TG1 201-3
5TG1 202-3
5TG1 203-3
5TG1 204-3
5TG1 205-3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
021
0.197
0.243
0.305
0.370
0.480
}
}
}
}
}
5TG1 201-4
5TG1 202-4
5TG1 203-4
5TG1 204-4
5TG1 205-4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
021
0.197
0.243
0.305
0.370
0.480
5TG1 201
5TG1 201-1
5TG1 201-2
5TG1 201-3
• Arena
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
N
5TG1 201-4
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/25
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
DELTA miro real wood frames
■ Technical specifications
• For horizontal and vertical mounting
• Degree of protection IP20
Note:
Variations in the color of the wood are typical of natural products.
DELTA miro
Single
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
mm 90
mm 90
Double
Triple
Quadruple Quintuple
161
90
232
90
303
90
374
90
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Frames
90 mm, real wood
• Maple red
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
}
A
A
A
5TG1 101-2
5TG1 102-2
5TG1 103-2
5TG1 104-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
0.037
0.057
0.081
0.104
• Maple
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
}
}
A
A
5TG1 101-3
5TG1 102-3
5TG1 103-3
5TG1 104-3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
0.037
0.057
0.081
0.104
• Beech (color achieved through staining)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
}
}
A
A
5TG1 101-4
5TG1 102-4
5TG1 103-4
5TG1 104-4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
0.037
0.057
0.081
0.104
• Cherry (color achieved through staining)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
}
}
A
A
5TG1 101-1
5TG1 102-1
5TG1 103-1
5TG1 104-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
0.037
0.057
0.081
0.104
• Wenge
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
}
}
A
A
5TG1 101-0
5TG1 102-0
5TG1 103-0
5TG1 104-0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
0.037
0.057
0.081
0.104
5TG1 101-2
5TG1 101-3
5TG1 101-4
5TG1 101-1
5TG1 101-0
1/26
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
DELTA miro aluminum frames
■ Technical specifications
• For horizontal and vertical mounting
• Degree of protection IP20
DELTA miro
Single
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
mm 90
mm 90
Double
Triple
Quadruple Quintuple
161
90
232
90
303
90
374
90
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Frames
90 mm, real aluminum
N
• Natural
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
}
}
5TG1 121-0
5TG1 122-0
5TG1 123-0
5TG1 124-0
5TG1 125-0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
021
0.082
0.140
0.190
0.243
0.290
• Titanium
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
}
}
5TG1 121-1
5TG1 122-1
5TG1 123-1
5TG1 124-1
5TG1 125-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
021
0.082
0.140
0.190
0.243
0.290
• Graphite
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
}
}
5TG1 121-2
5TG1 122-2
5TG1 123-2
5TG1 124-2
5TG1 125-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
021
0.197
0.140
0.190
0.243
0.480
• Yellow oxide
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
}
}
5TG1 121-3
5TG1 122-3
5TG1 123-3
5TG1 124-3
5TG1 125-3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
021
021
021
021
021
0.082
0.140
0.190
0.370
0.290
5TG1 121-0
5TG1 101-1
5TG1 101-2
5TG1 101-3
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/27
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
DELTA profil frames
■ Technical specifications
• For horizontal and vertical mounting
• Degree of protection IP20
DELTA profil
Single
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
mm 80
mm 80
Double
Triple
151
80
222
80
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Frames
Frames, 80 mm, cutout
5TG1 801
5TG1 803
(frame part cutout)
5TG1 804
(frame part cutout)
1/28
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9010)
- Single
- Double
- Double, with one cut-out
- Triple, with one cut-out
}
A
A
A
5TG1 801
5TG1 802
5TG1 803
5TG1 804
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
021
021
021
021
0.014
0.024
0.024
0.033
• Pearl gray (similar to RAL 7035)
- Single
- Double
- Double, with one cut-out
- Triple, with one cut-out
A
A
A
A
5TG1 861
5TG1 862
5TG1 863
5TG1 864
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
021
021
021
021
0.014
0.024
0.024
0.033
• Silver (similar to RAL 9006)
- Single
- Double, with one cut-out
- Triple, with one cut-out
A
A
A
5TG1 761
5TG1 763
5TG1 764
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
021 0.014
021 0.024
021 0.033
• Anthracite (similar to RAL 7016)
- Single
- Double
- Double, with one cut-out
- Triple, with one cut-out
A
A
A
A
5TG1 831
5TG1 832
5TG1 833
5TG1 834
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
021
021
021
021
• Champagne (similar to RAL 7048), single
A
5TG1 701-1
1
1/10
021 0.017
• Bronze (similar to RAL 3012), single
A
5TG1 741-1
1
1/10
021 0.017
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
0.014
0.024
0.024
0.033
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
DELTA style frames
■ Technical specifications
Frames
• For horizontal and vertical mounting
• Degree of protection IP20
DELTA style
Single
Double
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
mm 82
mm 82
153
82
Intermediate frames
For installation of devices with cover plate
65 mm x 65 mm and GAMMA instabus sensors.
Triple
Quadruple Quintuple
224
82
295
82
366
82
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Frames
82 mm
5TG1 321
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9010)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
• Basalt black (similar to RAL 7016)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
• Platinum metallic
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
A
A
A
5TG1 321
5TG1 322
5TG1 323
5TG1 324
5TG1 325
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.022
0.034
0.049
0.062
0.088
A
A
A
A
A
5TG1 361
5TG1 362
5TG1 363
5TG1 364
5TG1 365
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.021
0.039
0.047
0.060
0.086
}
}
}
}
}
5TG1 321-1
5TG1 322-1
5TG1 323-1
5TG1 324-1
5TG1 325-1
1
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.022
0.032
0.045
0.058
0.074
A
A
}
5TG1 328
5TG1 368
5TG1 328-1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
021 0.008
021 0.008
021 0.012
N
Intermediate frames
68 mm
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9010)
• Basalt black (similar to RAL 7016)
• Platinum metallic
N
5TG1 328
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/29
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
DELTA ambiente frames
■ Technical specifications
• For horizontal and vertical mounting
• Degree of protection IP20
DELTA ambiente
Single
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
mm 83
mm 83
Double
Triple
Quadruple Quintuple
154
83
225
83
296
83
367
83
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Frames (to be discontinued)
83 mm, contour
• Arctic white (RAL 9002)
- Single
- Double
- Triple
- Quadruple
- Quintuple
}
}
}
A
A
5TG1 511
5TG1 512
5TG1 513
5TG1 514
5TG1 515
1
1
1
1
1
1/5
1/5
1/5
1/5
1/5
021
021
021
021
021
0.081
0.135
0.187
0.218
0.263
5TG1 511
1/30
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
Surface-mounting enclosures
■ Technical specifications
DELTA line
DELTA profil
DELTA style
Single Double Triple Single Double M 110
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
• Depth
mm 84
mm 84
mm 42.5
Flame-retardant floor plate
For horizontal and vertical
mounting
Single Double Triple
155
84
42.5
155
84
42.5
80
80
42.5
125
80
42.5
80
80
30
84
84
42.5
155
84
42.5
155
84
42.5
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA line
Surface-mounting enclosures
For flush-mounting devices, 84-mm
• Titanium white
- Single
- Double
- Triple
}
}
A
5TG2 901
5TG2 902
5TG2 903
1
1
1
1/5
1/3
1/2
021 0.085
021 0.125
021 0.190
• Electrical white
- Single
- Double
- Triple
A
A
A
5TG2 861
5TG2 862
5TG2 863
1
1
1
1/5
1/3
1/2
021 0.085
021 0.125
021 0.190
}
}
5TG1 825
5TG1 826
1
1
1/5
1/5
021 0.048
021 0.078
D
A
D
D
5WG3 110-8AB01
5WG3 110-8AB11
5WG3 110-8AB21
5WG3 110-8AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
}
}
A
5TG2 901
5TG2 902
5TG2 903
1
1
1
1/5
1/3
1/2
021 0.085
021 0.125
021 0.190
5TG2 901
DELTA profil
Surface-mounting enclosures
For flush-mounting devices, 80-mm
• Titanium white
- Single
- Double
5TG1 825
M 110 surface-mounting enclosures
Single
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
0.048
0.048
0.048
0.048
5WG3 110-8AB11
DELTA style
Surface-mounting enclosures
For flush-mounting devices, 84-mm
• Titanium white
- Single
- Double
- Triple
5TG2 901
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/31
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
Pictographs
■ Technical specifications
• For a clear overview of all functions
• For insertion in the two outer pushbutton rockers of the
UP 230, UP 230E, UP 231, UP 231E multifunction pushbuttons
• Dimensions: ∅ 8 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Pictographs for multifunction pushbuttons
1/32
Dimming
B
5WG1 293-8AB00
100
10
022 0.600
Switching
B
5WG1 293-8AB01
100
10
022 0.600
Shutter/blind
B
5WG1 293-8AB02
100
10
022 0.600
Presence/convenience
B
5WG1 293-8AB03
100
10
022 0.600
Absence/standby
B
5WG1 293-8AB04
100
10
022 0.600
Nighttime reduction
B
5WG1 293-8AB05
100
10
022 0.600
Frost protection
B
5WG1 293-8AB06
100
10
022 0.600
Heat protection
B
5WG1 293-8AB07
100
10
022 0.600
Dew point
B
5WG1 293-8AB08
100
10
022 0.600
Storm warning
B
5WG1 293-8AB10
100
10
022 0.600
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
Accessories for trunking systems
■ Overview
■ Design
The modular design provides great flexibility during the planning
phase:
• Trunking
- Surface-mounting version
- Flush-mounting version (available soon)
• Modules
- instabus modules (pushbuttons, room temperature controllers)
- Socket outlet modules
- Masking modules (with Siemens logo)
• Accessories
- Sets of end plates
- Wall junction covers
- Cable holders
- Grounding sets
- Disassembly tools
Design
DELTA millennium is also unique in terms of design and operator
friendliness:
• Customized labeling with text in the user's national
language and symbols
• Uniform, homogeneous and self-explanatory conventional
keys
• Homogeneously illuminated, high-intensity status and orientation
lighting
Disassembly
One masking module per trunking section is required to open a
closed trunking line.
Other modules or trunking lids cannot be disassembled until the
masking module has been removed with the disassembly tool.
Ordering data
The DELTA millennium trunking system has an impressive
homogeneous, smooth and clearly structured operator interface
made of anodized aluminum.
It hides a wealth of innovative technology, exclusively for use
with instabus:
• Independent of country-specific switch and socket boxes
• Linking element between ceilings and floors
• Installation of N devices
The trunking comprises a trunking base and a trunking lid. The
trunking lid is easily and quickly snap-fitted in the trunking base
in the same way as the modules.
The individual modules can be arranged side by side in any
order and be used in any number.
The following data are required for all orders:
• Trunking
- The length of the trunking base depends on the room height
- The number and lengths of the trunking lids depend on the
number of modules
• Modules
- Labeling text
- Symbols
Please complete an order form for each module (see page 1/34)
and enclose it with your order.
Please send DP orders by fax.
Orders for trunking bases and trunking lids should be made out
for the length required in meters, not for a certain number of units:
Example:
If you want to order a trunking base with a length of 173 cm.
• Incorrect: 1 x 5WG1 195-3AB01, 173 cm long
• Correct: 1.73 m 5WG1 195-3AB01
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/33
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
Accessories for trunking systems
To Siemens AG
Industry Sector
BT ET Log
Regensburg
Germany
Fax: +49(0)941 790-2751
Customer´s reference
order reference I
IV
IKE 281 Pushbutton, single
Date
V
Order item
I
Quantity
II
III
III
Order no.
VI
5WG1 . . . - . . . . .
Project
Installation site
Local partner
IKE 282 Pushbutton, double
Notes
V
How to fill in the order form:
VI
IKE 283 Pushbutton, quadruple
V
I
State order item
II
State quantity
III
Fill in desired order no.
IV
Mark desired module according to order no.
V
State inscription text
(font: Univers S47 Condensed Light 24 point)
VI
Select and state symbols
Special inscriptions on demand.
Example for
ordering:
X
VI
Illu m in a tio n
S 1
S 2
S 1 6
S 1 7
IKE 250 Temperature controller
V
-2 -1
0
1
2
Symbols:
S1
S13
S2
S14
S3
S15
S4
S16
S5
S17
S6
S18
S7
S19
S8
S20
S9
S10
S11
S12
1
2
3
4
S21
S22
S23
S24
I2_07689e
1/34
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Pushbutton Accessories
Accessories for trunking systems
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA millennium
AP 195
AP 195 trunking bases1)
• For surface mounting
• Aluminum
• Comprises 1 ground conductor,
3 ground terminals,
1 partition, 4 partition holders,
5 coupling pins
• Dimensions (W x D): 170 x 68 mm,
maximum length 2 m
D
5WG1 195-3AB01
1m
1m
030 2.200
IKE 197
IKE 197 trunking lids
D
• Aluminum
• Comprises ground conductor and ground terminal
for the trunking base
5WG1 197-8AB01
1m
1m
030 1.300
IKE 198
IKE 198 socket outlet covers
D
• Aluminum
• Modules for installation in trunking systems, with
large hinged lid and engraved plug symbol
• Trunking mounting boxes for AP 195 trunking base,
for installation of SCHUKO socket outlets in
DELTA design
• Comprises ground conductor and ground terminal
for the trunking base
5WG1 198-8AB01
1
1
030 0.015
IKE 195
IKE 195 masking modules
D
• Aluminum
• For simple opening of all installed trunking lines
• Comprises ground conductor and ground terminal
for the trunking base
5WG1 195-8AB41
1
1
030 0.199
D
5WG1 195-8AB51
1
1
030 0.159
Sets of end plates
D
• Aluminum
• For front connection of the trunking
• Comprises 2 end plates, 2 ground conductors and
2 ground terminals for the trunking base
5WG1 195-8AB21
1
1
030 0.663
Wall junction covers
D
As covers for wall and ceiling openings, for the
clean connection of trunking to the wall or the ceiling
5WG1 195-8AB31
1
1
030 0.198
D
5WG1 195-8AB01
1
1
030 0.112
Grounding sets
D
Comprises 3 ground conductors, 3 ground terminals
for the trunking base, 3 ground connections for the
trunking lid
5WG1 195-8AB11
1
1
030 0.127
5WG1 195-3AB01
5WG1 197-8AB01
5WG1 198-8AB01
5WG1 195-8AB41
Disassembly tools
With suckers and hooks for simple disassembly of
modules, masking modules and trunking lids
5WG1 195-8AB51
5WG1 195-8AB21
5WG1 195-8AB31
Cable holders
For fixing non-metallic-sheathed cables in the
trunking base,
comprises 1 mounting rail with 2 slide nuts,
5 cable clips, 2 screws with toothed disks
5WG1 195-8AB01
5WG1 195-8AB11
1)
Please specify length when ordering, maximum length: 2 m (see page 1/33 "Ordering data").
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/35
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Touch panels
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
UP 588/12 UP 588/12, UP 588/22 touch panels
UP 588/22
• Multifunctional display/operating device for the KNX,
with 320 x 240 pixels, 5.7" TFT color display and touch screen
• Software-controlled dimming and switching off of LED background lighting
• For the display and operation of at least 210 communication
objects on at least 10 display pages
• An additional page for the display and acknowledgement of at
least 16 alarms
• Time program as weekly program for at least 110 communication
objects and at least 10 switching tasks per weekday
• Presence simulation for all communication objects entered in
the weekly program
• 1-bit or 8-bit scene control for at least 64 scenes
• At least 64 AND/OR operations, each from up to at least
4 communication objects
UP 588/11 UP 588/11, UP 588/21 touch panels
UP 588/21
• Graphical LCD (monochrome) with 5.5 inches (approx. 14 cm)
screen diagonal with 320 x 240 pixel resolution
• Integrated resistive matrix touch with 6 x 10 fields
• Activation of backlighting by touching the screen and automatic
deactivation after a configurable time
• Triggering of a switch command telegram by touching the deactivated screen (e.g. for switching on room lighting)
• Display and control of up to 70 KNX standard functions on 7 display pages, each with 10 function fields and display of separate
alarm page with 4 alarm and 2 text messages
• Selectable function per function field: text display (up to 10
characters), status indication (as symbol or text) or control field
(with up to 2 pushbuttons)
• At least 16 reference conditions for tripping one switching task
respectively
• Individual password protection for each display page
• Buffered realtime clock and display of time and date
• Display of a loadable image as a start screen page or with
display of a slide show containing at least 50 loadable images
instead of a start screen page
• USB interface for loading images and symbols
• Pushbutton for device reset
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection via bus terminal
• Connection of external power supply over screw terminals for
2.5 mm²
• Flush-mounting device in flush-mounting/hollow-wall box with
the dimensions (W x H x D): 161.5 x 135 x 64 mm
• Time program (weekly program) for 5 channels (communication
objects) each with up to 10 scheduled entries
• Scene control for storing and calling up of 8 scenes with
10 communication objects
• Can be configured using ETS (Engineering Tool Software)
• Display of date and time
• Integrated bus coupling unit
• Bus connection via bus terminal
• Hollow-wall box for flush mounting included in delivery
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 190 x 156 x 58 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
1
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
0.725
UP 588/12 UP 588/12, touch panels1)2)
• Rated operational voltage 230 V AC, 50 Hz
N
B
5WG1 588-2AB12
UP 588/22 UP 588/22, touch panels1)2)
• Rated operational voltage 24 V AC/DC
Accessories
N
B
5WG1 588-2AB22
1
5WG1 588-8AB02
5WG1 588-8AB03
5WG1 588-8AB04
5WG1 588-8AB05
On req.
On req.
On req.
On req.
C
5WG1 588-8EB01
1
1
030 0.130
}
5WG1 588-2AB11
1
1
030 0.750
B
5WG1 588-2AB21
1
1
030 0.710
}
5WG1 588-8AB01
1
1
030 0.128
Design frames
5WG1 588-2AB12
5WG1 588-2AB22
with aluminum frame
DT Order No.
N
For UP 588/12, UP 588/22 touch panels
• Aluminum
• Stainless steel
• Black glass
• White glass
Flush-mounting/hollow-wall box
0.725
N
For UP 588 touch panels
UP 588/11 UP 588/11 touch panels1) (to be discontinued)
• White display backlighting
• Rated operational voltage 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
UP 588/21 UP 588/21 touch panels1) (to be discontinued)
• White display backlighting
• Rated operational voltage 24 V AC/DC
Accessories
Design frames (to be discontinued)
For UP 588/11, UP 588/21 touch panels
Made of anodized aluminum, with Siemens logo.
5WG1 588-2AB11
5WG1 588-2AB21
1)
The required design frame must be ordered separately.
2)
The flush-mounting/hollow-wall box must be ordered separately.
1/36
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Remote controls
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
S 425
S 425 wave hand-held radio transmitters
• 4 preselection pushbuttons and 4 pushbutton pairs for wireless
operation of 16 different room functions
• Separate pushbutton pair for a central function (e.g. central
ON/OFF)
• Configurable function per pushbutton pair: switch, switch and
dim, shutter/blind control, store and call up scenes
S 425
S 425 IR hand-held transmitters
• Remote control of 8 of 64 possible channels, can be operated
as switchable groups of 4 channels each
• Assignable functions per channel: Switching OVER, switching
ON/OFF, switching ON/OFF and dimming, shutter/blind, value
transmission, store and call up scenes
AP 420
AP 421
AP 422
• Radio transmitter: 868 MHz
• Black or silver
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 154 x 55 x 24 mm
•
•
•
•
Rotary switches for setting the channel number range
Transmitter range approx. 20 m
Black
Dimensions (H x W x D): 159 x 39 x 23 mm
IR wall-mounted transmitters
• For wireless control of actuators over bus telegrams. The actuator
groups can be operated over the pushbutton rockers.
Transmitter range with red LED cover: approx. 8 m
transmitter range with white LED cover: 6 m
• The battery must be ordered separately
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 75 × 115 × 25 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
S 425
S 425 wave hand-held radio transmitters3)
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
17 channels
• Black
• Silver
}
}
5WG3 425-7AB21
5WG3 425-7AB71
1
1
1
1
030 0.124
030 0.125
S 425 IR hand-held transmitters2)
}
5WG1 425-7AB21
1
1
030 0.070
A
C
5WG1 420-3AB11
5WG1 420-3AB12
1
1
2
2
030 0.079
030 0.079
Double, adjustable channels: 2 of 64
• Red LED covers, titanium white (to be discontinued) A
• White LED covers, titanium white (to be discontinued) C
5WG1 421-3AB11
5WG1 421-3AB12
1
1
2
2
030 0.079
030 0.079
Quadruple, adjustable channels: 4 of 64
• Red LED covers, titanium white (to be discontinued) A
• White LED covers, titanium white (to be discontinued) C
5WG1 422-3AB11
5WG1 422-3AB12
1
1
2
2
030 0.079
030 0.079
Accessories
490 batteries, 6 V (to be discontinued)
5WG1 490-8AA81
1
1
030 0.030
5WG3 425-7AB21
S 425
8 channels
5WG1 425-7AB21
AP 420
AP 420 IR wall-mounted transmitters1)
(to be discontinued)
Single, adjustable channels: 1 of 64
• Red LED covers, titanium white
• White LED covers, titanium white
AP 421
AP 422
AP 421 IR wall-mounted transmitters1)
(to be discontinued)
AP 422 IR wall-mounted transmitters1)
(to be discontinued)
D
For the power supply of the AP 420, AP 421, AP 422
IR wall-mounted transmitter
1) The batteries required for operation are included in delivery.
2) The 4 batteries of type LR03/AAA (1.5 V) required for operation are not included in delivery.
3) The battery 490, 6 V required for operation must be ordered separately.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/37
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Visualization, software
You can use the ComBridge Studio software to manage the KNX
system and its components from any computer, whether PC,
notebook, tablet PC or PDA/smart phone, as long as the user
has the appropriate access rights.
■ Overview
Web-Visualization with ComBridge Studio
Due to their distributed structure, KNX systems support a high
degree of automation in building management systems, as well
as the detailed and effective management of building-relevant
information. The IPAS ComBridge Studio Suite allows you to
make optimum use of the options provided by the KNX system.
The software enables KNX to operate, control and visualize
systems over the Internet. It also allows users an overview of key
information and enables an immediate response if required.
The use of wireless network connections supports the management
of the KNX system without being tied to a fixed workstation (e.g.
central control room). Mobile access to the management system of
a building is an invaluable advantage during the local commissioning,
maintaining and troubleshooting of plants.
Used together with ComBridge Studio Software, KNXnet/IP devices,
such as a N 146 IP router, offer a modular, high-capacity and
effective building management system that is unrivaled in flexibility.
EXTERNAL
SERVICE
CENTRE
Mobile
Service Staff
off site
Mobile
Service Staff
on site
INTERNET
Administration
Management
Security etc.
ComBridge
Studio Server
Control Room
VPN Router
VPN
INTERNET
VPN
LC
LC
LC
LC
LC
I2_13490
LC
Overview of the ComBridge Studio system concept
Using standard communication networks based on Internet
protocols, the building management system of distant premises
can be managed over a central service control room. Satellite
connections are also supported: the software has been
designed so that even prolonged transmission times for the
relevant information do not influence the functionality or stability
of the system.
The use of standard browser technologies has considerably
simplified access to the management system. All applications
run exclusively on the server, which is where they are also
installed and modified. A client-side installation is therefore not
necessary; access to building information, such as room control,
building monitoring, etc. is over a standard HTML browser - an
extremely cost-effective solution.
Companies that have a multitude of premises, such as store
groups, banks, gas stations, etc., are usually able to use their
existing IT networks to link the building management systems of
their premises with the IPAS building management system. This
results in lower installation costs and improves management of
the building infrastructures.
1/38
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
The ComBridge Studio software has already been implemented
in a multitude of applications, including in:
• Store chains
• Industrial plants
• Apartments
• Vacations sites with individual bungalows
• Distributed premises
• Hotels
• Office buildings
• Sport arenas
• Exclusive villas
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Visualization, software
ComBridge Studio software structure
Core and application services
The ComBridge Studio Suite comprises core services that are
automatically started with the operating system (Windows) of the
server or PC so that no manual intervention is required on the
part of the user, i.e. no need to log in.
The ComBridge Studio Suite services include:
• Core Service
Communicates with all defined KNXnet/IP devices and
automatically monitors all configured KNXnet/IP devices. This
service is designed to check all configured devices and
ensure that the connection is active. If the connection is lost,
the device server automatically attempts to reconnect. If the
physical connection permits, the device server maintains all
connections to the KNXnet/IP devices.
• KNXnetIP Service
Ensures communication with the devices using the KNXnet/IP
protocol.
• Client Manager
Acts as communication hub between the Core Service and the
Application Services.
• Automation Service
Executes the application services, e.g. for alarms, e-mail or
scheduling programs.
• MCG Service
Provides the configuration service for a N 350E IP Controller.
ComBridge Studio software structure
The Core Service communicates with the KNXnet/IP devices.
Use Configuration Manager to add or remove devices or to
monitor communication with them.
The Client Manager acts as communication distributor between
the Core Service and the application services, as well as
between the Application Services (e.g. from the OPC server or
Generic XML to the Visual Director). The Client Manager interacts
with the control room in order to provide current system
information and application service configurations.
ComBridge Studio Suite application services:
• WebTab Service:
Webtabs operating images in tabular form, each with one line
per data point. Each line contains a description text, the group
address or object name, the current state of the data point and
buttons for operation. Using the InfoPoint Configurator, you
can create your own WebTabs in just a few minutes.
• Visual Director:
IPAS ComBridge Studio Visual Director is supplementary to
Webtab and offers a wide range of free design options.
User-definable navigation, free layout of of the graphical
display and control elements.
• Web standards:
Visual Director is HTML-based so that company Web assets,
such as logo, navigation, graphics, dynamic HTML, layouts,
scripts and dynamic contents in visualization projects, can be
used again. Furthermore, HTML know-how is very prevalent
on the market and easily available.
• User login:
Visual Director provides complete user management. User
can be assigned their own start page and navigation. User
levels let you control user access to data points.
• Configuration:
The supplied Visual Director is a menu-assisted, pixel-graphic
HTML editor with a multitude of functions for creating your own
Web operator interface.
• E-Mail Service:
Critical states or events can be monitored so that in the
event of their occurrence, e-mails are sent automatically. The
overshooting or undershooting of limit values, 0 or 1 states, or
the receipt of specific group addresses can be tested. The
contents of e-mails can be designed to have great impact,
and even sent with an attachment, e.g. with photos or circuit
diagrams.
• Database Service:
You can use the DS to write selected KNX group addresses
(indications, measured values, count values, switch and
positioning commands) to a database for subsequent
evaluation and reporting.
• (Weekly) Scheduling Service:
Weekly scheduling programs can be stored and managed
centrally using the Scheduling Service. Simply checkmark
week days to activate. Switch and positioning commands can
be executed.
• Annual Scheduling Service:
With the Annual Scheduling Service, scheduling programs
can be centrally created and managed for selected days or
periods. Switch and positioning commands can be executed.
• Alarm Service:
Critical states or events can be monitored so that in the event
of their occurrence, an alarm indication is automatically
displayed in an alarm window. The overshooting or
undershooting of limit values, 0 or 1 states, or the receipt of
specific group addresses can be tested. Even after they have
been acknowledged, alarms are stored in a database for
subsequent evaluation.
• OPC Service:
ComBridge Studio offers full OPC server functionality, as well
as OPC client functionality, to enable the flexible integration of
KNX systems into other control system.
Double advantage: ComBridge Studio OPC Services can be
used at the same time as other ComBridge Studio applications.
For example, the plant can be controlled by OPC at the same
time as the workplace is controlled using Webtab or a Visual
Director application is implemented. It is also possible to
ensure mobile access to KNX installations for service personnel,
or set up an e-mail message service, etc.
• Scenes:
Supports the creation of centrally executed scenes.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/39
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Visualization, software
The ComBridge Studio InfoPoint Configurator is a configuration
tool with an intuitive interface for application services:
• WebTab Service
• E-Mail Service
• Database Service
• (Weekly) Scheduling Service
• Annual Scheduling Service
• Alarm Service
• OPC server
Licensing
The IPAS ComBridge Studio software license is based on the
selected application functions, the number of connected
KNXnet/IP devices and the number of simultaneous users.
The IPAS ComBridge Studio software is available in 4 application
function packages: micro, mini, midi and maxi. The OPC server
and OPC client packages are also available.
All function packages include connection to one
KNXnet/IP devices and are for one user.
The application packages micro, mini, midi and maxi can be
combined with all of the following expansion packages:
• 5 user expansion package
• 5 gateway expansion package
• OPC server expansion package
• OPC client expansion package
• Weekly switching schedule
• Database and alarm history
• Annual switching schedule
• Scenes
• Logic
• E-mail
■ Technical specifications
Application packages
Package functions micro-V2 mini-V2
✔
✔
Core
✔
Visual Director
✔
✔
Database +
❏
Alarm history
✔
Scenes
❏
Weekly schedule ❏
❏
❏
❏
Logic
❏
Annual schedule ❏
E-mail
❏
❏
❏
❏
OPC server
❏
❏
OPC client
✔
1 x gateway
✔
✔
1 x user
✔
1 x gateway
❏
❏
1 x user
❏
❏
❏ Optional/expansion packages
1/40
midi-V2
maxi-V2 OPC-S OPC-C
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
❏
❏
❏
❏
✔
------
❏
❏
✔
-------
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
✔
Visualization software IPAS ComBridge Studio,
application packages
micro-V2
• Core functions for the signaling, logging and display of alarms
and operating states or operating values, as well as current
images on PC (operator terminals)
• Acquisition of all KNX group addresses from ETS2 and ETS3
• Assignment option of data point type, unit and a name of up to
32 characters in length for each operator entry to be displayed
• Editor for the fast creation of tabular images that can be
operated over browser
• Dynamic image elements for the display of updated data point
states
• Configuration of time scheduling programs, event programs,
ODBC database interface, e-mail server interface, OPC server
interface
• Visual Director of graphical display and operation
• Read-in of background images as pixel and vector graphics,
including the graphic editor IPAS ComBridge Studio, Visual
Editor for creation of images that can be operated over
browser
• Operation enable in at least 4 authorization steps, with
time-dependent operation enable, with user-dependent
operation enable per operator entry
• Operator-dependent start image and operating image
structure
• The following dynamic image elements are available for the
display of updated plant images:
- Output variables
- Follow-up image variables
- Switching variables
- Status variables
- Text variables
- Counter variables
• Insertion of video camera images
• Output of colored screenshots to printers
• Configuration and and playback version, for one
KNXnet/IP router or controller
• Storage of event information on the hard disk and display on
a screen page
• Failure monitoring of the KNXnet/IP gateways
• Configuration and and playback version
• For one user/operator terminal simultaneously
• Driver software for the KNX connection over Ethernet interface
with KNXnet/IP, including manual.
mini-V2
• Function and scope of delivery of visualization software IPAS
ComBridge Studio micro V2
• Database server interface for the storage of bus events in any
database with ODBC interface, as the basis for, e.g.
consumption statistics for count values or output statistics for
a peak load limiter, with configuration of the database server
interface from the visualization software
• Storage of event information on the hard disk and display on
a screen page
• Database-supported logging of an unlimited number of
alarms, with display and tracking of alarms in a separate
alarm window, with configuration from the visualization
software
• Scene control with an unlimited number of channels and
entries with configuration of the scenes of the visualization
software
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Visualization, software
midi-V2
• Function and scope of delivery of the IPAS ComBridge Studio
micro V2 visualization software
• Scheduling program as weekly program with an unlimited
number of channels and entries with configuration of the
scheduling program of the visualization software
• Logic control with an unlimited number of channels and entries
with configuration of the logic of the visualization software.
maxi-V2
• Function and scope of delivery of the IPAS ComBridge Studio
midi V2 visualization software
• Scheduling program as weekly program and annual program,
with an unlimited number of channels and entries with
configuration of the scheduling program of the visualization
software
• E-mail server interface for the event-controlled transmission of
electronic messages, with configuration of indications from
the visualization software, with an unlimited number of
channels and entries, with event-dependent message
transmission, with event-dependent receiver lists, with
event-dependent attachment of images and/or files.
OPC-S
• Same as micro-V2, without Visual Director,
• Configuration of OPC server interface,
• OPC server interface for data exchange with an OPC client,
• Configuration of OPC data points from the visualization
software as configuration and playback version
OPC-C
• Same as micro-V2, without Visual Director,
• Configuration of OPC client interface,
• OPC client interface for data exchange with an OPC client,
• Configurator for configuration of OPC data points, as
configuration and playback version
IPAS ComBridge Studio expansion packages
5 users
• Expansion of IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software
(micro, mini, midi, maxi, OPC-S and OPC-C) by
5 further user stations.
5 gateways
• Expansion of IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software
(micro, mini, midi, maxi, OPC-S and OPC-C) by the
communication with 5 further KNXnet/IP routers or
IP controllers.
OPC server
• Expansion of IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software
(micro, mini, midi or maxi) by an OPC server interface for data
exchange with an OPC client
• Configuration of OPC data points from the visualization
software
OPC client
• Expansion of IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software
(micro, mini, midi or maxi) by an OPC client interface for data
exchange with an OPC server
• Configurator for configuration of OPC data points
Weekly switching schedule
• Expansion of IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software by
a scheduling program as a weekly program
• Unlimited number of channels and entries
• Configuration of the scheduling program from the visualization
software.
Database and alarm history
• Expansion of IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software by
a database server interface for the storage of bus events in
any database with ODBC interface, as the basis for, e.g.
consumption statistics for count values or output statistics for
a peak load limiter, with configuration of the database server
interface from the visualization software
• Storage of event information on the hard disk and display on
a screen page
• Database-supported logging of an unlimited number of
alarms, with display and tracking of alarms in a separate
alarm window, with configuration of the alarms from the
visualization software.
Annual switching schedule
• Expansion of IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software by
a scheduling program as an annual program
• Unlimited number of channels and entries
• Configuration of the scheduling program from the visualization
software
Scenes
• Expansion of IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software by
a scene control
• Unlimited number of channels and entries
• Configuration of scenes from the visualization software
Logic
• Expansion of IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software by
a logic control
• Unlimited number of channels and entries
• Configuration of logic from the visualization software
E-mail
• Expansion of IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software by
an e-mail server interface for the event-controlled transmission
of electronic information
• Configuration of messages from the visualization software
• Unlimited number of channels and entries
• Event-dependent message texts
• Event-dependent receiver lists
• Event-dependent attachment of images and/or files
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/41
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Visualization, software
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
With optional expansion packages for
• Number of users
• Number of KNXnet/IP gateways
• Scheduling programs
• Database interface
• OPC interface
• E-mail service
Visualization software IPAS ComBridge Studio,
application packages
• micro-V2
ZNX:63101-32-70
On req.
• mini-V2
ZNX:63101-32-71
On req.
• midi-V2
ZNX:63101-32-72
On req.
• maxi-V2
ZNX:63101-32-73
On req.
• OPC S
ZNX:63101-32-74
On req.
• OPC C
ZNX:63101-32-75
On req.
• 5 users
ZNX:63101-32-76
On req.
• 5 gateways
ZNX:63101-32-77
On req.
• OPC server
ZNX:63101-32-78
On req.
• OPC client
ZNX:63101-32-79
On req.
• Weekly switching schedule
ZNX:63101-32-80
On req.
• Database + alarm history
ZNX:63101-32-81
On req.
• Annual switching schedule
ZNX:63101-32-82
On req.
• Scenes
ZNX:63101-32-83
On req.
• Logic
ZNX:63101-32-84
On req.
• E-mail
ZNX:63101-32-85
On req.
IPAS ComBridge Studio, expansion packages
1/42
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Visualization, server
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
N 151
N 151 IP viewers
• Interface converter between a KNX and an IP network, with the
following simultaneously executable functions:
- As WebServer for monitoring and control of up to
40 states and values transmitted over the KNX network, which
can be dislayed on up to 5 image pages of a PC connected
to the IP network using Internet Explorer 6.0, 7.0 or Firefox 2.0
- For the parameterization of a KNX system using ETS3
- For communication between the KNX network and a
ComBridge Studio visualization software
• Special WEB page for the multilanguage adaptation of the
presentation of an image page and a special WEB page for
firmware upgrades
• Ethernet interface for connection to the IP network using the
Internet Protocol
• RJ45 socket for connection to Ethernet 10 Mbits/s
• 2 LED displays for indication of ready-to-run state and for IP
communication
• Integrated bus coupling units
• KNX bus connection via bus terminal
• Electronics powered over an external power supply unit for
24 V AC/DC
• Connection of external power supply over an extra-low-voltage
terminal
• Modular installation devices for mounting on TH35 EN 60715
mounting rail
• Width: 4 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
N 151
N 151 IP viewers
DT Order No.
N
A
5WG1 151-1AB01
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.150
5WG1 151-1AB01
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1/43
© Siemens AG 2008
1
Display, Operation
Notes
7
1/44
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
2
© Siemens AG 2008
Output Devices
2/2
Introduction
2/3
Binary output devices
2/7
Analog output devices
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
2
© Siemens AG 2008
Output Devices
2
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
2/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Binary output devices
Binary outputs and load switches in several versions.
2/3
Analog output devices
Flexible application: the universal I/O module provides
flexible inputs and outputs.
2/7
© Siemens AG 2008
Output Devices
Binary output devices
N 567/12
N 567/11
N 567/21
N 510/03
N 510/04
N 512
GE 561/02
UP 562
UP 562/11
UP 562/31
UP 511/10
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
GE
--
UP
--
UP
--
UP
--
UP
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
N 562
N 567
N
N 511/02
N 512/213)
Type
N 512/11
■ Technical specifications
Enclosure data
Design
Modular installation devices for mounting
on TH 35 EN 60715 mounting rail
For installation in flush-mounting switch
and socket boxes with ∅ 60 mm
Modular installation device in oblong design,
for installation in luminaires for fluorescent lamps
Integrated user interface for plugging in a
single to quadruple bus pushbutton
Interface for connection of a switch actuator
expansion
Dimensions
• Height
mm
• Width/∅ (1 MW = 18 mm)
mm
• Depth
mm
28
71
3 MW 3 MW 4 MW 4 MW 4 MW 8 MW 4 MW 4 MW 4 MW 8 MW 2 MW 274.5 71
42
40
51
∅ 44 ∅ 53 ∅ 53
40
28
28
Mounting type
Claw fixing
Screw fixing
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
✔
✔
---
---
---
✔
✔1)
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
---
---
---
---
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
✔
✔1)
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
✔
✔1)
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
----
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
3
3
42)
82)
82)
162)
4
4
8
8
2
3
1
1
1
1
230
16
230
16
✔
✔
230
8
--
230
2
--
230
8
--
230
10
--
230
16
--
230
16
--
230
16
--
230
16
--
230
10
--
230
10
--
230
10
--
230
10
--
230
6
--
230
16
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
5
5
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
Display/control elements
Direct operation (local operation)
Mechanical local operation
Mechanical switching position display
LED for status indication per output
Power supply
Electronics powered over bus voltage
Electronics powered over an integrated
power supply unit for supply voltage 230 V AC
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection via bus terminal
Bus connection over contact system to
data rail
✔
Outputs
Load output
Floating relay contacts
Rated contact voltage, AC
Rated contact current
3-phase switching
(3 outputs simultaneously)
Last check
Load data
(see chapter "Technical Information")
V
A
Inputs
Max. cable length, unshielded, untwisted
Pushbutton inputs
For signal input
(floating contacts)
Determination of switching state over the
voltage generated in the device
1) Executed over main module.
2) Except channel A.
3) Only in connection with 512/11.
m
For selection and ordering data, see page 2/5.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
2/3
2
© Siemens AG 2008
Output Devices
530B01
1)
901002 UP 562/11
207101 UP 562/31
207101 UP 511/10
--
UP 562
530501 GE 561/02
26
27
--
520802
26
27
--
520B01
38
38
--
520901
38
38
--
520501
908301
17
17
--
520401 N 562
900701 N 512
49 106 11 19 11 17 10 19
49 74 11 20 12 17 10 20
-- --- -- -- -- -- --
901D01 N 511/02
906401 N 510/04
52
52
--
980401 N 567/21
55
56
--
980302 N 567/11
511 100 100 100 106 55
511 100 100 100 106 56
4
------
980304 N 567/12
Application program
980303 N 567
Type
906401 N 510/03
Binary output devices
981B01 N 512/11
2
Output functions
Max. number of group addresses
Max. number of assignments
Max. no. of expansion modules that can be
butt-mounted
Locking function
Configurable behavior in the event of a bus
power failure
Configurable behavior in the event of a bus
power recovery
Configurable behavior in the event of a
system voltage recovery
Behavior in the event of system voltage failure
• Positive OFF switching of the outputs
• Unchanged switching state of outputs
---
---
---
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
-- --- ✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
-- ✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
-- --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Speed control 1 ... 3-step
Heating control
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
-- --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Control of electrothermal position drives
Scene control
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
-- --
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
Integrated 8-bit scene control
Scenes to be integrated per channel
Time functions
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
8
8
8
8
8
---
---
---
-- ✔
-- 8
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
OFF delay
ON delay
Timer mode (automatic stairwell switch)
Night mode (lighting for cleaning)
Warning of impending OFF
Logical functions
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
-- ✔
✔
---
✔
✔
----
------
✔
✔
------
✔
✔
------
✔
✔
------
✔
✔
------
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
Positively driven operation
Logic function (1 object)
Logic function (2 objects)
Can be inverted per output
(NO contact/NC contact)
Status
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
---
---
---
✔
✔
--
-- ✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
--
✔
---
----
--
✔
----
--
✔
---
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Send status per channel
Operating hours counting with limit value
monitoring per channel2)
Switching operations counting with limit value
monitoring per channel2)
Output of load current
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
-- --
---
✔
--
---
✔
--
---
✔
--
---
✔
--
---
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
-- --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
-- --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Ventilator control
1)
See table "Application programs and pushbuttons for use with UP 562".
2)
Main and expansion modules.
✔
----
✔
Application programs and pushbuttons for use with UP 562
For DELTA design
Application program
i-system
profil/style
Can be used with pushbuttons
901902
UP 221
901A02
UP 222
901C02
UP 221E
901D02
UP 222E
Number of pushbutton pairs
1
2
1
2
2/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
901402
UP 241
UP 242
UP 285
1
ambiente
901502
UP 243
UP 244
UP 286
2
901602
UP 245
UP 246
UP 287
4
901802
UP 284
4
© Siemens AG 2008
Output Devices
Binary output devices
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
N 512/11
N 512/11 switch actuators, main modules
3 x 230/400 V AC, 16 A, C-load,
load check
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
N
B
5WG1 512-1AB11
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.250
N
B
5WG1 512-1AB21
1
1
030 0.250
}
5WG1 567-1AB01
1
1
030 0.220
}
5WG1 567-1AB12
1
1
030 0.265
}
5WG1 567-1AB11
1
1
030 0.270
}
5WG1 567-1AB21
1
1
030 0.623
}
5WG1 510-1AB03
1
1
030 0.240
}
5WG1 510-1AB04
1
1
030 0.280
5WG1 512-1AB11
Accessories
N 512/21
N 512/21 switch actuators, expansion
3 x 230/400 V AC, 16 A, C-load,
load check
5WG1 512-1AB21
N 567
N 567 switch actuators
4 x 230 V AC, 8 A
5WG1 567-1AB01
N 567/12
N 567/12 switch actuators
8 x 230 V AC, 2 A
N 567/11
N 567/11 switch actuators
8 x 230 V AC, 8 A
5WG1 567-1AB11
5WG1 567-1AB12
N 567/21
N 567/21 switch actuators
16 x 230 V AC, 10 A
5WG1 567-1AB21
N 510/03
N 510/03 load switches
4 x 230 V AC, 16 A
N 510/04
N 510/04 load switches
4 x 230 V AC, C load, 16 A
5WG1 510-1AB03
5WG1 510-1AB04
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
2/5
2
© Siemens AG 2008
Output Devices
2
Binary output devices
Type
N 512
Version
DT Order No.
N 512 load switches
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 512-1AB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.516
B
5WG1 511-1AB02
1
1
030 0.045
}
5WG1 562-1AB01
1
1
030 0.105
}
5WG1 561-4AB02
1
1
030 0.140
}
5WG1 562-2AB01
1
1
030 0.080
}
5WG1 562-2AB11
1
1
030 0.055
N
}
5WG1 562-2AB31
1
0.100
N
}
5WG1 511-2AB10
1
030 0.115
8 x 230 V AC, 16 A, C load
5WG1 512-1AB01
N 511/02
N 511/02 switch actuators
N
8 x 230 V AC, 16 A
5WG1 511-1AB02
N 562
N 562 binary outputs
2 x 230 V AC, 10 A
5WG1 562-1AB01
GE 561/02 GE 561/02 binary outputs
3 x 230 V AC, 10 A
5WG1 561-4AB02
UP 562
UP 562 binary outputs
2 x 230 V AC, 10 A, with PEI
5WG1 562-2AB01
UP 562/11 UP 562/11 binary outputs
2 x 230 V AC, 10 A, without PEI
5WG1 562-2AB11
UP 562/31 UP 562/31 switch actuators
On req.
2 x 230 V AC, 6 A, 2 x binary inputs
5WG1 562-2AB31
UP 511/10 UP 511/10 switch actuators
1
1 x 230 V AC, 16 A, 2 x binary inputs
5WG1 511-2AB10
2/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Output Devices
Analog output devices
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
N 670
Universal N 670 I/O modules
• 2 universal inputs/outputs, each adjustable as
- Analog input 0 V ... 10 V DC
- Analog output 0 V ... 10 V DC
- Binary input for 10 V DC
- Binary output for 10 V DC
• Analog input with limit value monitoring and signaling,
with adjustable limit values and hysteresis
• Analog output with adjustable lower and upper limit of the
output voltage with adjustable voltage value in the event of bus
voltage failure and recovery
• Binary input with pulse edge evaluation
• Binary output with adjustable switching position in the event of
bus voltage failure and recovery
• 2 inputs for the connection of temperature sensors with Pt1000
measured element for temperature measurement in the range
-25 °C ... +45 °C, with limit value monitoring and signaling, with
adjustable limit values and hysteresis
• 2 binary outputs, relay contacts rated for 230 V AC, 10 A at
p.f. = 1, with
- Configurable actuated position (NO contact/NC contact)
- Positively driven operation
- Configurable switching position in the event of bus voltage
failure and recovery
• Electronics powered over an external power supply unit for
24 V AC/DC
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection over bus terminal and contact system to data rail
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width: 4 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
N 670
Version
DT Order No.
Universal N 670 I/O modules1)
}
5WG1 670-1AB03
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.220
2 x universal I/O, 2 inputs Pt1000,
2 outputs 230 V AC, 10 A
5WG1 670-1AB03
1)
The external power supply unit with 24 V AC/DC must be ordered separately (e.g. 4AC2 402).
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
2/7
2
© Siemens AG 2008
Output Devices
2
Notes
7
2/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
3
© Siemens AG 2008
Input Devices
3/2
Introduction
3/3
Binary input devices
3/6
Analog input devices
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
3
© Siemens AG 2008
Input Devices
Introduction
3
■ Overview
Devices
3/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Binary input devices
Binary inputs monitor switching states and signal them
on the GAMMA instabus.
3/3
Analog input devices
Flexible application: the universal I/O module provides
flexible inputs and outputs.
3/6
© Siemens AG 2008
Input Devices
Binary input devices
■ Technical specifications
N 262E11
N 263E11
N 264E11
N 260
N 261
GE 262/02
UP 220/02
UP 220/03
UP 220/13
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
6 MW
6 MW
6 MW
6 MW
2 MW
2 MW
42
274.5
28
38
43
17.6
42
42
8.5
42
42
8.5
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
5
10
10
8
--
16
--
8
--
--
4
4
4
2
✔
--
✔
--
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
-----
--8
--
-----
---16
--8
--
4
----
-4
---
-----
-----
-----
-----
N 262E
N 263E
3
Type
Enclosure data
✔
Modular installation devices for
mounting on TH35 EN 60715
mounting rail
For insertion in flush-mounting switch
-and socket boxes with
∅ = 60 mm and depth = 60 mm
Enclosures for device installation
-Dimensions
• Height
mm
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
mm 6 MW
• Depth
mm
Display/control elements
LED for status indication per input
Power supply
Electronics powered over bus voltage
Electronics powered over an integrated
power supply unit for
supply voltage 230 V AC
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection over contact system
to data rail
Bus connection via bus terminal
Inputs
Max. cable length, unshielded,
untwisted
Pushbutton inputs
For signal input
(floating contacts)
Determination of switching state over
the voltage generated in the device
For voltage input
(with common ground (N) or (-))
• 230 V AC
• 24 V AC/DC
• 12 … 230 V AC/DC
• 12 … 230 V AC/12 … 115 V DC
m
For selection and ordering data, see page 3/5.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
3/3
© Siemens AG 2008
Input Devices
980D01 N 262E11
980D01 N 263E11
980D01 N 264E11
240505 N 260
240A01
220703
240505 N 261
240A01
220703
240505 GE 262/02
240A01
220703
900901 UP 220/02
240505 UP 220/03
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
14
16
8
9
27
27
14
16
8
9
27
27
14
16
8
9
27
27
20
20
14
16
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
----
--
✔
---
--
✔
----
--
✔
---
--
✔
----
✔
✔
Adjustable cyclic transmission
Configurable transmission in the event of
changes to the input
Configurable transmission in the event of bus
power recovery
Transmission delay with adjustable delay time
Configurable event-controlled transmission
Switching
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
✔
---
---
---
---
---
--
✔
✔
--
---
--
✔
✔
--
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
-----
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
-----
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
----
---
✔
✔
✔
--
8 bit
• Rising edge
• Falling edge
• Rising and falling edge
• Short/long button press can be evaluated
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
-----
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
16 bit
• Rising edge
• Falling edge
• Rising and falling edge
• Configurable short/long button press
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
-----
1-pushbutton dimming
2-pushbutton dimming with stop telegram (4 bit)
2-pushbutton dimming with cyclic transmission (4 bit)
2-pushbutton dimming with value setting (8 bit)
Short/long button press can be evaluated
Shutter/blind
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1-pushbutton shutter/blind control
2-pushbutton shutter/blind control
Short/long button press can be evaluated
Scene
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Store and call up scene, 8-bit
Store and call up scene, 1-bit in conjunction with
scene module
Pulse counting
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Pulse counting with/without limit value monitoring
(8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit)
Group control
✔
✔
✔
1-pushbutton group control
✔
✔
✔
Application program
220710
980901 N 263E
Max. number of group addresses
Max. number of assignments
Telegram rate limitations
Configurable debounce time
Locking of inputs using locking objects
Adjustable duration of long button press
Configurable contact type (NO contact/NC contact)
Transmission parameters
Type
240505 UP 220/13
980901 N 262E
3
220710
Binary input devices
Input functions
Switching ON/OFF
• Rising edge
• Falling edge
• Rising and falling edge
• Short/long button press can be evaluated
Switching OVER
• Rising edge
• Falling edge
• Rising and falling edge
Value transmission
14
16
✔
12
12
--
✔
12
12
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--✔
----
---
✔
----
--
✔
✔
--
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
--
✔
--
--
✔
--
✔
✔
---
--
--
---
--
✔
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
-----
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
----
---
✔
✔
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
----
✔
✔
--
----
✔
✔
✔
----
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
-----
✔
--
-----
✔
--
--
-----
✔
✔
✔
--
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
------
------
--
------
------
--
------
------
--
✔
✔
✔
---
--
✔
------
--
✔
------
--
✔
----
----
--
----
--
----
--
✔
✔
--
----
--
--
----
--
✔
----
----
----
----
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
✔
--
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
✔
--
✔
-✔
✔
-✔
--
-✔
✔
--
✔
--
✔
-✔
✔
-✔
✔
Dimming
For selection and ordering data, see page 3/5.
3/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
✔
✔
---
✔
✔
✔
---
✔
✔
✔
---
✔
--✔
--
© Siemens AG 2008
Input Devices
Binary input devices
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
N 262E
N 262E binary input devices
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 262-1EB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.374
}
5WG1 263-1EB01
1
1
030 0.280
}
5WG1 262-1EB11
1
1
030 0.414
}
5WG1 263-1EB11
1
1
030 0.325
}
5WG1 264-1EB11
1
1
030 0.414
X
5WG1 260-1AB01
1
1
030 0.105
X
5WG1 261-1AB01
1
1
030 0.105
}
5WG1 262-4AB02
1
1
030 0.140
u
}
5WG1 220-2AB02
1
1
030 0.043
u
}
5WG1 220-2AB03
1
1
030 0.020
u
}
5WG1 220-2AB13
1
1
030 0.015
8 inputs for floating contacts
N 263E
N 263E binary input devices
8 inputs for 12 ... 230 V AC/DC
5WG1 262-1EB01
5WG1 263-1EB01
N 262E11
N 262E11 binary input devices
16 inputs for floating contacts
N 263E11
N 263E11 binary input devices
16 inputs for 12 ... 230 V AC / 12 ... 115 V DC
N 264E11
N 264E11 binary input devices
2 x 8 inputs , 8 for 12 ... 230 V AC/DC,
8 for floating contacts
5WG1 262-1EB11
5WG1 263-1EB11
5WG1 264-1EB11
N 260
N 260 binary inputs
4 inputs for 230 V AC
N 261
N 261 binary inputs
4 inputs for 24 V AC/DC
5WG1 260-1AB01
5WG1 261-1AB01
GE 262/02 GE 262/02 binary inputs
4 inputs for floating contacts
5WG1 262-4AB02
UP 220/02 UP 220/02 pushbutton interfaces
4 inputs for floating contacts
5WG1 220-2AB02
UP 220/03 UP 220/03 pushbutton interfaces
4 inputs for floating contacts
5WG1 220-2AB03
UP 220/13 UP 220/13 pushbutton interfaces
2 inputs for floating contacts
5WG1 220-2AB13
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
3/5
3
© Siemens AG 2008
Input Devices
Analog input devices
3
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
N 670
Universal N 670 I/O modules
• 2 universal inputs/outputs, each adjustable as
- Analog input 0 V ... 10 V DC
- Analog output 0 V ... 10 V DC
- Binary input for 10 V DC
- Binary output for 10 V DC
• Analog input with limit value monitoring and signaling,
with adjustable limit values and hysteresis
• Analog output with adjustable lower and upper limit of the
output voltage with adjustable voltage value in the event of
bus voltage failure and recovery
• Binary input with pulse edge evaluation
• Binary output with adjustable switching position in the event of
bus voltage failure and recovery
• 2 inputs for the connection of temperature sensors with Pt1000
measured element for temperature measurement in the range
-25 °C ... +45 °C, with limit value monitoring and signaling, with
adjustable limit values and hysteresis
• 2 binary outputs, relay contacts rated for 230 V AC, 10 A at
p.f. = 1, with
- Configurable actuated position (NO contact/NC contact)
- Positively driven operation
- Configurable switching position in the event of bus voltage
failure and recovery
• Electronics powered over an external power supply unit for
24 V AC/DC
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection over bus terminal and contact system to
data rail
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width: 4 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
N 670
Version
DT Order No.
Universal N 670 I/O modules1)
}
Price
per PU
5WG1 670-1AB03
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.220
2 x universal I/O, 2 inputs Pt1000,
2 outputs 230 V AC, 10 A
5WG1 670-1AB03
1)
The external power supply unit with 24 V AC/DC must be ordered separately (e.g. 4AC2 402).
7
3/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
4
© Siemens AG 2008
Combination Devices
4/2
Introduction
4/3
Input/output devices
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
4
© Siemens AG 2008
Combination Devices
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
Input/output devices
4
4/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Combine inputs and outputs to devices for flexible
application
4/3
© Siemens AG 2008
Combination Devices
Input/output devices
■ Technical specifications
Type
Application program
N 502
N 670/03
N 605
N 605/11
N 526/02
N 266
UP 511/10 UP 562/31
981501
900501
906101
906202
905303
241C01
207201
207101
N
N
N
N
N
N
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
UP
--
UP
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
4 MW
6 MW
6 MW
6 MW
4 MW
∅ 53
28
∅ 53
28
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
-----
✔
✔
✔
----
-----
-----
Electronics powered over an integrated power supply
unit, supply voltage 230 V AC
Electronics powered over bus voltage
Electronics powered over an external power supply unit
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
---
--24 V AC/DC --
---
---
✔
✔
--
--
Bus-dependent operation possible
✔1)
--
✔
✔
--
-12 V DC
max.
50 mA
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
1 ... 10 V DC
Max. ECG per output (Osram Dynamic 58 W)
Two 12 V outputs "walk test" and "setting/unsetting" for
the control of passive infrared and motion detectors
Load output
----
----
----
----
3
50
--
--✔
----
----
Floating relay contact
82)
2
--
--
3
--
1
2
Silent semiconductor switch
--
--
6
6
--
--
--
--
230
16
---
230
10
---
230
-1.5
12
230
-0.5
6
230
6
---
-----
230
16
---
230
6
---
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
100
--
---
50
2x3
50
2x3
100
--
3)
4
5
2
5
2
Determination of switching state over the voltage
generated in the device
For voltage input
(with common ground)
• 12 ... 230 V AC/DC
PT1000 temperature sensor input
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
8
--
-2
---
---
---
---
---
---
Brightness sensor input for UP 255/AP 255
--
--
--
--
3
--
--
--
Enclosure data
Design
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
For installation in flush-mounting switch and
socket boxes with ∅ = 60 mm and depth = 60 mm
Dimensions
• Width/∅ (1 MW = 18 mm)
• Depth
mm 8 MW
mm
Display/control elements
LED for status indication per input
LED for status indication per output
LED for operation/status indication
Pushbuttons for local operation on the device
✔
✔
✔
Power supply
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection via bus terminal
Bus connection over contact system to data rail
Outputs
Control output
Load types
Rated contact voltage, AC
Rated contact current
Max. short-time current
Switching capacity for permanent loading
Protection
V
A
A
W
Electronic protection of outputs against overload and
short circuit
Universal inputs/outputs
Adjustable universal inputs/outputs
Inputs
Max. cable length, unshielded, untwisted
For signal input (floating contact)
m
1)
Each output affects the output of the same name, adjustable as timer or impulse relay.
2)
Except channel A.
3)
On request.
For selection and ordering data, see page 4/6.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
4/3
4
© Siemens AG 2008
Combination Devices
Input/output devices
Type
Description
N 502
N 502 combination switch actuators
• Outputs identical or can be individually configured
• Operating mode can be adjusted for each output
(normal mode, timer mode)
• Switching behavior can be adjusted for each output
(NO contact/NC contact)
• Adjustable ON/OFF delay
• Selectable logic operation (AND/OR) of two communication
objects and adjustable start value of operation in the event of
bus power recovery
• Object can be added per output, night mode for limited ON
switching of lighting during the night
• Adjustable ON period during night or timer mode
4
N 670
Universal N 670 I/O modules
2 x universal I/O, 2 inputs for Pt1000, 2 outputs 230 V AC, 10 A
• 2 universal inputs/outputs, each adjustable as
- Analog input 0 V ... 10 V DC
- Analog output 0 V ... 10 V DC
- Binary input for 10 V DC
- Binary output for 10 V DC
• Analog output with adjustable lower and upper limit of the
output voltage with adjustable voltage value in the event of bus
voltage failure and recovery
• Binary input with pulse edge evaluation
N 605
Configurable actuated position (NO contact/NC contact)
Positively driven operation
Configurable behavior in the event of a bus power failure/recovery
Analog input and PT1000 input with
Limit value monitoring
Limit value signal
Adjustable limit values
Adjustable hysteresis
• With configurable control per output either by positioning
commands in percentage or by ON/OFF switch commands
• Conversion of percentage positioning commands into pulse
width modulated switch commands
• With per output configurable position in case of an open
window
• With transmission of an output status object on request or if the
switching state change
• Configurable behavior in the event of a bus power failure
• With optional calcification protection
• Configurable transmission
N 605/11 thermal drive actuators
6 inputs, 2 x 3 outputs for control of 2 heating/cooling mats
• For control of electrothermal actuators for small valves for
heaters and cooling ceilings
• Configurable contact type (NO contact/NC contact)
• 6 outputs, each with one silent semiconductor switch, divided
into 2 groups, each with 3 outputs and fixed assignment of
outputs to the forward flow and return valves
• Configurable valve open and close time
• Signaling of a short-circuited or overloaded output and
de-energizing of all outputs of the respective group
N 526/02
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N 605 thermal drive actuators
With 6 inputs and outputs each
• For control of electrothermal actuators for small valves for
heaters and cooling ceilings
• Configurable contact type (NO contact/NC contact)
• Configurable transmission of the input status objects by
request, in case of change, cyclically and/or in case of bus or
system voltage recovery
• Signaling of a short-circuited or overloaded output and
de-energizing of this output
• Configurable valve open and close time
• Configurable valve state (open or closed) in case of
de-energized output
• Adjustment to a non-linear valve characteristic curve
N 605/11
• Selectable warning of impending OFF by turning the device
briefly on and off three times (flashing) during night or timer
mode
• Object for status indication can be added for each output
• Transmission of status objects on demand and/or automatically
after modification
• Integrated 8-bit scene control and integration of each channel
in up to 8 scenes
• Unchanged switching state of all outputs during power failure
• Switching state can be adjusted for each output after system
recovery
• Control of all outputs over ON/OFF switch command
• Transmission of the output status object on request or if the
switching state changes, optionally with automatic switchover
of the return valve between heating and cooling mode or with
switchover of the return valve over an object
• De-energizing of return valve output if the forward flow valves
are closed
• Configurable behavior in the event of a bus power failure
• Configurable transmission
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
triple, 230 V AC, 6 A, with constant light level control
• Integrated constant light level control per output (outputs are
master/slave-capable)
• Configurable starting value
• Adjustable dimming time
• Switching ON/OFF
• BRIGHTER/DARKER dimming
•
•
•
•
•
Switching ON/OFF possible over BRIGHTER/DARKER dimming
Set 8-bit value
Night mode (lighting for cleaning)
Send switching and dimming status
Configurable behavior in the event of a bus power
failure/recovery
Accessories
AP 255
UP 255
AP 255, UP 255 indoor brightness sensors,
For N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
• For direct connection to N 526/02 switch/dimming
actuators over a 3-wired cable of up to 100 m in length, which
also serves to power the sensor electronics
• Plug-in low-voltage terminal for connection of the cable to
N 526/02
• Including two rigid optical fiber rods:
- Parallel light-sensitive surface for mounting surface
- Inclined (45°) light-sensitive surface for mounting surface
4/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
UP 255 indoor brightness sensors
• For mounting in a hollow-wall or flush-mounting box with
∅ 58 mm and min. 40 mm mounting depth
• Cover made of white plastic (polystyrene)
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 30 x 52 x 33 mm
AP 255 indoor brightness sensors
• For ceiling or wall mounting
• Includes surface-mounting enclosure made of white plastic
(polypropylene) with ∅ 70 mm and 24 mm in height
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 30 x 72 x 33 mm
© Siemens AG 2008
Combination Devices
Input/output devices
Type
Description
N 266
N 266 detector group terminals
With 4 monitored inputs for passive detectors
• For the monitored connection of passive detectors
(e.g. magnetic contacts) and for the connection of floating
contacts in applications with increased safety demands
• Setting/unsetting of the detector group terminal over a
communication object
• With failure message in case of short circuit or interruption of a
signal line
• Monitoring of the external power supply
UP 511/10 UP 511/10 switch actuators
16 A, 1 x 230 V AC, 2 x binary inputs
• Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power failure/recovery
• Locking function
• OFF delay
• ON delay
•
•
•
•
Positively driven operation
Logic function (1 object)
Logic function (2 objects)
Can be inverted per output (NO contact/NC contact)
•
•
•
•
Positively driven operation
Logic function (1 object)
Logic function (2 objects)
Can be inverted per output (NO contact/NC contact)
UP 562/31 UP 562/31 switch actuators
2 x 230 V AC, 6 A, 2 x binary inputs
• Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power failure/recovery
• Locking function
• OFF delay
• ON delay
For selection and ordering data, see page 4/6.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
4/5
4
© Siemens AG 2008
Combination Devices
Input/output devices
■ Selection and ordering data
4
Type
Version
N 502
N 502 combination switch actuators
DT Order No.
N
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
B
5WG1 502-1AB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.721
}
5WG1 670-1AB03
1
1
030 0.220
}
5WG1 605-1AB01
1
1
030 0.434
}
5WG1 605-1AB11
1
1
030 0.434
}
5WG1 526-1AB02
1
1
030 0.458
}
5WG1 255-4AB01
1
1
030 0.092
C
5WG1 255-4AB02
1
1
030 0.102
B
5WG1 266-1AB01
1
1
030 0.180
8 x 230 V AC, 16 A, 8 x binary inputs
5WG1 502-1AB01
N 670
Universal N 670 I/O modules1)
2 x universal I/O, 2 inputs for Pt1000,
2 outputs 230 V AC, 10 A
5WG1 670-1AB03
N 605
N 605 thermal drive actuators
With 6 inputs and outputs
5WG1 605-1AB01
N 605/11
N 605/11 thermal drive actuators
6 inputs, 2 x 3 outputs for control of 2 heating/cooling
mats
5WG1 605-1AB11
N 526/02
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
3 x 230 V AC, 6 A, with constant light level control
5WG1 526-1AB02
UP 255
Accessories
UP 255 indoor brightness sensors
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
AP 255
AP 255 indoor brightness sensors
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
N 266
N 266 detector group terminals
With 4 monitored inputs for passive detectors
5WG1 266-1AB01
1)
The external power supply unit with 24 V AC/DC must be ordered separately (e.g. 4AC2 402).
4/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Combination Devices
Input/output devices
Type
Version
UP 511/10 UP 511/10 switch actuators
DT Order No.
N
}
5WG1 511-2AB10
N
}
5WG1 562-2AB31
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.115
1 x 230 V AC, 16 A, 2 x binary inputs
5WG1 511-2AB10
UP 562/31 UP 562/31 switch actuators
1
0.100
2 x 230 V AC, 6 A, 2 x binary inputs
5WG1 562-2AB31
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
4/7
4
© Siemens AG 2008
Combination Devices
Notes
4
7
4/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
5
5/2
Introduction
5/5
Dimmers
5/8
Switch/dimming actuators
5/14
Light level controls
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
5
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
Application
Dimmers
Page
Trailing-edge phase dimmers for dimming incandescent 5/5
lamps, HV halogen lamps and LV halogen lamps with
electronic transformer.
5
Universal dimmers automatically detect the connected
load type and adapt accordingly.
5/5
Switch/dimming actuators
For the switching and dimming of fluorescent lamps with 5/8
dimmable electronic controlgear.
Light level control
Convenience and energy saving in one –
these components let you optimize your lighting.
Function
5/14
Application
Section
Switching
Load
Luminous rows
2/3
Dimming
Conventional
1 ... 10 V DC
DALI
Outdoor brightness sensors
Incandescent lamp dimming
Dimming electronic controlgear
Dimming electronic controlgear
Indoor lighting of industrial halls
5/5
5/8
5/8
5/14
Two-step control
Constant light level control
Motion detector
Presence detector
Day, week, year schedule
Timer mode
Astro function
Hall/stairway lighting
Office workplace lighting
Hall/stairway lighting
Office workplace lighting
Shopping center after opening times
Hall/stairway lighting
Car park lighting
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
13/5
13/5
13/5
Scenes
Effects
Ambient lighting in hotels/restaurants
Changing color LEDs for outer facade
2/3
5/8
Controls
Control
Presence control
Time control
Scene control
5/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Introduction
Energy efficient lighting
Approx. 28 % of all the electrical energy in a building is used for
lighting. Increased demands made on the energy efficiency of
buildings require enhanced optimization of energy supply,
distribution and use. This goal can only be achieved through
automation. Useful automation takes into account the comfort
requirements of room users so that room temperature and the
level of lighting can be optimally adjusted to the current usage
situation. Room users need to be able to adjust their work
environment to suit individual requirements.
Time-dependent light control
Savings potential demonstrated using an office building
In the event of time-dependent light control, the lighting is
automatically switched off at a preset time. In order to warn users
of an impending off, the lighting can be set to flash prior to the
action or, depending on the equipment, dimmed to a preset
value. This gives users the opportunity to delay the switch off by
a set time, e.g. 60 minutes, by overriding it manually.
p
Electrical energy – total
28%
lighting
When lighting is switched on by persons entering a room due to
the level of lighting, in many cases they forget to switch it off
again on leaving. A time-dependent light control would take this
into account. Time-dependent light control is either relative in
relation to an event or absolute in relation to a time or date. If the
time-dependent light control is relative to an event, the lighting is
switched off on expiry of a set time or dimmed to a minimum
value. The best known example of this type of light control is
stairwell lighting control.
The diagram "Potential savings quantified" shows the effect of
time-dependent light control on energy consumption.
By switching off lighting centrally, energy consumption can be
reduced by 18 %.
I2_15424
Daylight-dependent light control
To reduce energy costs, the artificial lighting of a room can be
controlled dependent on time, occupancy and daylight. A range
of solutions are available for this purpose, which we shall describe
in the following sections and consider their effectiveness with
regard to reducing energy costs.
By way of an example, we will demonstrate potential energy
savings in an office. In the case of lighting that is not automated,
a user profile can be assumed, which is demonstrated in the
diagram "Options for potential savings". It is assumed that
minimum lighting is switched on at 7 am. From 8 am onwards,
the lighting is switched on fully by room users. The lighting is
then left on all day until the last person leaves the room and
switches off the light. Minimum lighting is typically left running for
cleaning purposes. This lighting is then switched off, either by
the cleaners or by security.
Light
3
I2_15425
0
1
2
7.00
18.00
21.00
0
Conventional
1
"Central OFF" –
switches off lights that have been forgotten
2
"Constant light level control" –
reduces artificial light as soon as sufficient daylight is available
3
"Presence detector control" –
saves energy on lighting in the case of non-occupancy
Potential savings - the gray areas of the diagram represent the energy used in
the case of manual light control.
There are generally two methods for the daylight-dependent
control of the brightness in a room: light control over a brightness
sensor in the room (constant light level control) or light control
over an outdoor brightness sensor in combination with control
devices, which take into account the direction of the window, the
geometry of the window and the possibility of objects that may
throw shadows (buildings, trees).
There are arguments in favor of both methods. While the daylightdependent light control requires fewer sensors than other light
controls, commissioning involves considerably higher engineering
costs. The level of lighting can be kept at a preset or user-defined
value by a constant light level control in a way that optimally
utilizes the available daylight and reduces energy costs. In order
to utilize the daylight and offer anti-glare protection, the slats of
the relevant shutter/blinds can be controlled so that these permit
the penetration of available daylight while preventing the glare of
direct sunlight. Preventing direct sunlight from penetrating the
room also prevents the room from becoming too hot.
Presence-dependent light control
Many rooms are only used for part of the day so that a presencedependent daylight control system could be usefully implemented
to reduce energy costs.
Using presence detectors, room functions can be automatically
switched from comfort mode to ready-to-run or energy-saving
mode. They can also be used in combination with an access
control or controlled manually or over a preset time. In corridors
the lighting can be switched off outside the main periods of use
and only switched back on when the presence of persons is
detected. Within the main periods of use, the lighting can also be
dimmed to a minimum brightness level if there are no persons
present. This achieves optimum energy savings and extends the
service life of lighting.
If operation of the corridor lighting is presence-dependent, the
right level of lighting is always delivered as and when required.
And energy consumption is in keeping with actual requirements.
This also applies to outdoor and path lighting that switches on
depending on brightness, movement and time - and is therefore
always on when required.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
5/3
5
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Introduction
The image "Potential savings quantified" shows the effect of
presence-dependent light control on energy consumption during
the day.
Cost efficiency
The cost-effectiveness can also be expressed in the time it takes
to recoup the investment made in the savings method used. Our
example allows the calculation of a payback period of 3.3 years
if using a light control system with KNX components.
100%
18%
17%
5
Central OFF
Central OFF
Constant light level control
Energy costs for
conventional lighting
Presence
Energy costs for lighting
with GAMMA instabus
I2_15426
9%
Savings of
44 %
Potential savings quantified
The reduction in energy costs achieved by using light controls that
are time, daylight and occupancy-dependent is approx. 44 %.
Additional
costs with bus
Cost of
conventional
installation
1
2
3
4
Payback period: 4.7 years
Savings: 18 %
5
6
Years
Central OFF, constant light level control
Energy costs for
conventional lighting
Energy costs for lighting
with GAMMA instabus
Additional
costs with bus
Cost of
conventional
installation
1
2
3
4
Payback period: 4.3 years
Savings: 35 %
5
6
Years
Central OFF, constant light level control, presence detector
Energy costs for
conventional lighting
I2_15427
Energy costs for lighting
with GAMMA instabus
Additional
costs with bus
Cost of
conventional
installation
5/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1
2
3
4
Payback period: 3.3 years
Savings: 44 %
5
6
Years
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Dimmers
■ Technical specifications
Type
N 527/02
N 528/02
UP 525
UP 525/11
UP 525/31
N
UP
--
UP
✔
UP
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
--
--
4 MW
71
71
40
51
44
40
∅ 53
28
--
--
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
--
✔
1
1
1
1
1
Enclosure data
Design
N
✔
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
For installation in flush-mounting switch and
-socket boxes with ∅ = 60 mm and depth = 60 mm
Integrated peripheral external interface for plug-ging in a single to quadruple bus pushbutton
Dimensions
• Height
mm
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
mm 4 MW
• Depth
mm
5
Mounting type
Screw fixing
Power supply
Electronics powered over bus voltage
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection via bus terminal
Bus connection over contact system to data rail
Outputs
Load output
Number of channels
Load type
R, L, C
R, L, C
R, C
R, C
R, L, C
Load
Contact rated voltage
Dimmer output
VA
230 V AC,
50/60 Hz
20 … 500
230 V AC,
50/60 Hz
20 … 250
230 V AC,
50 Hz
20 … 250
230 V AC,
50 Hz
20 … 250
230 V AC,
50/60 Hz
50 ... 210
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
----
----
----
----
5
2
Protection
Electronic protection of outputs against overload
and short circuit
Inputs
Max. cable length, unshielded, untwisted
For signal inputs (floating contact)
Determination of switching state over the voltage
generated in the device
✔
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
5/5
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Dimmers
Type
Application program
N 527/02
N 528/02
UP 525
UP 525/11
UP 525/31
906703
906703
1)
903002
301901
23
24
23
24
38
38
38
38
26
27
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
Output functions
5
Max. number of group addresses
Max. number of assignments
Switching ON/OFF
Configurable starting value
BRIGHTER/DARKER dimming
Adjustable dimming range
Minimum dimming value (basic brightness)
Maximum dimming value
Operation of 2 dimming modules
(using two different dimming time curves
Dim or startup 8-bit value
Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power failure
Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power recovery
Status
✔
✔
Transmitting switch and dimming status
✔
✔
Fault indications overload/short
circuit/overtemperature on bus
1) See table "Application programs and pushbuttons for use with UP 525".
For selection and ordering data, see page 5/7.
Application programs and pushbuttons for use with UP 525
For design
Application program
i-system
DELTA profil/style
Can be used with pushbuttons
903902
UP 221
903A02
UP 222
903C02
UP 221E
903D02
UP 222E
Number of pushbutton pairs
1
2
1
2
5/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
903402
UP 241
UP 242
UP 285
1
903502
UP 243
UP 244
UP 286
2
DELTA ambiente
903602
UP 245,
UP 246
UP 287
4
903802
UP 284
4
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Dimmers
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
N 527/02
Version
DT Order No.
N 527/02 universal dimmers
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 527-1AB02
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.216
}
5WG1 528-1AB02
1
1
030 0.216
}
5WG1 525-2AB01
1
1
030 0.055
}
5WG1 525-2AB11
1
1
030 0.055
}
5WG1 525-2AB31
1
0.100
20 ... 500 VA, 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
R, L, C
N 528/02
N 528/02 universal dimmers
20 ... 250 VA, 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
R, L, C
5WG1 527-1AB02
5WG1 528-1AB02
UP 525
UP 525 trailing-edge phase dimmers
250 VA, 230 V AC, 50 Hz, with PEI
R, C
5WG1 525-2AB01
UP 525/11 UP 525/11 trailing-edge phase dimmers
250 VA, 230 V AC, 50 Hz, without PEI
R, C
5WG1 525-2AB11
UP 525/31 UP 525/31 universal dimmers
N
210 VA, 230 V AC, 50 Hz
R, L, C
5WG1 525-2AB31
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
5/7
5
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Switch/dimming actuators
■ Overview
DALI – simple and easy to manage
Digital Addressable Lighting Interface (DALI) was launched on
the market in 2004 as a substitute for the classic 1 ... 10 V interface
and is an interface definition for the control of up to 64 DALI
devices, primarily ECGs, over a control device that acts as a
master.
DALI also allows the control of each DALI device individually
(individual addressing). Individual addressing means that the
control device can be interrogated for the failure of a lamp or
ECG as well the switching status and current dimming value.
This means that the operating state of each lamp group and
even each lamp is constantly available to higher-level systems.
In the simplest of cases, a control device for light control with
DALI can comprise a brightness sensor, a presence detector or
a combined brightness sensor/presence detector, which can
control a group of lamps - depending on occupancy and daylight.
With these simple local applications, where DALI is used by sensors
as an interface to one or more DALI devices, the broadcast
method is used instead of the classic control method over
1 ... 10 V. As such, these applications are not to be regarded as
a networked system.
More high-performance control devices, such as the GE 141
EIB-DALI interface or the N141 instabus/DALI-Gateway from
Siemens, tap into all the options offered by DALI.
DALI supports assignment of DALI devices to up 16 scenes. The
specific settings for each scene are stored in the individual DALI
devices and can be called up by a single command. This allows
even complex scenes or very fast command sequences to be
called up. The cost of dimming with KNX and DALI is no higher
than 1 ... 10 V.
Compare 1 ... 10 V control to DALI
1 ... 10 V control
230 V AC
Switch/dimming actuators
ECG
Switch/dimming actuators
ECG
ECG
Switch/dimming actuators
1 ... 10 V
24 V DC
KNX/DALI
DALI ECG
KNX
DALI
ECG
ECG
5/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
I2_14024
5
DALI communication enables the simultaneous control of all
DALI devices using the same command (broadcast). In the
event of control via broadcast, all DALI devices behave as if they
are being mutually controlled over a 1 ... 10 V interface. As a
second control option, DALI supports the assignment of a DALI
device to one of up to 16 groups (group addressing).
Comparing the degree of cabling required for DALI and for
1 ... 10 V, and the difference in cost for material and labor, the
cost of implementing a project with DALI is approx. a third
cheaper than when using 1 ... 10 V.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Switch/dimming actuators
Wiring of lighting groups 1 ... 10 V control
KNX
1 ... 10 V
L1 L2 L3
1 ... 10V
KNX
1 ... 10V
KNX
5
1 ... 10V
KNX
1 ... 10V
KNX
1 ... 10V
KNX
1 ... 10V
KNX
1 ... 10V
KNX
1 ... 10V
KNX
I2_14025
230 V AC
Wiring of lighting groups with DALI
KNX
DALI
L1 L2 L3
DALI
KNX
I2_14026
230 V AC
Advantages:
• Light groups are not hard-wired
• Separate planning of control cables and power supply
• Even load distribution in the power supply
• Lower fire load due to fewer cables
• Planning is easier and faster
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
5/9
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Switch/dimming actuators
■ Technical specifications
5
DALI control output
Control output 1 ... 10 V DC
N 141
N 525E
N 526/02
N 526E02
N 525/02
802701
980801
905303
981301
905001
N
N
N
N
N
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
4 MW
6 MW
8 MW
4 MW
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
----
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
1 … 10 V DC
--
--
3
8
1
DALI outputs (lines)
1
8
--
--
--
Max. ECG per output
(Osram Dynamik 58 W)
Load output2)
64 units
8 units
50 units
60 units
50 units
Type
Application program
Enclosure data
Design
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Modular installation device in oblong design,
for installation in luminaires for fluorescent
lamps
Dimensions
• Height
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
• Depth
mm
mm 4 MW
mm
Display/control elements
Mechanical switching position display for
status indication per output
LEDs for fault indication
(lighting failure) per output
Pushbuttons for local operation on the device
Direct operation (local operation)
Mechanical local operation
Mechanical switching position display
Power supply
Electronics powered over bus voltage
With electronics powered over an integrated
power supply unit
DALI outputs powered over an integrated
power supply unit
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection over contact system to data rail
Bus connection via bus terminal
Outputs
Control output
--
--
31)
8
1
V
A
---
---
230
6
230
16
230
16
m
---
---
3
100
---
---
Floating relay contacts
Contact rated voltage, AC
Contact rated current
Inputs
Sensor inputs
Input for AP 255/UP 255 brightness sensor
Max. cable length, unshielded, untwisted
1)
Except channel A.
2)
For load data, see chapter "Technical Information".
For selection and ordering data, see page 5/13.
5/10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Switch/dimming actuators
DALI control output
Control output 1 ... 10 V DC
N 141
N 525E
N 526/02
N 526E02
N 525/02
802701
980801
905303
981301
905001
Max. number of group addresses
Max. number of assignments
Integrated constant light level control
Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power failure
Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power recovery
Configurable behavior in the event of a
system voltage failure
Configurable behavior in the event of a
system voltage recovery
Switching
253
253
--
108
107
--
35
47
✔
250
250
--
38
38
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
Switching ON/OFF
Configurable starting value
Switching ON/OFF possible over
BRIGHTER/DARKER dimming
Dimming
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
BRIGHTER/DARKER dimming
Adjustable dimming time
Brightness limitation, adjustable
min. dimming value/max. dimming value
Value transmission
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
Set 8-bit value
Scene control
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Integrated 8-bit scene control
Scenes to be integrated per DALI output
Scenes to be integrated per channel
Effect control
✔
✔
16
--
----
✔
16
--
-8
----
Integrated effect control
(one-off or cyclic chaselight operation,
color control)
Status
✔
--
--
--
--
DALI short circuit
DALI power supply
Status output
(ON/OFF, value, lamp fault, ECG fault)
Status group
(ON/OFF, value, lamp fault, ECG fault)
Status ECG
(ON/OFF, value, lamp fault, ECG fault)
Time functions
✔
✔1)
✔
✔
---
---
---
--
✔
✔2)
✔2)
✔2)
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
ON/OFF delay
Timer mode, 1-step
(stairwell circuits)
Timer mode, 2-step
Night mode (lighting for cleaning)
Warning of impending OFF
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
----
Type
Application program
Functions
5
1)
Per channel.
2) Status ON/OFF, value.
For selection and ordering data, see page 5/13.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
5/11
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Switch/dimming actuators
Type
Description
AP 255
UP 255
AP 255, UP 255 indoor brightness sensors
For N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
• For measuring the brightness on an illuminated area through
measurement of the reflected light
• Measuring range: 0 ... 1500 lux (with a reflectance of the
illuminated area of approx. 30 %)
• For direct connection to N 526/02 switch/dimming
actuators over a 3-wired cable of up to 100 m in length,
which also serves to power the sensor electronics
• Plug-in low-voltage terminal for connection of the cable to
N 526/02
• Including two rigid optical fiber rods:
- Parallel light-sensitive surface for mounting surface
- Inclined (45°) light-sensitive surface for mounting surface
5
For selection and ordering data, see page 5/13.
5/12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
UP 255 indoor brightness sensors
• For mounting in a hollow-wall or flush-mounting box
with ∅ 58 mm and min. 40 mm mounting depth
• Cover made of white plastic (polystyrene)
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 30 x 52 x 33 mm
AP 255 indoor brightness sensors
• For ceiling or wall mounting
• Includes surface-mounting enclosure made of white plastic
(polypropylene) with ∅ 70 mm and 24 mm in height
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 30 x 72 x 33 mm
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Switch/dimming actuators
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DALI control outputs
N 141
instabus/N 141 DALI gateways
u
}
5WG1 141-1AB01
1
1
030 0.200
5
5WG1 141-1AB01
N 525E
N 525E switch/dimming actuators
}
5WG1 525-1EB01
1
1
030 0.300
}
5WG1 526-1AB02
1
1
030 0.458
}
5WG1 255-4AB01
1
1
030 0.092
C
5WG1 255-4AB02
1
1
030 0.102
}
5WG1 526-1EB02
1
1
030 0.517
X
5WG1 525-1AB02
1
1
030 0.170
8 x DALI, 8 ECGs per output
5WG1 525-1EB01
Control outputs 1 ... 10 V DC
N 526/02
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
3 x 230 V AC, 6 A, with constant light level control
5WG1 526-1AB02
UP 255
Accessories
UP 255 indoor brightness sensors
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
AP 255
AP 255 indoor brightness sensors
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
N 526E02
N 526E02 switch/dimming actuators
u
8 x 230 V AC, 16 A
5WG1 526-1EB02
N 525/02
N 525/02 switch/dimming actuators
1 x 230 V AC, 16 A
5WG1 525-1AB02
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
5/13
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Light level controls
■ Overview
Type
5
AP 255/11 N 526/02
UP 255/12
UP 258/11 UP 258/21 N 342
AP254/02
GE 252
----
----
1-channel
1-channel
--
---
---
✔
✔
1-channel -1-channel ----
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
---
✔
--
----
✔
✔
--
---
--
--
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
UP 255
AP 255
3-channel
---
----
✔
----
✔
--
GE 253
GE 254
Control
Integrated constant light level control 1-channel
1-channel
Integrated two-step control
Light level control dependent on
-surrounding light
1-channel
1-channel
--
Light sensor
External light
Indoor brightness
Indoor brightness
(indirect lighting)
Transmission of brightness values
over KNX
-✔
--✔
✔
■ Technical specifications
Type
UP 255/11 AP 255/12 N 526/02 UP 258/11 UP 258/21 N 342 AP254/02 GE 252 GE 253 GE 254
Enclosure data
Design
Modular installation device in oblong design, for
installation in luminaires for fluorescent lamps
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Dimensions
• Height
mm
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
mm
• Depth
mm
UP
--
AP
--
N
--
UP
--
UP
--
N
--
AP
--
GE
GE
GE
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
30
52
33
30
52
33
6 MW
87
87
60
102
102
33
1 MW
110
72
54
42
274.5
28
42
274.5
28
42
274.5
28
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
---
✔
---
---
---
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
---
----
--
✔
--
--
--
--
Power supply
Electronics powered over bus voltage
Electronics powered over an integrated
power supply unit, supply voltage 230 V AC
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Plug onto UP 110 bus coupling unit
Plug onto UP 114 bus coupling unit
Bus connection via bus terminal
Bus connection over contact system to data rail
✔
For selection and ordering data, see page 5/16.
Type
5/14
Description
UP 255/11 UP 255/11 and AP 255/12 brightness controllers
AP 255/12
• For measuring the brightness on an illuminated work area
through measurement of the reflected light
• Measuring range 0 ... 2000 lux (with a reflectance of the
illuminated area of approx. 30 %)
• Including two rigid optical fiber rods:
- Parallel light-sensitive surface for mounting surface
- Inclined (45°) light-sensitive surface for mounting surface
• Integrated infrared receiver for calibration of the brightness
measurement over an infrared remote control
• Transmission of the brightness measured value, either in the
event of change and/or cyclically
• Optional two-step dimmer control for lamps that can only be
switched, or constant light level control for lamps that can be
switched and dimmed
• Setpoint can be adjusted either over a parameter or a
communication object
• Starting value of the lighting can be selected when the constant
light level control starts up
• Optionally with dimming of up to 4 further lamp groups
• To the dimming value of the constant light level control or to a
dimming value that differs from the dimming value of the
constant light level control by an offset value, which can be
set per group
• Automatic deactivation of the constant light level control by
manual BRIGHTER/DARKER dimming or dimming to a preset
dimming value
• Configurable behavior in the event of a bus power recovery
UP 255/11 • For mounting in a hollow-wall or flush-mounting box with
∅ 58 mm and min. 40 mm mounting depth
• Cover made of white plastic (polystyrene)
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 30 x 52 x 33 mm
AP 255/12 • For ceiling or wall mounting
• Includes surface-mounting enclosure made of white plastic
(polypropylene) with ∅ 70 mm and 24 mm in height
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 30 x 72 x 33 mm
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Light level controls
Type
Description
N 526/02
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators, triple
3 x 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 6 A, with integrated constant light
level control
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LED for status indication per input
LED for status indication per output
LED for operation/status indication
Pushbuttons for local operation on the device
3 control outputs 1 ... 10 V DC
Max. 50 ECG per output (Osram Dynamik 58 W)
3 floating relay contacts
Rated contact voltage, 230 V AC
Rated contact current 6 A
3 inputs for AP 255/UP 255 brightness sensors,
max. 100 m cable length, unshielded, untwisted
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Switching ON/OFF
Configurable starting value
ON/OFF switching possible over BRIGHTER/DARKER dimming
BRIGHTER/DARKER dimming
Adjustable dimming time
Set 8-bit value
Integrated constant light level control per output
(outputs are master/slave-capable)
• Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power failure/recovery
• Send switching and dimming status
• Night mode (lighting for cleaning)
Accessories
AP 255
UP 255
AP 255/UP 255 indoor brightness sensors
For N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
• For measuring the brightness on an illuminated area through
measurement of the reflected light
• Measuring range: 0 ... 1500 lux (with a reflectance of the
illuminated area of approx. 30 %)
• For direct connection to N 526/02 switch/dimming
actuators over a 3-wired cable of up to 100 m in length,
which also serves to power the sensor electronics
• Plug-in low-voltage terminal for connection of the cable to
N 526/02
• Including two rigid optical fiber rods:
- Parallel light-sensitive surface for mounting surface
- Inclined (45°) light-sensitive surface for mounting surface
N 342
UP 255 indoor brightness sensor
• For mounting in a hollow-wall or flush-mounting box
with ∅ 58 mm and min. 40 mm mounting depth
• Cover made of white plastic (polystyrene)
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 30 x 52 x 33 mm
AP 255 indoor brightness sensor
• For ceiling or wall mounting
• Includes surface-mounting enclosure made of white plastic
(polypropylene) with ∅ 70 mm and 24 mm in height
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 30 x 72 x 33 mm
N 342 light level control modules
• Ten mutually independent light control functions that control the
indoor lighting depending on the outdoor brightness
• Shared current outdoor light intensity value for all 10 light
control functions, with light intensity measured by an outdoor
brightness sensor and sent to a N 342
• Separate brightness curve per light control function
• With configuration option per light control function as continuous
dimming control for the detection and transmission of dimming
commands to dimming or switch/dimming actuators or as
2-step control with hysteresis for detection and transmission of
ON/OFF switch commands to switch actuators
• Automatic adaptation (shifting) of the respective brightness
curve to the desired new indoor brightness when the dimming
value is manually changed (e.g. using a bus pushbutton) and
restoration of the original curve when the lighting is switched off
UP 258/11 UP 258/11 presence detectors
With brightness sensor
•
•
•
•
•
•
Degree of protection IP20
Motion
Presence
Range on either side: 5.5 m
Horizontal sensing angle: 360°
Vertical sensing angle: 120°
• Measuring range:
100 ... 1600 lux (standard)
25 ... 200 lux (expanded)
• For measuring indoor brightness
• Transmission of sensor values over bus
UP 258/21 UP 258/21 presence detectors
With constant light level control
•
•
•
•
•
For surface mounting
Degree of protection IP20
Motion
Presence
Horizontal sensing angle: 360°
•
•
•
•
•
Vertical sensing angle: 120°
Range on either side: 4 m
Brightness measuring range 10 ... 1500 lux
For measuring indoor brightness
Transmission of sensor values over bus
Accessories
AP 258E
AP 258E surface-mounting enclosures
UP 258/21 presence detectors
• For fixing the presence detector as a surface mounting device
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 102 x 102 x 46 mm
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
5/15
5
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Light level controls
Type
Description
AP 254/02 AP 254/02 dual sensors
Brightness measurement, temperature measurement, sun
protection control, lighting control
• For the detection and transmission of brightness and temperature,
temperature measuring range -25 °C ... +55 °C,
brightness measuring range 1 lux ... 100 kLux,
horizontal sensing angle -60° ... +60°, vertical -35° ... +66.5°
• For the control of switch, dimming and shutter/blind actuators,
depending on the ambient luminosity and/or ambient temperature
• One sun protection channel for the automatic control of sun
protection equipment, with
- Starting and stopping of automation over an object or a dusk
threshold
- Up to three brightness thresholds for determining the height
and position of the shutters/blinds or roller shutters
- Optional teach-in of dusk thresholds and brightness
thresholds over a teach-in facility
- Locking object for the temporary deactivation of the sun
protection channel function
5
GE 252
GE 252 indoor brightness sensors
•
•
•
•
GE 254
For measuring indoor brightness
2 m connecting lead of sensor element (cannot be extended)
For surface mounting
For mounting in intermediate ceilings
• Degree of protection IP20
• Brightness measuring range 200 ... 1900 lux
• Dimensions (H x W x D):
Converter: 42 x 274.5 x 28 mm
Receiver: 25 x 65.7 x 28.5 mm
GE 254 indoor brightness sensors
• With constant light level control
• For measuring indoor brightness, taking into account
indirect lighting
• 2 m connecting lead of sensor element
(cannot be extended)
• For surface mounting
GE 253
• Up to four universal channels for the control of switch, dimming
and shutter/blind actuators, depending on ambient luminosity
and/or temperature. Optionally available with:
- Threshold switches for brightness
- Threshold switches for temperature
- Threshold switches with logical combination of brightness
and temperature
- Optional teach-in of brightness threshold for each universal
channel over an associated teach-in facility
- Deactivation option for each universal channel over an
associated locking object (1 bit)
- Optional second object for transmission of a second telegram
on fulfillment of threshold conditions
• Electronics powered over bus voltage
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection via bus terminal
• Surface mounting
• Degree of protection, IP54
•
•
•
•
For mounting in intermediate ceilings
Degree of protection IP20
Brightness measuring range 0 ... 2000 lux
Dimensions (H x W x D):
Converter: 42 x 274.5 x 28 mm
Receiver: 25 x 65.7 x 28.5 mm
GE 253 outdoor brightness sensors
For indoor mounting
• For measuring outdoor brightness
• 2 m connecting lead of sensor element
(cannot be extended)
• For surface mounting
• For mounting in intermediate ceilings
• Degree of protection IP20
• Brightness measuring range 0 ... 16000 lux
• Dimensions (H x W x D):
Converter: 42 x 274.5 x 28 mm
Receiver: 25 x 65.7 x 28.5 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
UP 255/11 UP 255/11 brightness controllers
N
B
5WG1 255-4AB11
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.030
AP 255/12 AP 255/12 brightness controllers
N
B
5WG1 255-4AB12
1
1
5WG1 255-4AB11
030 0.050
5WG1 255-4AB12
5/16
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Light level controls
Type
N 526/02
Version
DT Order No.
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
}
5WG1 526-1AB02
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.458
3 x 230 V AC, 6 A, with constant light level control
5
5WG1 526-1AB02
UP 255
Accessories
UP 255 indoor brightness sensors
}
5WG1 255-4AB01
1
1
030 0.092
C
5WG1 255-4AB02
1
1
030 0.102
B
5WG1 342-1AB01
1
1
030 0.092
}
5WG1 258-2AB11
1
1
030 0.221
}
5WG1 258-2AB21
1
1
030 0.085
}
5WG1 258-3EB21
1
5
030 0.220
}
5WG1 254-3EY02
1
1
030 0.153
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
AP 255
AP 255 indoor brightness sensors
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
N 342
N 342 light level control modules
u
5WG1 342-1AB01
UP 258/11 UP 258/11 presence detectors1)
With brightness sensor
5WG1 258-2AB11
UP 258/21 UP 258/21 presence detectors
With brightness sensors, constant light level control
5WG1 258-2AB21
AP 258E
Accessories
AP 258E surface-mounting enclosures
For UP 258/21 presence detectors
5WG1 258-3EB21
AP 254/02 AP 254/02 dual sensors
N
Brightness measurement, temperature measurement,
sun protection control, lighting control
5WG1 254-3EY02
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
5/17
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
Light level control
Type
Version
DT Order No.
GE 253
GE 253 outdoor brightness sensors
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 253-4AB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.345
For indoor mounting
5
5WG1 253-4AB01
GE 252
GE 252 indoor brightness sensors
}
5WG1 252-4AB02
1
1
030 0.345
GE 254
GE 254 indoor brightness sensors
}
5WG1 254-4AB01
1
1
030 0.345
For indirect lighting
5WG1 252-4AB02
5WG1 254-4AB01
7
5/18
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Sun Protection, Anti-Glare Protection,
Utilization of Daylight
6
6/2
Introduction
6/4
Anti-glare/sun protection
actuators
6/8
Central weather/sun protection
systems
6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Sun Protection, Anti-Glare Protection, Utilization of Daylight
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
6
6/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Anti-glare/sun protection
actuators
Control of shutters and blinds.
6/4
Central weather/sun protection
systems
The weather system sends the sensor information over
the GAMMA instabus.
6/8
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Sun Protection, Anti-Glare Protection, Utilization of Daylight
Introduction
Sunlight tracking control
Shadow edge tracking
Sunlight tracking control and shadow
edge tracking combined
When using the sunlight tracking control,
the blind slats are not completely closed
but track the current sun position so that
the sun cannot shine directly into the
room. However, the spaces between the
slats allow as much diffuse daylight into
the room as possible and ensure
maximum daylight with minimum glare,
while at the same time reducing energy
costs.
With activated shadow edge tracking, the
sun protection is not fully extended,
rather it is extended for a set distance
(e.g. 50 cm) to allow a specified amount
of sunshine to penetrate the room.
It goes without saying that the two principles
can be combined, thus offering optimum
sun protection.
Advantages: It is still possible to look out
of the lower part of the window, any plants
on the window sill still benefit from the
sunshine, while occupants of the room
are protected from its glare.
The sunlight tracking function continually
adjusts the blind slats so that they are
constantly at right angles to the sun. This
optimizes the utilization of daylight.
6
2
2
1
1
I2_15465
I2_15463
I2_15423
3
3
1
Total reflection from direct sunshine
2
Proportion of diffuse daylight
3
Maximum depth of sunlight penetration
1
Total reflection from direct sunshine
2
Proportion of diffuse daylight
3
Maximum depth of sunlight penetration
2
2
1
1
I2_15464
I2_15462
I2_15466
3
1
Total reflection from direct sunshine
2
Proportion of diffuse daylight
3
Maximum depth of sunlight penetration
3
1
Total reflection from direct sunshine
2
Proportion of diffuse daylight
3
Maximum depth of sunlight penetration
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
6/3
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Sun Protection, Anti-Glare Protection, Utilization of Daylight
Anti-glare/sun protection actuators
N 523/02
N 523/03
N 523/04
N 523/11
N 524
N 521
GE 521/02
UP 520
UP 520/11
UP 520/31
Type
N 522/03
■ Technical specifications
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
GE
--
UP
--
UP
--
UP
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
6 MW
4 MW 4 MW 4 MW 8 MW
6 MW
3 MW
42
274.5
28
71
71
40
51
44
40
53
28
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
✔
✔
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
--
--
--
--
4
41)
41)
41)
82)
4
2
1
1
1
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
-8
-6
-6
-6
-6
✔
1
-6
-6
-6
-6
-6
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
5
2
Enclosure data
6
Design
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
For installation in flush-mounting switch and socket
boxes with ∅ = 60 mm and depth = 60 mm
Modular installation device in oblong design, for
installation in luminaires for fluorescent lamps
Integrated peripheral external interface
(PEI) for plugging in a single to quadruple
bus pushbutton
Dimensions
• Height
mm
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)/∅
mm
• Depth
mm
Mounting type
Screw fixing
Claw fixing
Display/control elements
LED for status indication per output
Direct operation (local operation)
Power supply
Electronics powered over bus voltage
With electronics powered over an integrated
power supply unit. Supply voltage 230 V AC
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection via bus terminal
Bus connection over contact system to data rail
Outputs
Load output
Number of channels
(one UP and one DOWN each)
Integrated isolating relay function for
connection of 2 drives per channel
Electrically interlocked relays
(for reversing direction of rotation)
Contact rated voltage
• 230 V AC/50 Hz
• 24 V DC
Contact rated current
A
Inputs
Max. cable length, unshielded, untwisted
For signal inputs (floating contact)
Determination of switching state over the
voltage generated in the device
1) 2 floating.
2)
m
6 floating.
For selection and ordering data, see page 6/6.
6/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
✔
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Sun Protection, Anti-Glare Protection, Utilization of Daylight
980101 N 523/02
980181 N 523/03
981201 N 523/04
980601 N 523/11
980201 N 524
520206 N 521
510205 GE 521/02
1)
902002 UP 520/11
207301 UP 520/31
Max. number of group addresses
Max. number of assignments
Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power failure
Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power recovery
Configurable behavior in the event of a
system voltage recovery
Operating mode
114
156
--
100
100
--
100
100
--
110
125
--
200
200
40
65
11
12
12
12
38
38
38
38
26
27
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
Automatic mode
Manual mode
Standard mode
Status
✔
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Send status per channel
Indication of direct operation with status
object
Status position of sun protection, 8 bit
Status position of slats, 8 bit
Scene control
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
--
---
---
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
---
Integrated 1-bit scene control
Integrated 8-bit scene control
Scenes to be integrated per channel
Shutter/blind control
✔
✔
✔
8
-2
-2
----
✔
✔
8
----
----
----
----
----
----
Travel lock
(e.g. for cleaning the outer shutter/blinds)
Separate raising/lowering protection
Alarm
• Move to safety position
• Locking in this position for as long as alarm
is active
Individual configuration of actuator channels
Shared configuration of actuator channels
Adaptation of objects and functions to drive
type
Suitable for integration in a sunlight tracking
control system
End position detection
Adaptation of objects and functions to electronic
limit switch
Sun protection control (UP/DOWN)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Over position data (8-bit value)
Travel to end position, stopping, stepwise
adjustment
Slat control (OPEN/CLOSE)
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Over position data (8-bit value)
--✔
✔
✔
-Travel to end position, stopping, stepwise
adjustment
1)
See table "Application programs and pushbuttons for use with UP 520".
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Type
Application program
UP 520
981101 N 522/03
Anti-glare/sun protection actuators
Output functions
✔
6
--
For selection and ordering data, see page 6/6.
Application programs and pushbuttons for use with UP 520
For design
Application program
Can be used with pushbuttons
i-system
902902
UP 221
902A02
UP 222
902C02
UP 221E
902D02
UP 222E
Number of pushbutton pairs
1
2
1
2
DELTA profil/style
902402
902502
UP 241, UP 243,
UP 242
UP 244
UP 285
UP 286
1
2
902602
UP 245,
UP 246
UP 287
4
DELTA ambiente
902802
UP 284
4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
6/5
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Sun Protection, Anti-Glare Protection, Utilization of Daylight
Anti-glare/sun protection actuators
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
N 522/03
N 522/03 shutter/blind actuators
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 522-1AB03
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.386
}
5WG1 523-1AB02
1
1
030 0.260
}
5WG1 523-1AB03
1
1
030 0.260
}
5WG1 523-1AB04
1
1
030 0.260
5WG1 523-1AB11
On req.
A
5WG1 524-1AB01
1
1
030 0.422
}
5WG1 521-1AB01
1
1
030 0.150
4 x 230 V AC, 8 A, with end position detection,
for sunlight tracking control
6
5WG1 522-1AB03
N 523/02
N 523/02 shutter/blind actuators
4 x 230 V AC, 6 A
5WG1 523-1AB02
N 523/03
N 523/03 roller shutter actuators
4 x 230 V AC, 6 A
5WG1 523-1AB03
N 523/04
N 523/04 shutter/blind actuators
4 x 230 V AC, 6 A,
for sunlight tracking control
5WG1 523-1AB04
N 523/11
N 523/11 shutter/blind actuators
8 x 230 V AC, 6 A,
for sunlight tracking control
5WG1 523-1AB11
N 524
N 524 shutter/blind actuators
4 x 6 ... 24 V DC, 1 A
5WG1 524-1AB01
N 521
N 521 shutter/blind actuators
4 x 230 V AC, 6 A (2 x parallel)
5WG1 521-1AB01
6/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Sun Protection, Anti-Glare Protection, Utilization of Daylight
Anti-glare/sun protection actuators
Type
Version
DT Order No.
GE 521/02 GE 521/02 shutter/blind actuators
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
}
5WG1 521-4AB02
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.140
}
5WG1 520-2AB01
1
1
2 x 230 V AC, 6 A (parallel)
5WG1 521-4AB02
UP 520
UP 520 shutter/blind actuators
030 0.080
1 x 230 V AC, 6 A, with PEI
6
5WG1 520-2AB01
UP 520/11 UP 520/11 shutter/blind actuators
}
5WG1 520-2AB11
}
5WG1 520-2AB31
1
1
030 0.055
1
0.100
1 x 230 V AC, 6 A, without PEI
5WG1 520-2AB11
UP 520/31 UP 520/31 shutter/blind actuators
N
1 x 230 V AC, 6 A, 2 x binary inputs
5WG1 520-2AB31
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
6/7
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Sun Protection, Anti-Glare Protection, Utilization of Daylight
Central weather/sun protection systems
■ Technical specifications
Type
6
AP 257/21
AP 257/01
AP 257/11
Integrated sensors
• Heated wind sensors with no mechanical
components (0 … 70 m/s)
• Brightness sensors (0 … 99.000 lux)
• Dusk sensors (0 … 1000 lux)
• Outdoor temperature sensors (-40 … +80 °C)
• Heated precipitation monitors
Connection of up to
8 external sensors
• 1 wind sensor
(wind rotor monitoring)
• 7 analog sensors
Connection of up to
4 external sensors
• 1 wind sensor
(wind rotor monitoring)
• 3 analog sensors
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
Monitoring of all measured values up to
3 limit values
Sensor monitoring
Sunlight tracking control
Shadow edge tracking
Integrated shutter/blind control modules
• Controllable facades
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
✔
✔
8
4
------
------
AND operations
OR operations
8 OR operations for alarm/fault indications
Locking function for window cleaning tasks
Safety/alarm objects
Light/time function
4
4
4
4
✔
✔
----
----
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
AP
IP44
AP
IP44
AP
IP54
AP
IP54
69
67
118
160
250
55
160
250
55
✔
✔
--
--
24 V DC1)
24 V DC1)
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Receivers for DCF77 signal
Transmission of all measured values over bus
AP 257/31
Functions
Enclosure data
Design
Degree of protection
Dimensions
• Height
• Width
• Depth
mm 69
mm 67
mm 118
Display/control elements
LED for the display of DCF77 reception
Power supply
Electronics powered over an external power
supply unit
With electronics powered over an integrated
power supply unit. Supply voltage 230 V AC
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection via bus terminal
1)
External 4AC2 402 power supply unit.
For selection and ordering data, see page 6/9.
Type
Description
Accessories for AP 257/21, AP 257/31 weather systems
Electronic power supply units
• For powering the AP 257/21 and AP 257/31 weather systems
with 24 V DC over the white/yellow core pair of the bus cable
• Max. cable length between power supply unit and weather
system: 100 m
• Rated operational voltage 85 ... 265 V AC (50/60 Hz),
85 ... 300 V DC
• Rated secondary voltage 24 V DC, +5 %
• Residual ripple < 100 mV
6/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rated secondary current 0.35 A
Electronic overload protection
Permissible ambient operating temperature: - 20 ... +60 °C
Degree of protection IP20
For mounting on EN 60715-TH35-7.5 mounting rail
Width: 2 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Sun Protection, Anti-Glare Protection, Utilization of Daylight
Central weather/sun protection systems
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
AP 257/21 AP 257/21 weather systems1)
AP 257/31 WS1 AP 257/31 weather stations1)
DT Order No.
N
N
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
B
5WG1 257-3AB21
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.145
B
5WG1 257-3AB31
1
1
030 0.145
6
5WG1 257-3AB21
5WG1 257-3AB31
Accessories
Electronic power supply units
B
4AC2 402
1
1
027 0.080
AP 257 weather systems (to be discontinued)
B
5WG1 257-3AB01
1
1
030 1.338
B
5WG1 257-3AB11
1
1
030 1.185
4AC2 402
AP 257
For 8 sensors2)
5WG1 257-3AB01
AP 257/11 AP 257/11 weather systems (to be discontinued)
For 4 sensors2)
5WG1 257-3AB11
1)
4AC2 402 electronic power supply unit must be ordered separately.
2)
For sensors for connection to weather systems see chapter "Physical sensors".
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
6/9
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Notes
6
7
6/10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation,
Air-Conditioning
7
7/2
Introduction
7/3
Sensors for HCVA
7/5
Display/control units for HCVA
7/7
Room temperature controllers
7/9
Pushbuttons with
room temperature controllers
7/10
Actuators for HCVA
7/13
Electromotive valve
actuators for HCVA
7/15
Electrothermal valve
actuators for HCVA
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
7
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
Application
Page
Sensors for HCVA
The sensors detect the temperature and deliver the
basic values for optimum control.
7/3
Display/control units for HCVA
Display and operation of room temperature control
7/5
implemented over a REG 540 fan coil unit controller.
The complete i-system and DELTA profil product ranges
are available.
Room temperature controllers
Display, operation, control and temperature sensor in a
single flush-mounting device.
This offers optimum control of heating, cooling,
ventilation and air-conditioning.
Pushbuttons with room
temperature controllers
Display, operation, control and temperature sensor and 7/9
additional, freely assignable operator buttons in a single
flush-mounting device.
Actuators for HCVA
These control the drives for the heating, cooling,
ventilation and air-conditioning.
7/10
Valve actuators for HCVA
For the opening and closing of small valves.
7/13
7
7/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
7/7
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Sensors for HCVA
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
N 258/02
N 258/02 temperature sensors
For four Pt1000 sensors
• For the measurement and transmission of 4 temperatures in the
range -40 ... +150 °C
• For connection of four Pt1000 temperature sensors, each over
an up to 50 m long 2-wire cable
• Configurable smoothing of a measured value through mean
value generation
• Monitoring of a lower and upper limit value for each measured
value, with configurable hysteresis for limit value signals
• Electronics powered over an integrated power supply unit for
230 V AC
N 670
• Green LED for displaying ready-to-run status
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection over bus terminal and contact system to
data rail
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width: 4 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
Universal N 670 I/O modules
2 x universal I/O, 2 inputs Pt1000, 2 relay outputs 230 V AC, 10 A
• 2 universal inputs/outputs, each adjustable as
- Analog input 0 V ... 10 V DC
- Analog output 0 V ... 10 V DC
- Binary input for 10 V DC
- Binary output for 10 V DC
• Analog input with limit value monitoring and signaling,
with adjustable limit values and hysteresis
• Analog output with adjustable lower and upper limit of the
output voltage with adjustable voltage value in the event of
bus voltage failure and recovery
• Binary input with pulse edge evaluation
• Binary output with adjustable switching position in the event of
bus voltage failure and recovery
• 2 inputs for the connection of temperature sensors with Pt1000
measured element for temperature measurement in the range
-25 °C ... +45 °C, with limit value monitoring and signaling,
with adjustable limit values and hysteresis
• 2 binary outputs, relay contacts rated for 230 V AC,
10 A at p.f. = 1, with
- Configurable actuated position (NO contact/NC contact)
- Positively driven operation
- Configurable switching position in the event of
bus voltage failure and recovery
• Electronics powered over an external power supply unit for
24 V AC/DC
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection over bus terminal and contact system to
data rail
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width: 4 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
AP 254/02 AP 254/02 dual sensors
Brightness measurement, temperature measurement,
sun protection control, lighting control
• For the detection and transmission of brightness and
temperature, temperature measuring range -25 °C ... +55 °C,
brightness measuring range 1 lux ... 100 kLux,
horizontal sensing angle -60° ... +60°, vertical -35° ... +66.5°
• For the control of switch, dimming and shutter/blind actuators,
depending on the ambient luminosity and/or ambient
temperature
• One sun protection channel for the automatic control of
sun protection equipment, with
- Starting and stopping of automation over an object or a dusk
threshold
- Up to three brightness thresholds for determining the height
and position of the shutters/blinds or roller shutters
- Optional teach-in of dusk thresholds and brightness
thresholds over a teach-in facility
- Locking object for the temporary deactivation of the
sun protection channel function
• Up to four universal channels for the control of switch, dimming
and shutter/blind actuators, depending on ambient luminosity
and/or temperature. Optionally available with:
- Threshold switches for brightness
- Threshold switches for temperature
- Threshold switches with logical combination of brightness
and temperature
- Optional teach-in of brightness threshold for each
universal channel over an associated teach-in facility
- Deactivation option for each universal channel over an
associated locking object (1 bit)
- Optional second object for transmission of a second
telegram on fulfillment of threshold conditions
• Electronics powered over bus voltage
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection via bus terminal
• Surface mounting
• Degree of protection, IP54
For selection and ordering data, see page 7/4.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
7/3
7
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Sensors for HCVA
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
N 258/02
N 258/02 temperature sensors
B
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 258-1AB02
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.242
}
5WG1 670-1AB03
1
1
030 0.220
}
5WG1 254-3EY02
1
1
030 0.153
For four Pt1000 sensors
5WG1 258-1AB02
N 670
Universal N 670 I/O modules1)
2 x universal I/O, 2 inputs for Pt1000,
2 outputs 230 V AC, 10 A
7
5WG1 670-1AB03
AP 254/02 AP 254/02 dual sensors
Brightness measurement, temperature
measurement, sun protection control,
lighting control
N
5WG1 254-3EY02
1) The external power supply unit with 24 V AC/DC must be ordered separately (e.g. 4AC2 402).
7/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Display/control units for HCVA
■ Technical specifications
i-system
Dimensions
• Height
• Width
• Depth
Type
mm 55
mm 55
mm 16
DELTA
profil
DELTA
style
65
65
16
65
65
16
Description
Fan coil unit controllers for office and hotel
• For the display and operation of the room temperature control
using a REG 540 fan coil unit controller
• 5 yellow LEDs for the display of manually set fan speed step or
automatic speed input
UP 237E
UP 252E
UP 254E
Fan coil unit controllers for offices
UP 237F
UP 252F
UP 254F
• Fan coil unit controllers for hotels
• Pushbutton for switching the room operating mode between
comfort and energy-saving mode and for setting the required
fan speed step or the automatic input of the speed step by the
fan coil unit controller
• Pushbutton for setting the required fan speed step or for automatic
entry of the speed step by the fan coil unit controller
• 10-pole BTI plug (BTI - Bus Transceiver Interface) for
mounting on a Plus UP 117/11 bus transceiver module
• Rotary button for shifting the room temperature setpoint
within a user-defined range
• 3 green LEDs for the display of the current room operating
mode (comfort, energy-saving or protection mode)
• Rotary button for setting the room temperature setpoint
within the range of 16 ... 26 °C
• 2 green LEDs for displaying whether the room is being
heated or cooled
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
i-system
UP 237E
UP 237E fan coil unit controllers for offices1)
• Titanium white
A
5WG1 237-2EB11
1
1
022 0.050
• Carbon metallic
B
5WG1 237-2EB21
1
1
022 0.030
• Aluminum metallic
A
5WG1 237-2EB31
1
1
022 0.030
• Titanium white
A
5WG1 237-2FB11
1
1
022 0.050
• Carbon metallic
B
5WG1 237-2FB21
1
1
022 0.030
• Aluminum metallic
A
5WG1 237-2FB31
1
1
022 0.030
5WG1 237-2EB11
UP 237F
UP 237F fan coil unit controllers for hotels1)
5WG1 237-2FB11
1)
The bus transceiver module must be ordered separately, see page 14/3.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
7/5
7
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Display/control units for HCVA
Type
Version
UP 252E
UP 252E fan coil unit controllers for offices1)
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA profil
• Pearl gray
B
5WG1 252-2EB01
1
1
022 0.030
• Titanium white
}
5WG1 252-2EB11
1
1
022 0.052
• Anthracite
B
5WG1 252-2EB21
1
1
022 0.030
• Silver
A
5WG1 252-2EB71
1
1
022 0.030
• Pearl gray
B
5WG1 252-2FB01
1
1
022 0.030
• Titanium white
}
5WG1 252-2FB11
1
1
022 0.052
• Anthracite
B
5WG1 252-2FB21
1
1
022 0.030
• Silver
A
5WG1 252-2FB71
1
1
022 0.030
• Titanium white/metallic silver
A
5WG1 254-2EB11
1
1
022 0.062
• Basalt black/metallic silver
B
5WG1 254-2EB21
1
1
022 0.062
B
5WG1 254-2EB41
1
1
022 0.062
• Titanium white/metallic silver
A
5WG1 254-2FB11
1
1
022 0.062
• Basalt black/metallic silver
B
5WG1 254-2FB21
1
1
022 0.062
B
5WG1 254-2FB41
1
1
022 0.062
5WG1 252-2EB11
UP 252F
7
UP 252F fan coil unit controllers for hotels1)
5WG1 252-2FB11
DELTA style
UP 254E
UP 254E fan coil unit controllers for offices1)
• Platinum metallic
N
5WG1 254-2EB11
UP 254F
UP 254F fan coil unit controllers for hotels1)
• Platinum metallic
N
5WG1 254-2FB11
1) The bus transceiver module must be ordered separately, see page 14/3.
7/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Room temperature controllers
■ Technical specifications
DELTA
i-system profil
Dimensions
• Height
• Width
• Depth
mm 55
mm 55
mm 16
65
65
16
DELTA
style
DELTA
ambiente
DELTA
millennium
68
68
16
65
65
16
65
65
16
Type
Description
UP 237
UP 252
UP 253
UP 254
UP 237, UP 252, UP 253, UP 254 room temperature controllers
IKE 250
• Integrated room temperature sensors
• Control can be set as a two-point control and/or continuousaction control (P or PI algorithm), for heating only, for cooling
only, or for heating and cooling mode
• Comfort, standby, night, frost and heat protection operating
modes, which can be switched via KNX
• Presence pushbutton to locally switch between comfort and
standby mode and to extend comfort mode after operating
night mode
• Adjusting the room temperature setpoint offset for comfort
mode can be set via a rotary button on the controller and via the
KNX
• Basic setpoint of the room temperature for comfort mode
which can be set via the KNX
• Adjustable dead zone between the heating setpoint and
the cooling setpoint for comfort mode
• Two-level heating or cooling
• Output of the control variable(s) either as an ON/OFF
switch command or as a positioning command in
the range of 0 ... 100 %
• 5 LEDs to display the current operating mode and,
if necessary, the dew point alarm
• Mounting on a UP 110 or UP 114 bus coupling unit
IKE 250 room temperature controllers
• Integrated room temperature sensors
• Control can be set as a two-point control and/or continuousaction control (P or PI algorithm), for heating only, for cooling
only, or for heating and cooling mode
• Operating modes comfort mode, standby mode, night mode
and frost or heat protection mode which can be switched via
KNX
• Two pushbuttons for local switching between comfort and
standby mode
• Two pushbuttons for adjusting the basic setpoint
• Basic setpoint of the room temperature for comfort mode which
can be set via the KNX
• Adjustable dead zone between the heating setpoint and
the cooling setpoint for comfort mode
• Output of the control variable(s) either as an ON/OFF
switch command or as a positioning command in the
range of 0 ... 100 %
• Red luminous bar for indicating the current setpoint
offsetting and the set operating mode
• Integrated bus coupling units
• 1 ground conductor and 1 ground terminal for the base
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 80 x 166 x 41 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
i-system
UP 237
UP 237 room temperature controllers1)2)
• Titanium white
• Carbon metallic
• Aluminum metallic
}
B
A
5WG1 237-2AB11
5WG1 237-2AB21
5WG1 237-2AB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.048
022 0.048
022 0.048
B
}
B
A
5WG1 252-2AB03
5WG1 252-2AB13
5WG1 252-2AB23
5WG1 252-2AB73
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
5WG1 237-2AB11
DELTA profil
UP 252
UP 252 room temperature controllers1)2)
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
0.038
0.038
0.038
0.065
5WG1 252-2AB13
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
7/7
7
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Room temperature controllers
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA style
UP 254
UP 254 room temperature controllers1)2)3)
}
B
B
5WG1 254-2AB13
5WG1 254-2AB23
5WG1 254-2AB43
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.068
022 0.068
022 0.068
• Arctic white
B
5WG1 253-2AB03
1
1
022 0.065
IKE 250 room temperature controllers4)
D
5WG1 250-8AB01
1
1
030 0.341
• Titanium white/metallic silver
• Basalt black/metallic silver
• Platinum metallic
N
5WG1 254-2AB13
DELTA ambiente
UP 253
7
UP 253 room temperature controllers1)2)
(to be discontinued)
5WG1 253-2AB03
DELTA millennium
IKE 250
5WG1 250-8AB01
1) The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
3)
No intermediate frame necessary.
4)
The text for the labeling field is engraved and must be specified at the time of ordering
(see page 1/34 DELTA millennium order form).
7/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Pushbuttons with room temperature controllers
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
UP 231
UP 231 pushbuttons
• Vertical operation
• Two wide inner rocker buttons
• Function can be user-assigned: switching OVER, switching
ON/OFF, switching ON/OFF and dimming, shutter/blind, value
transmission, store and call up scenes of up to four 1-bit scenes
in conjunction with scene module
• Short and long button press for ON/OFF/OVER, BRIGHTER/
DARKER for dimming, and UP/DOWN and adjustment of slats
for shutter/blind control
• Operation/status indication over one LED per rocker button
• Integrated room temperature sensors and controllers for
heating only, cooling only or combined heating/cooling
• Control over an algorithm for adaptive control and/or a
two-point algorithm
• With monitoring of room temperature over a room temperature
sensor integrated in the controller and an external room
temperature sensor connected to the KNX, and with adjustable
weighting between the measured indoor and outdoor
temperature
• Two narrow outer rocker buttons for setpoint offsetting in
comfort mode and one for switching between comfort and
standby mode
• Operating modes that can be switched over KNX: comfort
mode, standby mode, night mode, frost or heat protection
mode, with adjustable offset of the room temperature
setpoint for comfort mode
• Adjustable dead zone, selectable either symmetric to the
setpoint for comfort mode or between the heating and
cooling setpoint for comfort mode
• Selectable sequence control for heating and cooling mode
(required e.g. for the combination of floor and
radiator heating)
• Output of the control variable(s) either as ON/OFF switch
command or as positioning command in the range
0 ... 100 %, with LEDs for the indication of the current
operating mode and setpoint offsetting
• For plugging onto a UP 114 bus coupling unit
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 65 x 65 x 15 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA profil
UP 231
UP 231 pushbuttons1)2)
Double, adaptive room temperature controllers
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
B
B
B
B
5WG1 231-2AB03
5WG1 231-2AB13
5WG1 231-2AB23
5WG1 231-2AB73
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.036
0.036
0.036
0.036
B
B
5WG1 231-2EB13
5WG1 231-2EB23
1
1
1
1
022 0.036
022 0.036
5WG1 231-2AB13
DELTA style
UP 231E
UP 231E pushbuttons1)2)3)
Double, adaptive room temperature controllers
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
5WG1 231-2EB13
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
3)
The matching intermediate frame must be ordered separately.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
7/9
7
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Actuators for HCVA
■ Technical specifications
Type
Application program
N 605
N 605/11
N 670
REG 540
REG 540/11
906101
906202
900501
49550
49551
N
N
N
REG
REG
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
90
6 MW
55
90
4 MW
55
90
6 MW
55
90
4 MW
55
Enclosure data
Design
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Dimensions
• Length
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
• Height
mm 90
mm 6 MW
mm 55
Display/control elements
7
LED for operation/status indication
Can be operated with
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
1)
1)
1)
Direct operation (local operation)
✔ (manual)
✔ (manual)
--
UP 237E, UP 252E
UP 237F, UP 252F
✔ (test mode)
UP 237E, UP 252E
UP 237F, UP 252F
✔ (test mode)
--
--
✔
--
✔ (AC only)
✔
✔
--
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
Power supply
Electronics powered over an external power
supply unit for 24 V AC/DC
With electronics powered over an integrated
power supply unit. Supply voltage 230 V AC
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection over contact system to
data rail
Bus connection via bus terminal
Bus connection over screw terminals
Outputs
Load output
Floating relay contact
--
--
2
3
3
• Contact rated voltage, AC
• Contact rated current (p.f. = 1)
Silent semiconductor switch
V
A
--6
--6
230
10
--
230
6
2
230
6
2
• Rated voltage, AC
• Max. permanent loading (p.f. = 1)
Protection
Electronic protection of outputs against
overload and short circuit
V
W
230
12
230
6
---
24
5
24
15
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
2
--
--
Universal inputs/outputs
Adjustable inputs/outputs as
• Analog input (0 … 10 V DC)
with limit value monitoring and indication
• Analog output (0 … 10 V DC)
with adjustable lower and upper limits
• Binary input for 10 V DC
with pulse edge evaluation
• Binary output (10 V DC)
Inputs
Pushbutton inputs
For signal input (floating contacts)
6
6
--
2
1
Determination of switching state over the
voltage generated in the device
Sensor inputs
PT1000 temperature sensor input
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
--
2
--
--
Temperature sensor input
--
--
--
12)
12)
Potentiometer input (setpoint adjustment)
--
--
--
1
--
50
50
3)
30
30
Max. cable length, unshielded, untwisted
1)
instabus room temperature controllers.
2)
M 540 temperature sensors.
3)
On request.
m
For selection and ordering data, see page 7/12.
7/10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Actuators for HCVA
Type
Application program
N 605
N 605/11
N 670
REG 540
REG 540/11
906101
906202
900501
49550
49551
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
----
----
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
----
----
35
55
--------
40
65
-------
1)
1)
1)
1)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
40
40
---------
✔
✔
✔
----
----
✔
✔
✔
--
--
Output functions
Switching (ON/OFF per channel)
Value setting per channel, 8-bit
Positively driven operation
Configurable transmission of output status
Send status
Input functions
Configurable debounce time
Configurable pulse edge evaluation
Configurable transmission of input status
objects
✔
7
General functions
Max. number of group addresses
Max. number of assignments
Integrated controllers with PI algorithms
Comfort mode
Standby mode
Night mode
Frost protection mode
Heat protection mode
Energy-saving function
Calcification protection
Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power failure
Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power recovery
1)
On request.
✔
For selection and ordering data, see page 7/12.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
7/11
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Actuators for HCVA
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
N 605
Version
DT Order No.
N 605 thermal drive actuators
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 605-1AB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.434
}
5WG1 605-1AB11
1
1
030 0.434
}
5WG1 670-1AB03
1
1
030 0.220
6 inputs / 6 outputs
5WG1 605-1AB01
N 605/11
N 605/11 thermal drive actuators
6 inputs, 2 x 3 outputs
7
For the control of 2 heating/cooling mats
5WG1 605-1AB11
N 670
Universal N 670 I/O modules1)
2 x universal I/O, 2 inputs for Pt1000,
2 outputs 230 V, 10 A
5WG1 670-1AB03
REG 540
REG 540 fan coil unit controllers
B
5WG1 540-5AS01
1
1
030 0.530
REG
540/11
REG 540/11 fan coil unit controllers
A
5WG1 540-5AS11
1
1
030 0.225
A
5WG1 540-8AS01
1
1
030 0.081
5WG1 540-5AS01
5WG1 540-5AS11
Accessories
M 540
M 540 temperature sensors
For REG 540, REG 540/11 fan coil controllers
Including a 2-m long connecting lead
with terminal plug
5WG1 540-8AS01
1) The external power supply unit with 24 V AC/DC must be ordered separately (e.g. 4AC2 402).
7/12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Electromotive valve actuators for HCVA
■ Technical specifications
Type
AP 560H
AP 560H02
AP 562
60
46
47
82
50
65
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Enclosure data
Dimensions
• Height
• Width
• Depth
mm 60
mm 46
mm 47
Power supply
Bus-powered electronics and drive
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection over permanently fixed
connecting cable
7
Inputs
Pushbutton inputs
For signal input (floating contacts)
--
--
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
4.5
7.5
✔
✔
✔
1
5
0.8
Output
Electrothermal actuators (silent)
230 V/50 Hz
Valve position in de-energized state
Electromotive actuators
Stroke max.
Automatic adjustment of travel to the
valve used (valve stroke detection)
Length of connecting lead
Mounting on company valves
• Direct
mm 4.5
m
- Heimeier
--
• With spacer ring
--
-
• Adapter set
For connection to other valve makes, adapters can be
obtained from Heimeier
--
Danfoss RA
Heimeier
MNG
Schlösser (3/93 ff.)
Honeywell
Braukmann
Dumser (distribution boards)
Reich (distribution boards)
Landis + Gyr
Oventrop
Herb
Onda
For selection and ordering data, see page 7/14.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
7/13
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Electromotive valve actuators for HCVA
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
AP 560H
AP 560H valve actuators
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 560-7AH01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.215
}
5WG1 560-7AH02
1
1
030 0.410
C
5WG1 590-8AH01
1
1
030 0.011
A
5WG1 562-7EY01
1
1
030 0.273
Electromotive1)
AP 560H2 AP 560H2 valve actuators
AP 590H
Electromotive1)
Accessories
Programming magnets
For AP 560H1 and AP 560H2
5WG1 560-7AH01
AP 562
7
For non-contact activation of the programming
mode, suitable for Heimeier AP 560H valve
actuators.
AP 562 valve actuators
Electromotive, with LED valve position indication
5WG1 562-7EY01
1) The programming magnet must be ordered separately.
7/14
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Electrothermal valve actuators for HCVA
■ Technical specifications
Type
AP 561/01
AP 561/02
AP 561/03
AP 561/04
mm 58
mm 44.5
58
44.5
58
44.5
58
44.5
V
230
230
24
24
Closed (NC)
Open (NO)
-2.6
Approx. 3
Closed (NC)
3.5
Approx. 3
Open (NO)
-2.6
Approx. 3
1
Heimeier
1
Heimeier
1
Heimeier
Enclosure data
Dimensions
• Height
• Width/∅
Output
Electrothermal actuators (silent)
230 V/50 Hz
Valve position in de-energized state
Valve position indication
Stroke max.
Open/close time
Length of connecting lead
Mounting on company valves
✔
mm 3.5
min Approx. 3
m
1
Heimeier
✔
7
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
5WG1 561-7AH01
1)
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
AP 561/01 AP 561 valve actuators
230 V AC, NC1)
B
5WG1 561-7AH01
1
0.226
AP 561/02 AP 561/02 valve actuators
230 V AC, NO1)
B
5WG1 561-7AH02
1
0.226
AP 561/03 AP 561/03 valve actuators
24 V, NC1)
B
5WG1 561-7AH03
1
0.226
AP 561/04 AP 561/04 valve actuators
24 V, NO1)
B
5WG1 561-7AH04
1
0.226
Herz adapter for AP 561
B
5WG1 561-8AH01
1
0.144
Vaillant adapter for AP 561
B
5WG1 561-8AH02
1
0.144
Danfoss adapter RA2000 for AP 561
B
5WG1 561-8AH03
1
0.144
TA adapter for AP 561
B
5WG1 561-8AH04
1
0.144
Danfoss adapter clamps for AP 561
B
5WG1 561-8AH05
1
0.144
MNG adapter sleeves for AP 561
B
5WG1 561-8AH06
1
0.144
NC: deenergized closed; NO: deenergized open.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
7/15
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning
Notes
7
7
7/16
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Load Management
8/2
8
Load management
8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Load Management
Load Management
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
N 360
N 360 peak load limiters1)
• For peak load limitation in plants with tariff-based power
measurement
• Value of an energy pulse configurable in watthours
• Configurable peak load limit of 30... 1000 kW, with configurable
warning limit of 25 ... 1000 kW
• Configurable measuring period of 15, 30 or 60 minutes for the
calculation of the power mean value
• Configurable cycle time of 15, 30, 60, 120 or 240 seconds for
the load extrapolation interval
• Up to 120 loads assignable to peak load limitation
• State monitoring and switching of loads over the KNX
• With parameters assignable per load
• Power consumption of the load
• Turn-off priority (1 ... 10)
• Release/locking of load
• Minimum make time
• Minimum break time
• Maximum break time
• Number of permissible switching cycles in 24 h
8
• Transmission of extrapolation data via KNX after each
extrapolation
• Transmission of statistics data via KNX at the end of each
measuring period
• 3 LEDs for display of availability (operational voltage), of an
impending exceeding of the maximum value and of a
missing synchronization pulse
• 5 LEDs for display of the current time interval within the
measuring interval
• 8 LEDs for status indication of the first 8 loads
• Inputs for connection of energy pulses generated by utility
company counters and for connection of synchronous
pulses and high/low-tariff contacts
• Electronics powered over an integrated power supply unit for
230 V AC
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection over bus terminal and contact system to
data rail
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width 4 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
1)
Like the documentation, the statistics software for the peak load limiter can be downloaded free of charge from the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/gamma-td.
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
N 360
N 360 peak load limiters
DT Order No.
u
B
Price
per PU
5WG1 360-1AB01
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.267
5WG1 360-1AB01
7
8/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Safety
9/2
Introduction
9/3
Intrusion
9/4
Leakage
9/5
Fire
9
9
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Safety
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
9
9/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Intrusion
Presence-simulation modules and detector group
terminals reduce the risk of intrusion.
9/3
Leakage
The water sensors indicate unexpected water.
In DELTA profil or DELTA style design.
9/4
Fire
The fire combination alarm with integrated bus coupling 9/5
unit for the early detection of fires.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Safety
Intrusion
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
N 345
N 345 presence-simulation modules1)
• For recording switching, dimming and shutter/blind activities of
up to 32 channels and up to a total of 5000 actions over a
maximum period of 4 weeks (corresponds to 5 to 6 actions per
channel and day)
• Continuous recording or one-off recording of sample weeks
• Detection of public holidays during recording, which is taken
into account during simulation, with replay of the recorded
telegrams in the same order, but with time-definable random
deviation from the recording
N 266
• Return to the start of the simulation after 1 to 4 weeks
• Module-internal clock, which requires regular
synchronization by a master clock
• Electronics powered over bus voltage
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection over contact system to data rail
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width 1 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
N 266 detector group terminals2)
• For the monitored connection of passive detectors
(e.g. magnetic contacts) and for the connection of floating
contacts in applications with increased safety demands
• 4 detector group inputs, each with one LED for status display
• Two 12 V outputs "walk test" and "setting/unsetting" for the
control of passive infrared and motion detectors
• Setting/unsetting of the detector group terminal over a
communication object
• With failure message in case of short circuit or interruption of a
signal line
• Electronics powered over an external power supply unit
for 12 V DC, max. 50 mA
• Monitoring of the external power supply
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection via bus terminal
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width 4 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
1)
The following devices can be used as a master clock or time source for synchronizing the module-internal real-time clock: a time switch
(e.g. 5WG1 372-5EY01) or an N 350E IP controller.
2)
The following (e.g.) is suitable as external power supply unit: LOGO!Power 6EP1 321-1SH01.
9
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
N 345
N 345 presence-simulation modules
Storage for 5000 actions
N 266
N 266 detector group terminals
With 4 monitored inputs for passive detectors
DT Order No.
u
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
}
5WG1 345-1AB01
1
1
030 0.100
B
5WG1 266-1AB01
1
1
030 0.180
5WG1 345-1AB01
5WG1 266-1AB01
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
9/3
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Safety
Leakage
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
UP 272
UP 272 water sensors
• For detecting water in rooms with risk of leakages
• With water sensor for mounting near the ground with a 2 m long
connecting lead (extendable to max. 20 m) with jack plug and
of a flush-mounting device
• For plugging onto a UP 110 or UP 114 bus coupling unit
• Indication of water / no water
•
•
•
•
•
Alarm indication with adjustable cyclic transmission time
Indication of defective device / cable
Alarm acknowledgement for resetting the alarm indication
Electronics powered over bus voltage
Dimensions (H x W x D): 65 x 65 x 42 mm.
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
UP 272
UP 272 water sensors1)2)
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
0.090
0.090
0.090
0.090
DELTA profil
•
•
•
•
9
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
B
}
B
C
5WG1 272-2AB01
5WG1 272-2AB11
5WG1 272-2AB21
5WG1 272-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
}
5WG1 272-2AB11
1
1
022 0.090
5WG1 272-2AB11
DELTA style
UP 272
UP 272 water sensors1)2)
• Titanium white
5WG1 272-2AB11
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
9/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Safety
Fire
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
AP 256
AP 256 fire combination alarms
The fire combination alarm with integrated bus coupling unit can
be used for the early detection of fires in buildings that are not
required to use VDS-approved fire detection systems (VDS Verband der Sachversicherer - German Association of Insurers).
It is of modular design, i.e. it comprises a base with integrated
bus coupling unit and a sensor head, which can be removed,
e.g. for maintenance or overhaul tasks. Smoke and heat alarm
indications and the current temperature value are output over the
bus. It also automatically indicates whether the sensor is defective
or soiled or whether the sensor has been separated from the
base.
Dimensions (∅ x H): 166 x 64 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
AP 256
AP 256 fire combination alarms
(to be discontinued)
X
5WG1 256-3AB01
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.240
9
5WG1 256-3AB01
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
9/5
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Safety
Notes
9
7
9/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Quick-Assembly Systems
10
10/2
Introduction
10/3
Modular quick-assembly systems
10/5
SMS controls, flat
10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Quick-Assembly Systems
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
Application
Page
Modular quick-assembly systems
Flexible modules control shutter/blinds,
lighting groups or other loads.
10/3
SMS controls, flat
Quick-assembly systems in flat design.
10/5
Note:
10
The electrical connections to the devices are fitted exclusively
with plug-in connectors. The required plug-in connectors and
cable assemblies can be obtained directly from Wieland.
Order address:
Wieland Electric GmbH
Vertriebs- und Marketing Center
Abteilung VSI
Benzstraße 9
D-96052 Bamberg
Telephone: +49 (951) 9324-390
Fax: +49 (951) 9324-390
http://www.wieland-electric.com/
products/pluggable-electrical-installation-system-gesis
10/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Quick-Assembly Systems
Modular quick-assembly systems
■ Technical specifications
The "Modular quick-assembly system" comprises a basic module
(for up to 6 expansion devices) and the respective series-connected
expansion modules. The devices are designed for distributed
mounting on a TH 35-7.5 mounting rail in false floors or suspended
ceilings.
switch/dimming actuators
AP 611/61
shutter/blind actuators
AP 611/51
switch actuators
AP 611/31
gesis GST
18i5
Light blue
gesis GST
18i3
Black
gesis GST
18i4
Black
gesis GST
18i5
Pastel blue
120
80
41 (31)
120
80
41 (31)
120
80
41 (31)
120
80
41 (31)
120
80
41 (31)
6
----
----
----
----
----
--
100
100
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
4
--
--
--
--
--
--
4
--
--
--
-mA --
---
---
---
---
✔
input
gesis GST
18i4
Pebble gray
input
AP 611/11
gesis EST
2i5
Green/black
Type
AP 611/21
Expansion
modules
AP 611
Basic
modules
Enclosure data
Plug-in connectors
Dimensions
• Height incl. TH 35-7.5 mounting rail
• Width (connected in series)
• Depth
mm 120
mm 80
mm 62
Bus connection
✔
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection over plug system
Max. possible expansion modules
✔
10
Inputs
Max. cable length, unshielded, untwisted
Pushbutton inputs
For voltage input
(with common ground (N) or (-))
230 V AC
m
24 V DC
Outputs
Control output
1 ... 10 V DC
Control current
Load output
Floating relay contact
50
--
--
--
2
Number of channels (one UP and one DOWN each)
--
--
--
--
1
--
Integrated isolating relay function for connection
of 2 drives per channel
Load types
Rated contact voltage, AC
V
Rated contact current
A
--
--
--
--
✔
--
---
---
---
230
16
230
8
230
16
1
For selection and ordering data, see page 10/4.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
10/3
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Quick-Assembly Systems
Modular quick-assembly systems
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
AP 611
AP 611 basic modules
B
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 611-3AL01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.320
B
5WG1 611-3AL11
1
1
030 0.238
B
5WG1 611-3AL21
1
1
030 0.255
B
5WG1 611-3AL31
1
1
030 0.258
B
5WG1 611-3AL51
1
1
030 0.234
B
5WG1 611-3AL61
1
1
030 0.276
gesis KNX M2-BAS
5WG1 611-3AL01
AP 611/11 AP 611/11 input modules
gesis KNX M2, 4 inputs for 230 V AC
5WG1 611-3AL11
AP 611/21 AP 611/21 input modules
gesis KNX M2, 4 inputs for 24 V DC
10
5WG1 611-3AL21
AP 611/31 AP 611/31 load switches
gesis KNX M2-0/2, 2 x 230 V AC, 16 A
5WG1 611-3AL31
AP 611/51 AP 611/51 shutter/blind actuators
gesis KNX M, 2 x 230 V, 8 A, running parallel
5WG1 611-3AL51
AP 611/61 N 611/61switch/dimming actuators
gesis KNX M2, 1 x 230 V AC, 16 A
5WG1 611-3AL61
10/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Quick-Assembly Systems
SMS controls, flat
■ Technical specifications
The "flat quick-assembly systems" are actuators for distributed
mounting in false floors or suspended ceilings.
switch actuators,
Gateway EnOcean
AP 631/62
switch actuators
AP 631/32
switch actuators
AP 631/44
switch actuators
AP 631/43
switch/dimming actuators
AP 631/22
switch/dimming actuators
AP 631/21
switch and shutter/blind
actuators
AP 631/12
switch and shutter/blind
actuators
AP 631/11
shutter/blind actuators
AP 631/52
shutter/blind actuators
AP 631/51
shutter/blind actuators
AP 631/02
Type
shutter/blind actuators
AP 631
Mains connection is over the plug-in connector
"gesis GST 18i5 black".
Bus connection is over the plug-in connector "gesis BST 14i2 green".
Mains and bus connection can also be implemented using the
combination connector "gesis EST 2i5 green/black".
For plug types for outputs, see "Technical specifications".
Enclosure data
Plug-in connectors for outputs
• gesis GST 18i3 black
--
--
--
--
• gesis GST 18i4 black
✔
✔
✔
✔
• gesis GST 18i5 pastel blue
• gesis GST 18i5 black
---
---
---
mm 32 (71)
32 (71)
mm 112
mm 254
Dimensions
• Height
(incl. combination distributor block)
• Width
• Length
Switching
Shutter/
blind
---
--
--
✔
✔
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
---
Switching
Shutter/
blind
---
✔
✔
--
---
--
--
---
✔
---
32 (71)
32 (71)
32 (71)
32 (71)
32 (71)
32 (71)
32 (71)
32 (71)
32 (71)
32 (71)
112
254
112
254
112
254
112
254
112
254
112
254
112
254
112
254
112
254
112
254
112
254
✔
--
✔
--
✔
--
✔
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
--
✔
--
✔
--
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
-mA --
---
---
---
---
---
2
50
2
50
---
---
---
---
--
--
--
--
2
2
2
2
4
4
6
4
2
2
2
2
1
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
230
8
230/400 230
8
8
230/400 230
8
8/16
230/400 230
8/16
16
230/400 230
16
16
230/400 230/400 230/400
16
16
16
--
--
--
--
--
--
Power supply
Mains voltage connection
• 1-phase
• 3-phase
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection over plug system
Outputs
Control output
1 ... 10 V DC
Control current
Load output
Floating relay contact
Number of channels
(one UP and one DOWN each)
Load types
Rated contact voltage, AC
Rated contact current
V
A
Inputs
EnOcean radio receiver
--
--
--
--
--
✔
For selection and ordering data, see page 10/6.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
10/5
10
© Siemens AG 2008
Devices for Special Applications
Quick-Assembly Systems
SMS controls, flat
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
AP 631
AP 631 shutter/blind actuators
B
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 631-3AL01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.320
B
5WG1 631-3AL02
1
1
030 0.320
B
5WG1 631-3AL51
1
1
030 0.408
B
5WG1 631-3AL52
1
1
030 0.408
B
5WG1 631-3AL11
1
1
030 0.408
B
5WG1 631-3AL12
1
1
030 0.408
B
5WG1 631-3AL21
1
1
030 0.408
B
5WG1 631-3AL22
1
1
030 0.408
B
5WG1 631-3AL43
1
1
030 0.420
B
5WG1 631-3AL44
1
1
030 0.420
B
5WG1 631-3AL32
1
1
030 0.408
AP 631/62 AP 631/62 switch actuators, Gateway EnOcean/KNX B
5WG1 631-3AL62
1
1
030 0.400
1-phase, gesis KNX V-0/2W SI 1PH
AP 631/02 AP 631/02 shutter/blind actuators
3-phase, gesis KNX V-0/2W SI
5WG1 631-3AL01
5WG1 631-3AL02
AP 631/51 AP 631/51 shutter/blind actuators
1-phase, gesis KNX V-0/2W 1PH
AP 631/52 AP 631/52 shutter/blind actuators
3-phase, gesis KNX V-0/2W
5WG1 631-3AL51
5WG1 631-3AL52
AP 631/11 AP 631/11 combination actuators
1-phase, gesis KNX, V-0/2+1W 1PH
AP 63112
AP 63112 combination actuators
3-phase, gesis KNX, V-0/2+1W
5WG1 631-3AL11
5WG1 631-3AL12
AP 631/21 N 631/21 switch/dimming actuators
1-phase, gesis KNX V-0/2SD 1PH
10
AP 631/22 N 631/22 switch/dimming actuators
3-phase, gesis KNX V-0/2SD
5WG1 631-3AL21
5WG1 631-3AL22
AP 631/43 AP 631/43 switch actuators
1-phase, gesis KNX V-0/4b 1PH
AP 631/44 AP 631/44 switch actuators
3-phase, gesis KNX V-0/4b
5WG1 631-3AL43
5WG1 631-3AL44
AP 631/32 AP 631/32 switch actuators
3-phase, gesis KNX V-0/6
5WG1 631-3AL32
3-phase, gesis KNX V-56/4
5WG1 631-3AL62
7
10/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
11
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways,
Interface Converters
11/2
Introduction
11/5
KNX/Ethernet
11/7
KNX/DALI
11/9
KNX/USB
11/11
KNX/RS232
11/13
KNX/infrared
11/16
KNX/KNX radio
11/17
KNX/EnOcean
11/18
KNX/LOGO!
11/19
KNX/SIMATIC S7
11/21
KNX/telephone
11
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
11
11/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
KNX/Ethernet
Communication over fast Ethernet data network,
whether internally or for remote control.
11/5
KNX/DALI
For the control of ECGs over DALI interface.
11/7
KNX/USB
The PC interface over installed USB sockets.
11/9
KNX/RS232
The PC interface over installed plug-and-socket devices 11/11
in different DELTA designs.
KNX/infrared
Remote control over hand-held and wall-mounted
11/13
transmitters. In various DELTA designs or independent of
design.
KNX/KNX radio
Wireless remote control and expansion made easy.
For i-system, DELTA profil and DELTA style.
11/16
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
Introduction
Devices
Application
Page
KNX/EnOcean
Integration of battery-free EnOcean pushbuttons in
GAMMA instabus systems.
11/17
KNX/LOGO!
More functions with modern small control systems.
11/18
KNX/SIMATIC S7
The key to the world of automation.
11/19
KNX/telephone
Connection to telephone.
11/21
11
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
11/3
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
Introduction
The KNX network
KNX network
Switching
Dimming
Shutter/blind
SIMATIC S7
I2_14030
OPC
visualization
Pushbutton
KNXnet/IP on Ethernet
RS232/USB
KNX
IP interface
LOGO!
IR pushbutton
Motion
detection
Display of fault
indications
Synco 700 controller
IR hand-held
transmitter
wave
coupler
Central
operation
Indication and operation
Analog/GSM
11
wave
hand-held transmitter
GAMMA instabus offers interfaces to many other technologies,
such as Ethernet (LAN), lighting controls with DALI. Thus, it is
simple to exchange information and data over the KNX network.
In particular, the KNXnet/IP supports connection to building
management systems (OPC, PROFINET, SIMATIC S7, etc.).
11/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Room
temperature
evaluation
KNX/DALI
Gateway
DALI
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/Ethernet
■ Overview
I2_15412
Faster downloads save time
LAN (Ethernet cross cable)
KNX
With the new KNXnet/IP standard, KNX telegrams
can be transmitted over Ethernet (LAN). This
enables new applications and solutions.
Existing network infrastructures and technologies
are used to transmit KNX data over greater
distances.
N 148/21
IP interface
LAN-capable notebook
KNX device
Links between buildings and/or building levels
can be clearly and easily implemented using
KNXnet/IP, see chapter "Application examples".
KNX device
KNX device
■ Technical specifications
Type
N 148/21 N 146
N 350E
N 151
N
N
N
N
✔
✔
✔
✔
2 MW
2 MW
4 MW
4 MW
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
--
12 ... 30
12 ... 30
12 ... 30
12 ... 30
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔2)
✔2)
--
--
✔
--
-----
-----
✔
----
11
Enclosure data
Design
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
Display/control elements
LEDs for indicating that the device is ready-to-run,
KNX communication, IP communication
LCD
Power supply
Electronics powered over an external
AC/DC power supply unit
V
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection via bus terminal
Mains connection
Ethernet connection over RJ45 socket
Plug-in terminal block for the connection of an
external power supply unit
Gateway
Supports KNXnet/IP
Line coupler function
Interface functions
Integrated realtime clock weekly scheduling
program for 100 scheduled entries/astro function
Yearly time switching functions
Event entries
Logic gate
Web servers
1)
On request.
2)
ETS3 and visualization.
200
30
--
✔
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
11/5
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/Ethernet
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
N 148/21
N 148/21 IP interfaces
N 146
N 146 IP routers
DT Order No.
}
5WG1 148-1AB21
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.126
}
5WG1 146-1AB01
1
1
030 0.126
N 350E
N 350E IP controllers
}
30 logic gates, 200 event entries, weekly scheduling
program, integrated IP interface
5WG1 350-1EB01
1
1
030 0.184
N 151
N 151 IP viewers
A
5WG1 151-1AB01
1
1
030 0.150
u
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 148-1AB21
5WG1 146-1AB01
11
5WG1 350-1EB01
5WG1 151-1EB01
11/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/DALI
■ Technical specifications
Type
N 525E
N 141
GE 141
N
N
✔
✔
GE
--
--
--
✔
4 MW
4 MW
42
274.5
28
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
8
1
1
✔
✔
✔
8
64
64
Enclosure data
Design
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Enclosures for device installation
Dimensions
• Height
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
• Depth
mm
mm
mm
Display/control elements
LED for status indication per output ON/OFF)
Power supply
Electronics powered over bus voltage
With electronics powered over an integrated
power supply unit
DALI outputs powered over an integrated
power supply unit
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection over contact system to data rail
Bus connection via bus terminal
Outputs
Control outputs
980801
802701
801805
(ETS2)
802003
(ETS3)
801808
(ETS3)
DALI outputs (lines)
DALI output acc. to IEC 60929 for DALI ECG
(16 V, floating, short-circuit resistant)
Max. ECG per output
(Osram Dynamik 58 W)
Direct operation
Configurable behavior in the event of a
bus power failure/recovery
Support of CIN
Scene control
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
--
--
--
Integrated 8-bit scene control
Scenes to be integrated per DALI output
Effect control
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
16
16
16
16
16
Integrated effect control
(one-off or cyclic chaselight operation, color control)
Test function over ETS
--
✔
--
--
--
Testing individual ECGs
Testing group assignment
Testing scenes
Testing effects
Group control
-----
✔
--
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
Up to 16 groups per DALI output
• Switching ON/OFF
• BRIGHTER/DARKER dimming
• Set value
Individual ECG control
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
Operation of individual ECG with
• Switching ON/OFF
• Set value
Time functions
--
✔
--
✔
--
Timer mode, 1-step (automatic stairwell switch)
Timer mode, 2-step
Night mode (lighting for cleaning)
Warning of impending OFF
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Application program
11
Functions
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
11/7
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/DALI
Type
801805
(ETS2)
802003
(ETS3)
801808
(ETS3)
GE 141
802701
N 141
980801
N 525E
BRIGHTER/DARKER dimming
Adjustable dimming time
Brightness limitation, adjustable
min. dimming value/max. dimming value
Switching
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Switching ON/OFF
Configurable starting value
Switching ON/OFF possible over
BRIGHTER/DARKER dimming
Status
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
DALI short circuit
DALI power supply
Status output
(ON/OFF, value, lamp fault, ECG fault)
Status group
(ON/OFF, value, lamp fault, ECG fault)
Status ECG
(ON/OFF, value, lamp fault, ECG fault)
✔1)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔2)
✔
--
✔
--
✔
--
Application program
Dimming
1)
2)
Per channel.
Status ON/OFF, value.
■ Selection and ordering data
11
Type
Version
DT Order No.
N 141
instabus/N 141 DALI gateways
u
}
GE 141
KNX EIB/GE 141 DALI interfaces
u
N 525E
N 525E switch/dimming actuators
8 x DALI outputs, 8 DALI ECG per output
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 141-1AB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.200
}
5WG1 141-4AB01
1
1
030 0.220
}
5WG1 525-1EB01
1
1
030 0.300
5WG1 141-1AB01
5WG1 141-4AB01
5WG1 525-1EB01
11/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/USB
■ Overview
For connection of a PC over USB interface for parameter
assignment, visualization, logging and diagnosis of
bus devices.
■ Technical specifications
N 148/11
UP 146E
Design
Design
N
UP
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Dimensions
• Height
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
• Depth
✔
--
1 MW
65
65
42
✔
✔
✔
--
---
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
Type
UP 142E
DELTA
profil/style/
ambiente
Enclosure data
mm
mm
mm
Power supply
Bus-powered electronics or over USB through a
connected PC
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Plug onto UP 110 bus coupling unit
Plug onto UP 114 bus coupling unit
Bus connection over contact system to data rail
Bus connection via bus terminal
✔
11
Gateway
Transmission PC – USB
Electrically isolated access to the bus line over
integrated socket
Access to all bus devices in the system
USB 1.1 or higher USB 1.1 or higher
USB (type B)
USB (type B)
✔
✔
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
11/9
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/USB
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Design-independent
N 148/11
N 148/11 USB interfaces
UP 146E
UP 146E USB interfaces1)2)
u
}
5WG1 148-1AB11
1
1
030 0.840
B
}
B
C
5WG1 146-2EB01
5WG1 146-2EB11
5WG1 146-2EB21
5WG1 146-2EB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
}
5WG1 146-2EB11
1
1
022 0.091
B
5WG1 142-2EB01
1
1
022 0.091
5WG1 148-1AB11
DELTA profil
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
0.092
0.091
0.092
0.091
5WG1 146-2EB11
DELTA style
UP 146E
UP 146E USB interfaces1)2)
• Titanium white
11
5WG1 146-2EB11
DELTA ambiente
UP 142E
UP 142E USB interfaces1)2) (to be discontinued)
• Arctic white
5WG1 142-2EB01
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
11/10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/RS232
■ Overview
For connection of a PC over RS232 interface for parameter
assignment, visualization, logging and diagnosis of
bus devices.
■ Technical specifications
N 148/02
N 148/04
UP 146
Design
Design
N
N
UP
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Dimensions
• Height
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
• Depth
✔
✔
--
3 MW
65
65
42
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
---
---
✔
✔
✔
--
Type
UP 142
DELTA
profil/
style/
ambiente
Enclosure data
mm
mm 3 MW
mm
Power supply
Bus-powered electronics
or over RS232 through a connected PC
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Plug onto UP 110 bus coupling unit
Plug onto UP 114 bus coupling unit
Bus connection over contact system to
data rail
✔
11
Gateway
Transmission rate PC – RS232
Can be switched between standard protocol
and FT1.2
Electrically isolated access to the bus line over
integrated socket
Access to all bus devices in the system
bit/s 9600
--
9600,
9600
19200 (for FT1.2)
On the device
--
SUB-D,
9-pole
SUB-D,
9-pole
SUB-D,
9-pole
✔
✔
✔
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
11/11
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/RS232
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Design-independent
N 148/02
N 148/02 RS232 interfaces
u
}
5WG1 148-1AB02
1
1
030 0.172
N 148/04
N 148/04 RS232 interfaces
Can be switched to FT 1.2 protocol
u
B
5WG1 148-1AB04
1
1
030 0.178
UP 146
UP 146 RS232 interfaces1)2)
B
}
B
C
5WG1 146-2AB01
5WG1 146-2AB11
5WG1 146-2AB21
5WG1 146-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
}
5WG1 146-2AB11
1
1
022 0.088
B
5WG1 142-2AB01
1
1
022 0.088
5WG1 148-1AB02
5WG1 148-1AB04
DELTA profil
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
0.088
0.088
0.088
0.088
11
5WG1 146-2AB11
DELTA style
UP 146
UP 146 RS232 interfaces1)2)
• Titanium white
5WG1 146-2AB11
DELTA ambiente
UP 142
UP 142 RS232 interfaces1)2) (to be discontinued)
• Arctic white
5WG1 142-2AB01
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
11/12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/infrared
■ Technical specifications
DELTA profil
DELTA style
DELTA
ambiente
Design
Type
Application program
N 450/02
UP 233
UP 234
UP 235
UP 285E
UP 286E
UP 287E
UP 284E
7F0301
900B02
900B02
900B02
900B02
900B02
900B02
900B02
Individual pushbuttons
Pushbutton pairs
---
2
1
4
2
8
4
2
1
4
2
8
4
8
4
Operation (v: vertical, h: horizontal)
LED per pushbutton pair for status indication
or configurable as orientation light
Separate LED for orientation light
(ON/OFF configurable)
Labeling field
Pictographs supplied
---
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ (with S 440) ✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Max. number of group addresses
Max. number of assignments
Switching
22
22
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
Switching ON/OFF
Switching OVER
Pushbutton function (bell function)
Value transmission
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Value transmission, 8-bit
Dimming
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dimming with stop telegram (4 bit)
Dimming with cyclic transmission (4 bit)
Short or long button press
(ON/OFF or BRIGHTER/DARKER), configurable
Shutter/blind
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Shutter/blind control
Short or long button press
(slat adjustment/STOP or UP/DOWN),
configurable
Scene
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Store and call up scene, 1-bit
in conjunction with scene module
Short or long button press (store/call up scene),
configurable
Status
4
2
4
8
2
4
8
8
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Status indication of any status objects (1-bit)
Status indication of pushbutton objects
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Display/control elements
Bus connection
Plug onto UP 114 bus coupling unit
Inputs
IR receiver/decoder
Integration of 14 further pushbutton pairs of
IR hand-held/wall-mounted transmitters
Functions
11
For selection and ordering data, see page 11/14.
Type
Description
N 450
N 450 IR decoders
• Parallel connection of up to four S 440 IR receivers
• Conversion of IR telegrams incoming from an IR receiver into
bus telegrams
• Control of up to 22 functions (switching ON/OFF/OVER,
dimming, value transmission, shutter/blind control or call
up/store scenes)
•
•
•
•
Electronics powered over bus voltage
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection over contact system to data rail
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width: 2 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
Accessories
S 440
S 440 IR receivers for N 450 IR decoders
• For reception and amplification of IR signals transmitted from
IR wall-mounted transmitters or IR hand-held transmitters, for
conversion into electrical signals
• Powered over the IR decoder
• For connection to an N 450 IR decoder via a 1 m cable
(extendable up to 50 m), including clamping springs and
rosette for installation in ceilings, walls or luminaires
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 25 x 26 x 65 mm
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
11/13
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/infrared
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Design-independent
N 450/02
N 450/02 IR decoders
u
}
5WG1 450-1AB02
1
1
030 0.105
u
}
5WG1 440-7AB01
1
1
030 0.072
5WG1 233-2AB01
5WG1 233-2AB11
5WG1 233-2AB21
5WG1 233-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.038
0.038
0.038
0.038
5WG1 234-2AB01
5WG1 234-2AB11
5WG1 234-2AB21
5WG1 234-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.038
0.038
0.038
0.038
5WG1 235-2AB01
5WG1 235-2AB11
5WG1 235-2AB21
5WG1 235-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.038
0.038
0.038
0.038
(to be discontinued)
5WG1 450-1AB02
S 440
Accessories
S 440 IR receivers for N 450/02 IR decoders
(to be discontinued)
5WG1 440-7AB01
DELTA profil
UP 233
UP 233 pushbuttons, single, IR receiver, neutral1)2)
•
•
•
•
11
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
B
B
B
B
5WG1 233-2AB11
UP 234
UP 234 pushbuttons, double, IR receiver, neutral1)2)
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
B
B
B
B
5WG1 234-2AB11
UP 235
UP 235 pushbuttons, quadruple, IR receiver, neutral1)2)
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
B
B
B
B
5WG1 235-2AB11
1) The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2) The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
11/14
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/infrared
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA style
UP 285E
UP 285E pushbuttons1)2)
Single, IR receiver, neutral
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
C
B
5WG1 285-2EB11
5WG1 285-2EB21
1
1
1
1
022 0.038
022 0.055
C
B
5WG1 286-2EB11
5WG1 286-2EB21
1
1
1
1
022 0.038
022 0.036
}
B
5WG1 287-2EB11
5WG1 287-2EB21
1
1
1
1
022 0.038
022 0.036
5WG1 285-2EB11
UP 286E
UP 286E pushbuttons1)2)
Double, IR receiver, neutral
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
5WG1 286-2EB11
UP 287E
UP 287E pushbuttons1)2)
Quadruple, IR receiver, neutral
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
5WG1 287-2EB11
11
DELTA ambiente
UP 284E
UP 284E pushbuttons1)2) (to be discontinued)
Quadruple, IR receiver
• Arctic white/arctic white
• Arctic white/steel
B
B
5WG1 284-2EB01
5WG1 284-2EB03
1
1
1
1
022 0.084
022 0.084
5WG1 284-2EB01
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
11/15
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/KNX radio
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
UP 140
UP 140 wave/instabus couplers
• For coupling GAMMA wave with GAMMA instabus
• Coupling of a total of up to 50 GAMMA wave sensor channels
with GAMMA instabus actuator channels or GAMMA instabus
sensor channels with GAMMA wave actuator channels
• Pushbutton rocker, single with intermediate position
• Vertical operation
• ETS3 and higher supports configuration of the functions:
switching, switching and dimming, shutter/blind control or
scene control
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
• Depth
i-system
DELTA
profil
DELTA
style
Single
Single
Single
65
65
14
68
68
16.5
mm 55
mm 55
mm 13
• Short and long button press for ON/OFF, BRIGHTER/DARKER
for dimming or UP/DOWN and adjustment of slats for
shutter/blind control
• Storage and call up of up to two scenes
• 1 LED for the indication of telegram transmissions
• KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
• 10-pole plug for plugging onto a UP 114 bus coupling unit,
version BCU 2.1.
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
i-system
UP 140
11
UP 140 wave couplers/instabus1)2)
• Titanium white
• Carbon metallic
• Aluminum metallic
}
B
A
5WG3 140-2HB11
5WG3 140-2HB21
5WG3 140-2HB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.050
022 0.050
022 0.050
B
}
B
A
5WG3 140-2AB01
5WG3 140-2AB11
5WG3 140-2AB21
5WG3 140-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
}
B
5WG3 140-2GB11
5WG3 140-2GB21
1
1
1
1
022 0.050
022 0.050
5WG3 140-2HB11
DELTA profil
UP 140
UP 140 wave couplers/instabus1)2)
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
5WG3 140-2AB11
DELTA style
UP 140
UP 140 wave couplers/instabus1)2)
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
5WG3 140-2GB11
1) The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2) The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
11/16
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/EnOcean
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
AP 631/62 Gateway EnOcean/KNX, AP 631/62 switch actuators, 3-phase
•
•
•
•
•
Plug-in connector outputs, gesis GST 18i3 black
Mains voltage connection, 3-phase
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection over plug system
4 channels
•
•
•
•
Rated contact voltage, 230/400 V AC
Rated contact current 16 A
EnOcean radio receiver
Dimensions (H x W x D): 32 x 254 x 112 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
AP 631/62 Gateway EnOcean/KNX, AP 631/62 switch actuators B
3-phase, gesis KNX V-56/4
5WG1 631-3AL62
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.400
5WG1 631-3AL62
11
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
11/17
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/LOGO!
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
LOGO KNX/LOGO! communication modules
• For connection of LOGO! to KNX, as slave module for the LOGO!
logic module (12/24 V or 115/240 V) and as bus devices on KNX
• For linking transmitted KNX data points and LOGO! inputs and
outputs over logic and timer functions through LOGO!
• For the linking and transmitting over KNX of up to 8 binary inputs
and 4 binary outputs of LOGO! and up to 16 virtual KNX binary
inputs, 12 virtual KNX binary outputs, 8 virtual KNX analog inputs
and 2 virtual KNX analog outputs
• Transmission of date and time of the LOGO! realtime clock over KNX
• Two LEDs for the display of the communication status of LOGO!
and KNX
• Electronics powered over an external power supply unit for
24 V AC/DC, 25 mA
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection over screw terminals
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width: 2 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
LOGO KNX/LOGO! communication modules
B
Price
per PU
6BK1700-0BA00-0AA1
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s) Unit(s)
kg
1
1
475 0.107
6BK1700-0BA00-0AA1
11
11/18
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/SIMATIC S7
■ Overview
The level of automated applications also increases in the area
of building automation. Customers are keen to use components
from the field of industrial automation for the automation of
infrastructure facilities. This is now possible using
SIEMENS IP/Ethernet components.
■ Benefits
The modules also support the cyclic reading of values in 5 different,
freely configurable cycles (10 min. - 1 x daily).
The following data point types are supported:
Use of tried and tested industrial components in the field of
building automation, i.e. utilization of building automation data
for the automation of factories. Simple transfer of configuration
data from ETS3.
■ Application
Automation and monitoring of buildings using KNX devices
with components from the SIMATIC product range.
■ Function
Modules for communication of a SIMATIC S7 with KNX bus over
IP/Ethernet using a KNXnet/IP interface:
• N 146 IP routers
• N 148/21 IP interfaces
• N 350E IP controllers
• N 151 IP viewers
The KNX/EIB2S7 program package comprises modules for
communication to the IP router/interface/controller/viewer and
an editor for user-friendly parameterization of the modules.
Addressing is implemented over group addresses on the side of
KNX and with DB and DW on the side of SIMATIC. Assignment
of the various address terms to one another is implemented
largely automatically in the KNX/EIB2S7 Editor.
Management
level
Automation
level
One SIMATIC S7 can be connected to up to 5 KNXnet/IP interfaces,
which permits the monitoring, operation and reading of a total of
up to 7000 group addresses (depending on control type and the
number of KNXnet/IP interfaces connected).
Data point type Application
Length Receive
Write
Read
EIS 1
EIS 2
EIS 3
EIS 4
EIS 5
EIS 6
EIS 7
EIS 8
EIS 9
EIS 11
EIS 14
EIS 15
1 bit
4 bit
3 byte
3 byte
2 byte
8 bit
1 bit
2 bit
4 byte
4 byte
1 byte
14 byte
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
--X
X
X
-X
X
X
--
Switching
Dimming
Time
Date
Floating-point
Scaling
Motor control
Priority
Floating-point
32-bit counter
8-bit counter
String
X
X
--X
X
X
X
X
X
X
--
The following controllers can be used with an additional Ethernet CP:
• S7 314
• S7 315-2 DP
• S7 317-2 DP
• S7 319-3 PN/DP
• S7 412-2 MPI/DP
• S7 414-2 MPI/DP
• S7 416-2 MPI
11
The following Ethernet CPs can be implemented:
• CP 343-1
• CP 443-1
Visualization
SIMATIC S7 +
communication
Network
Switch
Field level
KNX
I2_14031
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
11/19
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/SIMATIC S7
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
KNX/EIB2S7
DT Order No.
N
Price
per PU
6AV6643-7AC10-0AA0
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
On req.
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
6AV6643-7AC10-0AA0
11
11/20
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/telephone
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
AP 140/02 Telecontrol devices TC Plus EIB
AP 140/22
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
For connection of KNX to the telephone system
6 signal inputs for floating contacts
6 switching outputs 12 V DC, 100 mA for the control of relays
Additional 12 V DC switching output, 100 mA for the control of
a local acoustic alarm signal generator if a transmitted alarm
indication is not acknowledged
Additional 10 KNX switching functions and 10 KNX alarm functions
4-line LCD for the indication of device states
Monitoring of telephone cable
Adjustable 4-digit code number for protection against
unauthorized switching
• Operation with MFV-capable telephone or MFV hand-held
transmitter
• Recordable announcement and voice-supported user prompting
• 6 x 4 freely programmable destination numbers in the event of
alarm
• 4 dial attempts per destination number
• Connection to the telephone network over an N-coded
TAE connecting cable
• Electronics powered by a plug-in power supply unit for connection
to 230 V AC, with alternative power supply over an external
power supply unit for 12 V DC
• Surface-mounting enclosure, RAL 9010, degree of protection
IP30
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 251 x 204 x 49 mm
Accessories
S 190
S 190 headphone/speaker sets for AP 140/02 and AP 140/22 TC Plus
Headphone/speaker set for recording announcements.
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 140-7AU22
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 1.520
C
5WG1 140-7AU02
1
1
030 1.500
X
5WG1 190-7AU01
1
1
030 0.220
AP 140/22 Telecontrol devices TC Plus EIB GSM AP 140/22 C
Price
per PU
KNX connection to GSM telephone network1)
AP 140/02 Telecontrol devices TC Plus EIB analog
AP 140/02
S 190
KNX connection to analog telephone network1)
Accessories
S 190 headphone/speaker sets for
AP 140 TC Plus
5WG1 140-7AU22
1) The headphone/speaker set for recording announcements must be ordered separately.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
11/21
11
© Siemens AG 2008
Gateways, Interface Converters
Notes
11
7
11/22
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
12
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
12/2
Introduction
12/3
12/5
12/7
12/7
12/8
12/8
12/9
With KNX Connection
General data
Motion/presence
Brightness
Wind
Temperature
Leakage
Fire
12/10
Without KNX Connection
Weather sensors
12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
Introduction
■ Overview
Application
Page
Motion/presence
Recording of motion and presence in a range of
different designs.
12/5
Brightness
Brightness sensors measure the brightness value both indoors and outdoors.
12/7
Wind
Wind measurement with no mechanical components.
12/7
Temperature
The temperature sensors measure the current temperature. 12/8
Leakage
The water sensors indicate unexpected water.
In DELTA profil or DELTA style design.
Fire
The fire combination alarm with integrated bus coupling 12/9
unit for the early detection of fires.
Weather sensors
Whether wind, temperature, light or rain – the weather
12/10
sensors signal the values gathered by the weather system.
With KNX connection
12
12/8
Without KNX connection
12/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
With KNX Connection
General data
AP 251
UP 258/21
GE 252
GE 254
GE 253
AP 254/02
N 258/02
AP 256
UP 272
AP 255/12
UP 255/11
AP 257/41
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
---
✔
--
---
✔
✔
--
--
-IP20
--
-IP55
--
-IP20
--
✔
✔
✔
IP20
--
IP20
--
-IP54
--
-IP20
--
---IP20 IP20
----
--
IP20
--
87
87
60
80
82
182
102
102
33
42
274.5
28
42
42
274.5 274.5
28
28
110
72
54
64 65
4 MW 166 65
42
30
52
33
69
67
118
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
2)
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
---
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
UP 255
UP 256
UP 257
UP 258H
Type
UP 258/11
■ Technical specifications
Enclosure data
Modular installation devices for mounting on
-TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Modular installation device in oblong design,
-for installation in luminaires for fluorescent
lamps
Surface mounting
-Mounting on a flush-mounting box using a
-mounting plate
Mounting in intermediate ceilings
-Degree of protection
IP20
Mast mounting
-Dimensions
• Height
mm 1)
mm 1)
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)/∅
• Depth
mm 23
--
✔
Power supply
Electronics powered over bus voltage
Electronics powered over an integrated power
supply unit for supply voltage 230 V AC
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Plug onto UP 110 bus coupling unit
Plug onto UP 114 bus coupling unit
Bus connection via bus terminal
Bus connection over contact system to
data rail
Transmission of sensor values over bus
1)
Design-dependent.
2)
4AC2 402 external power supply unit.
✔
12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
12/3
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
With KNX Connection
UP 255
UP 256
UP 257
UP 258H
UP 258/11
AP 251
UP 258/21
GE 252
GE 254
GE 253
AP 254/02
N 258/02
AP 256
UP 272
AP 255/12
UP 255/11
AP 257/41
General data
Motion
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Presence
--
✔
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Horizontal sensing angle
Vertical sensing angle
Range to the front
Range on each side, up to
Adjustable range
180°
-10
6
360°
120°
-4.52)
--
290°
-8
8
--
360°
120°
-3.52)
--
------
------
------
------
------
------
------
------
------
--
10 ... 200 ...
1500 1900
0 ...
2000
0 ...
1 ...
16000 100000
--
--
--
0 ... -2000
--
100 ... 1600
(standard)
25 ... 200
(expanded)
--
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
---
---
----
----
----
--
✔
---
✔
✔
----
--
✔
✔
-----
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
-40 ... 1)
+150
4
-50
--
--
--
--
---
---
---
Type
Motion/presence
m
m
✔
Brightness
Measuring range
Lux 1 ...
1000
For measuring outdoor brightness
For measuring indoor brightness
For measuring indoor brightness,
taking into account indirect lighting
2 m connecting lead of sensor element
(cannot be extended)
✔
Temperature
Measuring range
°C
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
PT1000 temperature sensor input
Max. cable length, unshielded, untwisted
m
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
-25 ...
+55
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
--
✔
✔
✔
---
---
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
✔
✔
----
----
----
m/s --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0 ...
70
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
✔
Leakage
Water indication
Automatic indication in the event of a
defective sensor
Fire
Smoke indication
Heat indication
Automatic indication in the event of a
defective sensor
✔
Wind speed
12
Measuring range
Limit value monitoring (3 limit values)
Logic operations (8 AND, 8 OR)
1)
On request.
2)
At mounting height 3 m (moving persons).
For selection and ordering data, see page 12/5 ff.
12/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
✔
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
With KNX Connection
Motion/presence
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
i-system
UP 258H
UP 258H motion detectors1)2)
• Mounting height 1.10 m
- Titanium white
- Carbon metallic
- Aluminum metallic
}
B
C
5WG1 258-2HB11
5WG1 258-2HB21
5WG1 258-2HB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.059
022 0.059
022 0.059
• Mounting height 2.20 m
- Titanium white
- Carbon metallic
- Aluminum metallic
B
B
C
5WG1 258-2HB12
5WG1 258-2HB22
5WG1 258-2HB32
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.059
022 0.059
022 0.059
• Mounting height 1.10 m
- Pearl gray
- Titanium white
- Anthracite
- Silver
B
}
B
A
5WG1 255-2AB01
5WG1 255-2AB11
5WG1 255-2AB21
5WG1 255-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.062
0.062
0.062
0.062
• Mounting height 2.20 m
- Pearl gray
- Titanium white
- Anthracite
- Silver
B
}
B
A
5WG1 255-2AB02
5WG1 255-2AB12
5WG1 255-2AB22
5WG1 255-2AB72
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.062
0.062
0.062
0.062
N
B
B
B
5WG1 257-2AB13
5WG1 257-2AB21
5WG1 257-2AB41
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.062
022 0.062
022 0.062
N
B
B
B
5WG1 257-2AB14
5WG1 257-2AB22
5WG1 257-2AB42
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.062
022 0.062
022 0.062
5WG1 258-2HB11
DELTA profil
UP 255
5WG1 255-2AB11
UP 255 motion detectors1)2)
DELTA style
UP 257
UP 257 motion detectors1)2)
• Mounting height 1.10 m
- Titanium white
- Basalt black
- Platinum metallic
• Mounting height 2.20 m
- Titanium white
- Basalt black
- Platinum metallic
12
5WG1 255-2AB11
DELTA ambiente
UP 256
UP 256 motion detectors1)2) (to be discontinued)
• Mounting height 1.10 m
- Arctic white
B
5WG1 256-2AB01
1
1
022 0.062
• Mounting height 2.20 m
- Arctic white
B
5WG1 256-2AB02
1
1
022 0.062
5WG1 256-2AB01
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
12/5
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
With KNX Connection
Motion/presence
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Design-independent
AP 251
AP 251 surface-mounting motion detectors,
IP55
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9010)
• Anthracite
N
A
A
5WG1 251-3AB11
5WG1 251-3AB21
1
1
1
1
030 0.300
030 0.300
A
A
5TC7 900
5TC7 901
1
1
1
1
024 0.180
024 0.180
NA
5TC7 902
1
1
024 0.080
}
5WG1 258-2AB11
1
1
030 0.221
}
5WG1 258-2AB21
1
1
030 0.085
}
5WG1 258-3EB21
1
5
030 0.220
5WG1 251-3AB11
Accessories
Special bases
N
For AP 251 motion detectors, IP55
• Titanium white (similar to RAL 9010)
• Anthracite
5TC7 900
Remote controls
For AP 251 motion detectors, IP55
5TC7 902
UP 258/11 UP 258/11 presence detectors1)
With brightness sensor
5WG1 258-2AB11
UP 258/21 UP 258/21 presence detectors
With brightness sensor and constant light level control
12
5WG1 258-2AB21
AP 258E
Accessories
AP 258 surface-mounting enclosures
UP 258/21 presence detectors
For fixing the presence detector as a surface
mounting device.
Dimensions (H x W x D): 102 x 102 x 46 mm
5WG1 258-3EB21
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
12/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
With KNX Connection
Brightness
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
AP 255/12 AP 255/12 brightness controllers
N
B
5WG1 255-4AB12
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.050
UP 255/11 UP 255/11 brightness controllers
N
B
5WG1 255-4AB11
1
1
030 0.030
AP 254/02 AP 254/02 dual sensors
N
}
5WG1 254-3EY02
1
1
030 0.153
}
5WG1 253-4AB01
1
1
030 0.345
5WG1 255-4AB12
5WG1 255-4AB11
Brightness measurement, temperature
measurement, sun protection control,
lighting control
5WG1 254-3EY02
GE 253
GE 253 outdoor brightness sensors
For indoor mounting
5WG1 253-4AB01
GE 252
GE 252 indoor brightness sensors
}
5WG1 252-4AB02
1
1
030 0.345
GE 254
GE 254 indoor brightness sensors
}
5WG1 254-4AB01
1
1
030 0.345
For indirect lighting
5WG1 252-4AB02
5WG1 254-4AB01
Wind
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
AP 257/41 AP 257/41 wind sensors
DT Order No.
N
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
B
5WG1 257-3AB41
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.145
B
4AC2 402
1
1
5WG1 257-3AB41
Accessories
Electronic power supply units
027 0.080
4AC2 402
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
12/7
12
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
With KNX Connection
Temperature
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
N 258/02
N 258/02 temperature sensors
B
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 258-1AB02
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.242
5WG1 254-3EY02
1
1
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
For four Pt1000 sensors
5WG1 258-1AB02
AP 254/02 AP 254/02 dual sensors
N
030 0.153
Brightness measurement, temperature
measurement, sun protection control,
lighting control
5WG1 254-3EY02
Leakage
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
12
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA profil
UP 272
UP 272 water sensors1)2)
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
B
}
B
C
5WG1 272-2AB01
5WG1 272-2AB11
5WG1 272-2AB21
5WG1 272-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.090
0.090
0.090
0.090
}
5WG1 272-2AB11
1
1
022 0.090
5WG1 272-2AB11
DELTA style
UP 272
UP 272 water sensors1)2)
• Titanium white
5WG1 272-2AB11
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
12/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
With KNX Connection
Fire
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
AP 256
AP 256 fire combination alarms
(to be discontinued)
X
5WG1 256-3AB01
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.240
5WG1 256-3AB01
12
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
12/9
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
Without KNX Connection
Weather sensors
■ Technical specifications
Weather sensors specially for AP 257, AP 257/11 and LOGO! weather systems
Type
S 258/02
S 258/03
S 258/131)
AP 258/11
AP 258/21
AP 258/31
AP 258/41
-IP65
--
-IP65
--
-IP65
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
✔
✔
✔
✔
64
58
38
--
64
58
38
--
98
64
38.5
--
Enclosure data
Surface mounting
Degree of protection
The following connecting leads must be
used: JY(ST)Y 2 x 2 x 0.6 or PYCYM
2 x 2 x 0.6
(can be extended for a max. 20 m)
Dimensions
• Height
• Width
• Depth
• Diameter of enclosure/impeller
mm 178
mm
mm
mm 35/150
35/150
35/150
64
58
38
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
----
----
----
----
--
--
--
--
---
---
0 ... 40000
(daylight)
140° ... 160°
--
---
0 ... 255
(dusk)
140° ... 160°
--
--
--
Mounting type
Mast mountings
5 m fixed cable
Wind speed
Detection of current wind speed
Detection of rotor breakage
Failure monitoring of wind rotor by the
weather system
Brightness
Measuring range
lux
Receiving angle
Measurement of outdoor brightness
✔
---
✔
---
--
--
-20 ... +40
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
✔
Temperature
Measuring range
°C
Rain
12
For the detection and tripping of a switching
signal by rain drops
Two-step heating of sensor areas
(protection against moisture) (fast drying)
Heating voltage generated by weather system
For selection and ordering data, see page 12/11.
1)
The inner diameter of the mast must be 36 mm. No additional mast mount is required. The heating transformer must be ordered separately.
Type
Description
M 258
M 258 heating transformers
For S 258 wind rotors, heatable
•
•
•
•
•
M 258/21
Primary voltage 230 V AC
Secondary voltage 24 V AC
Fuse 80 mA, slow
Degree of protection, IP54
Dimensions (H x W x D): 80 x 120 x 50 mm
M 258/21 mast mountings
Outer diameter 40 mm
• For mounting 2 opposing sensors on a mast with an outer
diameter of 40 mm, for AP 257 weather systems
12/10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
Without KNX Connection
Weather sensors
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
S 258/02
S 258/02 wind rotors
B
Heatable, with detection of rotor breakage,
for AP 257, AP 257/11 and LOGO! weather systems
S 258/03
S 258/13
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 258-7AB02
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.950
B
S 258/03 wind rotors
Heatable, without detection of rotor breakage,
for AP 257, AP 257/11 and LOGO! weather systems
5WG1 258-7AB03
1
1
030 0.950
S 258/13 wind rotors
B
Not heatable, without detection of rotor breakage,
for AP 257 and AP 257/11 and LOGO! weather systems
5WG1 258-7AB13
1
1
030 0.575
B
5WG1 258-8AB01
1
1
030 0.568
B
5WG1 258-3AB11
1
1
030 0.124
B
5WG1 258-3AB21
1
1
030 0.123
5WG1 258-7AB13
M 258
Accessories
M 258 heating transformers
For S 258 wind rotors, heatable
5WG1 258-8AB01
AP 258/11 AP 258/11 dusk sensors
For AP 257, AP 257/11 and LOGO! weather systems
5WG1 258-3AB11
AP 258/21 AP 258/21 outdoor temperature sensors
For AP 257, AP 257/11 and LOGO! weather systems
12
5WG1 258-3AB21
AP 258/31 AP 258/31 light sensors
B
5WG1 258-3AB31
1
1
030 0.125
B
5WG1 258-3AB41
1
1
030 0.447
B
5WG1 258-8AB21
1
1
030 0.209
For AP 257, AP 257/11 and LOGO! weather systems
5WG1 258-3AB31
AP 258/41 AP 258/41 rain sensors, heated
For AP 257, AP 257/11 and LOGO! weather systems
5WG1 258-3AB41
M 258/21
M 258/21 mast mountings
Outer diameter 40 mm
5WG1 258-8AB21
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
12/11
© Siemens AG 2008
Physical Sensors
Notes
12
7
12/12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
13
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and
Automation Devices
13/2
Introduction
13/3
Logic modules, scene modules,
time/event modules
13/5
Time switches and accessories
13/8
Programmable logic controllers
13
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and Automation Devices
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
13
13/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Logic modules,
scene modules,
time/event modules
Linking received binary signals and transmission of
result over GAMMA instabus.
Place a room into a predefined state at the touch of a
button – it's easy with the scene module.
For the timed control of sequences or the control of
devices dependent on specific events in
GAMMA instabus.
13/3
Time switches and accessories
Everything you need to know about time-controlled
switching - for maximum safety, convenience and
energy saving.
13/5
Programmable logic controllers
LOGO! the compact programmable controller.
13/8
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and Automation Devices
Logic modules, scene modules,
time/event modules
740202
800A01
(ETS2)
800A06
(ETS3)
720101
N
N
N
N
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
1 MW
1 MW
1 MW
4 MW
1 MW
1 MW
1 MW
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
-12 ... 30 --
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
Inputs (virtual)
Configurable inverting of inputs
Outputs
Configurable inverting of outputs
User-definable logic gate
Configurable transmission conditions
Up to 30 internal flags
Positively driven ON/OFF switching of loads (4 channels)
Partition control
---------
255
80
4
4
✔
✔
✔
2
4
✔
✔
✔
127
10
30
-30
4
✔
✔
✔1)
✔
✔
---
---
✔
--
---
---------
8
✔
255
60
-10
2
----
-----
Partition inputs
Controllable rooms
Switch commands (2 x 1 bit)
Brightness values (1 byte)
Switch/dimming commands (1 bit, 4 bit)
Time functions
------
------
------
------
------
------
------
------
OFF delay
ON delay
Timer mode
Scheduled entries
Weekly program
Day, week, month, year program
Master clock (time source)
Slave clock
Astro function
Internal clock, can be synchronized over master clock
Event functions
-----------
✔
---100
✔3)
✔
✔3)
✔3)
✔
✔3)
✔3)
✔
✔3)
100
400
✔
✔
---
✔
✔4)
--
--
✔
✔ (KNX)
✔ (LAN)5)
--------
-----------
Event entries
Event trigger
Sequence control
Scene control
807)
8
----
100
10
200
30
200
✔
✔
----
✔
----
Integrated 1-bit scene control
Integrated 8-bit scene control
Scenes to be integrated
✔
----
----
✔8)
----
----
----
740B01
740C01
740D01
---------
---------
---------
--------
4
4
4
4
-✔
4
4
---
--
✔
------
740301
740A01
N 301
908701
N
✔
N 341
N 350E1)
801701
N
✔
Type
N 302
N 350
800C04
(ETS2)
800C09
(ETS3)
N
N 305
750002
N 347/02
■ Technical specifications
Enclosure data
Design
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH 35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Ethernet connection over RJ45 socket
Dimensions
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
Power supply
Electronics powered over bus voltage
Electronics powered over an external
power supply unit for AC/DC
V
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection via bus terminal
Bus connection over contact system to data rail
Functions
Logic functions
✔
✔
8
✔
✔
✔
--------
✔
✔8)
--
✔
--
✔
✔
---4)
-✔ (KNX)
6)
✔
---
✔
13
For selection and ordering data, see page 13/4.
1)
The software required for parameter assignment over the Ethernet
interface is available on CD-ROM and is included in delivery.
5)
Time synchronization over time server in the data network (NTP).
6)
2)
On request.
Transmission filter.
7)
3)
10 entries per trip unit.
Over event entries.
8)
4)
Over event trigger.
The following devices can be used as a master clock or time source
for synchronizing the module-internal real-time clock: a time switch
(e.g. 5WG1 372-5EY01) or an N 350E IP controller (5WG1 350-1EB01).
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
13/3
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and Automation Devices
Logic modules, scene modules,
time/event modules
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
N 305
N 305 scene/event modules
N
}
N 347/02
N 347/02 logic operation modules
127 logic gates
u
N 350
N 350 event, time and logic modules
10 logic gates, 10 event entries,
weekly scheduling program
u
N 350E
N 350E IP controllers
30 logic gates, 200 event entries,
weekly scheduling program,
integrated IP interface
N 302
N 302 time modules
N 341
N 301
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 305-1AB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.065
}
5WG1 347-1AB02
1
1
030 0.092
B
5WG1 350-1AB01
1
1
030 0.092
}
5WG1 350-1EB01
1
1
030 0.184
u
B
5WG1 302-1AB01
1
1 030 0.092
N 341 event and time modules
u
}
5WG1 341-1AB01
1
1 030 0.092
N 301 logic modules
1 x AND, 1 x OR, linking of 8 inputs,
partition control,
positively driven operation
u
}
5WG1 301-1AB01
1
1 030 0.092
5WG1 305-1AB01
5WG1 347-1AB02
5WG1 350-1AB01
13
5WG1 350-1EB01
5WG1 302-1AB01
5WG1 341-1AB01
5WG1 301-1AB01
13/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and Automation Devices
Time switches and accessories
■ Technical specifications
Type
N 350E
REG 371
REG 372
908701
221D01
7F0401 7F0501 7F0601 7F0401 7F0501 7F0601 7F0803
REG 372/02
REG 373
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
MW 4
2
6
6
6
✔3)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ (N 350E
configurator)
--
✔ (Obelisk)
✔ (Obelisk)
✔ (Obelisk)
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
12 ... 30
--
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
Enclosure data
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH 35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Dimensions
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
Display/control elements
LCD for time, day of the week, daylight saving times,
switching state of channels
Jog pushbuttons for setting the time,
day and program entries
Programming over PC
Power supply
Electronics powered over bus voltage
Additional 230 V power supply for integrated DCF77 power
supply unit
V
Electronics powered over an external
power supply unit for AC/DC
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection via bus terminal
Connection for DCF77 receiver
Software
Timer functions
Channels
801)
2
4
4
16
Memory locations
2)
36
324
324
500
Standard day/weekly program
No. of weekly progs. that can be prioritized
Vacation switching (duration 1 ... 99 days,
preselection 0 ... 99 days)
Random program
Astro program with sunrise and sunset times
Supported telegrams
Switching (1 bit)
Set value (1 byte)
Floating decimal point (2 byte), for temperature, etc.
Positively driven operation (2 bit)
Scenes
Adjustable cyclic transmission
Internal clock, can be synchronized over
master clock by KNX
Transmission of date and time over KNX bus
Synchronization with DCF77 signal
Time synchronization over time server in the data network
1) Communication objects.
2) On request.
3) No daylight saving times, no switching state of the channels.
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
8
--
9
9
9
2)
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
-----
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
2
--
--
4
--
--
4
8
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
--
--
✔
--
✔
✔
----
✔
----
----
✔
-✔
----
✔
---
-✔
---
--
13
✔
--
For selection and ordering data, see page 13/6.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
13/5
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and Automation Devices
Time switches and accessories
Type
Description
Accessories
PC programming sets with OBELISK memory card
• For fast and easy creation of switching programs for
the REG 372 4-channel time switch, the
DCF-77 REG 372/02 4-channel time switch and the
DCF-77 REG 373 16-channel time switch
• Comprising software CD, OBELISK memory module,
programming adapter and software manual
• Readout and description of the memory module over the
programming adapter of the PC programming set,
which is connected to the serial interface of the PC
• For filtering switching programs acc. to specific search criteria,
with display and printout of filtered switching programs
• Transmission of the schedule program from PC to time switch
using an OBELISK memory module programmed by the PC and
then inserted in the time switch, and vice versa for transmitting
a program from one time switch to another time switch using the
memory module or to the PC software for fast copying of a
switching program or parts of a switching program for insertion
in a new or existing program, for archiving switching programs
on the hard disk of a PC, for printing out switching programs in
table form
OBELISK 4K, EEPROM memory modules
EEPROM memory module with 4 KB memory for
programming the REG 372 4-channel time switch and the
DCF-77 REG 372/02 4-channel time switch
OBELISK 64K, EEPROM memory modules
EEPROM memory module with 64 KB memory for programming
the REG 373 16-channel time switch
AP 390
AP 390 DCF-77 aerials
• For connection to up to 10 REG 372/02 year time switches,
4-channel, or REG 373 year time switches, 16-channel
• Red LED lights up to indicate receipt of signal
• Electronics powered with 29 V DC over 4-channel or
16-channel time switch
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
N 350E
N 350E IP controllers1)
30 logic gates, 200 event entries,
weekly scheduling program,
integrated IP interface
}
REG 371
REG 371 weekly time switches2)
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 350-1EB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.184
}
5WG1 371-5EY01
1
1
030 0.148
}
5WG1 372-5EY01
1
1
030 0.360
}
5WG1 372-5EY02
1
1
030 0.464
13
5WG1 350-1EB01
2-channel
5WG1 371-5EY01
REG 372
REG 372 year time switches2)
4-channel
REG 372/2 REG 372/02 year time switches2)3)
4-channel, DCF77 connection
5WG1 372-5EY01
1) The software required for parameter assignment over the Ethernet interface is available on CD-ROM and is included in delivery.
2) During configuration, the installation engineer needs to carry out all the necessary settings.
3) The AP 390 DCF-77 aerial must be ordered separately.
13/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and Automation Devices
Time switches and accessories
Type
REG 373
Version
DT Order No.
REG 373 year time switches
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 373-5EY01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.481
B
5WG1 810-0EY01
1
1
030 0.431
B
5WG1 810-8EY01
1
1
030 0.023
B
5WG1 810-8EY02
1
1
030 0.021
}
5WG1 390-3EY01
1
1
030 0.169
16-channel, DCF77 connection1)
5WG1 373-5EY01
Accessories
PC programming sets
With OBELISK memory card
5WG1 810-0EY01
OBELISK 4K
EEPROM memory modules
OBELISK 64K
EEPROM memory modules
5WG1 810-8EY01
AP 390
AP 390 DCF-77 aerials
5WG1 390-3EY01
1)
During configuration, the installation engineer needs to carry out all the necessary settings.
13
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
13/7
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and Automation Devices
Programmable logic controllers
■ Technical specifications
Type
Basic modules
Expansion modules
LOGO!
230RC
LOGO!
12/24RC
LOGO!DM8
230R
LOGO! DM8 LOGO! AM2
12/24R
---
---
✔
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
4 MW
✔
--
For voltage input
(with common ground (N) or (-))
• 230 V
• 12/24 V
LOGO! AM2
Pt100
LOGO! AM2
AQ
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
2 MW
2 MW
2 MW
36
2 MW
55
36
2 MW
55
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
8
--
4
--
--
--
--
--
8
--
4
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
-50 ... +200
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2
4
4
4
4
--
--
--
230
10
230
10
230
5
230
5
---
---
---
Enclosure data
Can be used for LOGO! 230RC
Can be used for LOGO! 12/24RC
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH 35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Dimensions
• Height
• Width
• Depth
mm
mm 4 MW
mm
Power supply
Power supply 115 ... 230 V AC/DC
Power supply 12 ... 24 V DC
Inputs
Pushbutton inputs
Control inputs
Analog inputs ( 0 ... 10 V or 0 ... 20 mA)
Sensor inputs
PT100 temperature sensor input
Measuring range
°C
Outputs
Control outputs
Analog output ( 0 ... 10 V)
Load output
Floating relay contact
Rated contact voltage, AC
Rated contact current
V
A
For weather sensors, see chapter "Physical Sensors".
13
13/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and Automation Devices
Programmable logic controllers
Type
Description
LOGO!/KNX communication modules
• For connection of LOGO! to KNX, as slave module for the
LOGO! logic module (12 V/24 V or 115 V/240 V) and as
bus device on KNX
• For linking transmitted KNX data points and LOGO! inputs and
outputs over logic and timer functions through LOGO!
• For the linking and transmitting over KNX of up to
- 8 binary inputs and 4 binary outputs of LOGO!
- 16 virtual KNX binary inputs
- 12 virtual KNX binary outputs
- 8 virtual KNX analog inputs
- 2 virtual KNX analog outputs
• Transmission of date and time of the LOGO! realtime clock
over KNX
• Two LEDs for the display of the communication status of
LOGO! and KNX
• Electronics powered over an external power supply unit for
24 V AC/DC, 25 mA
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection over screw terminals
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width: 2 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
LOGO! 230RC, LOGO! 12/24RC, LOGO!DM8 230R,
LOGO! DM8 12/24R, LOGO! AM2, LOGO! AM2 Pt100,
LOGO! AM2 AQ
• Degree of protection IP20
• Interference suppression to limit class B
• Certified to UL, CSA, FM, C-Tick
• Standards: VDE 0631, IEC1131
• Approvals: CE, ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, PRS
• Ambient temperature 0 ... +55 °C
LOGO! Power 12 V/1.9 A
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controlled power supply 12 V DC/1.9 A
Designed for use on single-phase AC systems
Nominal input voltage 100 - 240 V AC, long-range
Input voltage range 85 ... 264 V AC
Efficiency during operation at rated value typ. 80 %
Nominal output voltage 12 V DC,
setting range 10.5 ... 16.1 V
• Tolerance +/-3 %, residual ripple < 200 mVss
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Nominal output current 1.9 A
Ambient temperature -20 ... 55 °C
Safety class II, degree of protection IP20
Electrical isolation SELV acc. to EN 60950 and EN 50178
Interference suppression class B acc. to EN 55022
Certified to CE, UL/cUL, FM
Ship building approval GL, ABS
Width: 3 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ambient temperature -20 ... 55 °C
Safety class II, degree of protection IP20
Electrical isolation SELV acc. to EN 60950 and EN 50178
Interference suppression class B acc. to EN 55022
Certified to CE, UL/cUL, FM
Ship building approval GL, ABS.
Width: 3 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
LOGO! Power 24 V/1.3 A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controlled power supply 24 V DC/1.3 A
Designed for use on single-phase AC systems
Nominal input voltage 100 ... 240 V AC, long-range
Input voltage range 85 ... 264 V AC
Efficiency during operation at rated value typ. 82 %
Nominal output voltage 24 V DC
Tolerance +/- 3 %, residual ripple < 200 mVss
Nominal output current 1.3 A
LOGO! Power PC cables
For the transmission of programs from PC to LOGO! and vice
versa, PC connection over serial interface (RS232 socket).
13
LOGO! Soft Comfort 5.0
Convenient programming software available in several languages,
drag & drop program creation, simulation, comprehensive program
documentation, Windows 98SE or higher, Linux, MAC OSX.
LOGO! memory cards
For archiving, duplication, sending of switching programs and
transfer of a new or modified program to LOGO!, with copy and
password protection.
LOGO! English manuals
Detailed information on operation and application.
LOGO! German manuals
Detailed information on operation and application.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
13/9
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and Automation Devices
Programmable logic controllers
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
230RC
LOGO! 230RC
A
12/24RC
LOGO! 12/24RC
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
6ED1 052-1FB00-0BA5
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
200 0.232
A
6ED1 052-1MD00-0BA5
1
1
200 0.228
DM8 230R LOGO! DM8 230R
A
6ED1 055-1FB00-0BA1
1
1
200 0.159
DM8
12/24R
LOGO! DM8 12/24R
A
6ED1 055-1MB00-0BA1
1
1
200 0.157
AM2
LOGO! AM2
A
6ED1 055-1MA00-0BA0
1
1
200 0.119
A
6ED1 055-1MD00-0BA0
1
1
200 0.120
6ED1 052-1FB00-0BA5
6ED1 052-1MD00-0BA5
6ED1 055-1FB00-0BA1
13
6ED1 055-1MB00-0BA1
6ED1 055-1MA00-0BA0
AM2 Pt100 LOGO! AM2 Pt100
6ED1 055-1MD00-0BA0
13/10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and Automation Devices
Programmable logic controllers
Type
Version
DT Order No.
AM2 AQ
LOGO! AM2 AQ
A
LOGO! Power 12 V/1.9 A
LOGO! Power 24 V/1.3 A
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
6ED1 055-1MM00-0BA0
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
200 0.120
}
6EP1 321-1SH02
1
1
401 0.170
}
6EP1 331-1SH02
1
1
401 0.170
LOGO!/KNX communication modules
B
6BK1700-0BA00-0AA1
1
1
475 0.107
LOGO! PC cables
A
6ED1 057-1AA00-0BA0
1
1
200 0.176
LOGO! German manuals
A
6ED1 050-1AA00-0BE6
1
1
2A0 0.401
LOGO! English manuals
A
6ED1 050-1AA00-0AE6
1
1
2A0 0.450
LOGO! Soft Comfort 5.0
A
6ED1 058-0BA01-0YA0
1
1
2A0 0.099
LOGO! memory cards
A
6ED1 056-5CA00-0BA0
1
1
200 0.004
6ED1 055-1MM00-0BA0
6EP1 321-1SH02
6BK1700-0BA00-0AA1
6ED1 057-1AA00-0BA0
6ED1 050-1AA00-0BE6
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
13/11
13
© Siemens AG 2008
Control and Automation Devices
Notes
13
7
13/12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
14
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
14/2
Introduction
14/3
Bus coupling units and
accessories
14/9
Power supply units
14/10
Reactors
14/11
Line couplers
14/14
Network gateways
14
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
14
14/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Bus coupling units and
accessories
The bus coupling unit connects the operator interfaces
to the GAMMA instabus.
14/3
Power supply units
The extra-low voltage required for the GAMMA instabus 14/9
is provided over an integrated reactor.
Reactors
For using the unchoked voltage of an KNX power supply 14/10
unit for a further bus line.
Line couplers
Ensuring fault-free communication between two bus
lines.
Network gateways
For connecting bus lines to other devices and PCs over 14/14
fast data networks.
14/11
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Bus coupling units and accessories
■ Technical specifications
UP 114/02 UP 117/11 UP 110/03 UP 110/11 UP 116
UP 116/11 UP 116/21 UP 116/31
Enclosure data
✔
For installation in flush-mounting
switch and socket boxes with
∅ = 60 mm and depth = 60 mm
For mounting rockers from the DELTA
-product ranges
✔
10-pole peripheral external interface
(PEI) for plugging onto a bus terminal
10-pole BTI socket connector
-(BTI - Bus Transceiver Interface)
for plugging on a bus terminal
Dimensions
• Height
mm 71
• Width
mm 71
• Depth
mm 16
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
--
--
71
71
16
71
71
27
71
71
19/32
71
71
32
71
71
32
71
71
32
71
71
32
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mounting type
Claw fixing
Screw fixing
Display/control elements
LED for status indication
LED for orientation light
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection via bus terminal
For selection and ordering data, see page 14/4.
Type
Description
Accessories
Mounting brackets for UP 110/11
• In order to use antitheft screws with bus terminals, such as
pushbuttons, room temperature controllers etc., on UP 110/11
bus coupling units, 2 mounting brackets per bus coupling unit
are required.
UP 196
UP 196 paint covers
• For the protection of already installed flush-mounting bus
coupling units, DELTA bus coupling units or flush-mounting
actuators with peripheral external interface (PEI) through to the
mounting of bus terminals.
14
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
14/3
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Bus coupling units and accessories
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
UP 114/02 UP 114/02 bus coupling units
Mounting depth 16 mm, with BCU2
}
5WG1 114-2AB02
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.060
UP 117/11 Bus transceiver modules Plus UP 117/11
Mounting depth 16 mm
}
5WG1 117-2AB11
1
1
030 0.042
UP 110/03 UP 110/03 bus coupling units
Mounting depth 27 mm, with BCU1
}
5WG1 110-2AB03
1
1
030 0.060
UP 110/11 UP 110/11 bus coupling units1)
Mounting depth 19 mm, with BCU1
}
5WG1 110-2AB11
1
1
030 0.066
Accessories
Mounting brackets for UP 110/11
B
5WG1 294-8AB01
1
10
030 0.008
UP 196 paint covers
B
5WG1 196-2AB01
1
10
030 0.003
5WG1 114-2AB02
5WG1 117-2AB11
5WG1 110-2AB03
5WG1 110-2AB11
14
5WG1 294-8AB01
UP 196
5WG1 196-2AB01
1) The 5WG1 294-8AB01 mounting brackets for using the antitheft screws of bus terminals, must be ordered separately.
14/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Bus coupling units and accessories
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA bus coupling units
UP 116
DELTA UP 116 bus coupling units1)
Single
• Intermediate position
• Pushbutton position
}
}
5WG1 116-2AB01
5WG1 116-2AB21
1
1
1
1
030 0.080
030 0.080
}
}
5WG1 116-2AB11
5WG1 116-2AB31
1
1
1
1
030 0.080
030 0.080
5WG1 116-2AB01
UP 116
DELTA UP 116 bus coupling units1)
Double
• Intermediate position
• Pushbutton position
5WG1 116-2AB11
1)
The required single or multiple rocker (with or without window) and the frame in matching DELTA design (see Catalog ET D1) must be ordered separately.
14
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
14/5
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Bus coupling units and accessories
Operator interfaces without intermediate frame
A
F
B
K
C
B
UP 110/03 without claw
UP 114 without claw
I
F
A
D
D
B
K
B
UP 110/11 with claw
I
F
I2_08160e
A
B
C
D
F
14
14/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Bus coupling unit
Screw fixing
DELTA frame
Antitheft screw
DELTA KNX EIB pushbutton,
single, double, quadruple (+ IR)
I Claw fixing
K With peripheral external
interface (PEI)
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Bus coupling units and accessories
Operator interfaces with intermediate frame
A
C
B
K
L
G
B
UP 110/03 without claw
UP 114 without claw
G
D
D
A
H
H
K
B
G
D
D
B
UP 110/11 with claw I
G
A
B
C
D
G
H
I2_08161e
I
I
K
L
Bus coupling unit
Screw fixing
DELTA frame
Antitheft screw
DELTA KNX EIB multifunctional
sensors, central antitheft screw
fastening
Mounting bracket
5WG1 294-8AB01 for antitheft screw
Claw fixing
With peripheral external interface (PEI)
Intermediate frame
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
14/7
14
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Bus coupling units and accessories
Operator interfaces with DELTA bus coupling unit
I
A
B
C
E
K
B
I2_08159b
DELTA UP 116
with claw I
14
14/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
A
B
C
E
I
K
E
Bus coupling unit
Screw fixing
DELTA frame
DELTA pushbutton/rocker, single, double
Claw fixing
Without peripheral external
interface (PEI)
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Power supply units
■ Technical specifications
N 125
N 125/11
N 125/21
✔
✔
✔
4 MW
4 MW
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Enclosure data
Modular installation devices for
mounting on TH35 EN 60715
mounting rail
Dimensions
• Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
mm 4 MW
Bus connection
Integrated reactors
Bus connection over contact system
to data rail
Bus connection via bus terminal
Outputs
Rated operational voltage, AC
Output voltage, DC
Output current
Additional unchoked output for 29 V DC,
for powering a second bus line over
an external reactor
V
120 ... 230 120 ... 230 120 ... 230
V
29
29
29
mA 160
320
640
--
--
✔
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
N 125
N 125 power supply units
Integrated reactors, 160 mA
}
N 125/11
N 125/11 power supply units
Integrated reactors, 320 mA
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 125-1AB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.240
5WG1 125-1AB11
1
1
5WG1 125-1AB01
030 0.230
14
5WG1 125-1AB11
N 125/21
N 125/21 power supply units
Integrated reactors, 640 mA,
additional unchoked output, 29 V DC
}
5WG1 125-1AB21
1
1
030 0.240
5WG1 125-1AB21
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
14/9
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Reactors
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
N 120/02
N 120/02 reactors1)
• For operation with an KNX power supply unit without integrated
reactor (e.g. N 123) or for connection to the unchoked output of
the KNX N 125/21 power supply unit, 640 mA
• Contact system for data rail
1)
• Low-voltage terminal for unchoked voltage and bus
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width: 2 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
The reactor prevents the data telegrams from short-circuiting through a bus power supply without integrated reactor.
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
N 120/02
N 120/02 reactors
DT Order No.
u
}
Price
per PU
5WG1 120-1AB02
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.105
640 mA
5WG1 120-1AB02
14
14/10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Line couplers
■ Overview
Classic topology
In the classic topology, all the line and
backbone couplers are traditionally
KNX couplers.
N 140 line/backbone couplers
for backbone and line connection
1.5.0
2.5.0
Level 5
LK
1.4.0
2.4.0
Level 4
1.3.0
Line 1.3
LK
1.2.0
Line 1.2
Main line 1.0
LK
Level 3
2.2.0
Line 2.2
2.1.0
Level 1
LK
BK
Backbone
line 0.
1.0.0
Line 2.1
LK
KNX
Area 1
(West wing)
Line 2.3
LK
LK
1.1.0
Line 1.1
2.3.0
Level 2
LK
Line 2.4
LK
Main line 2.0
Line 1.4
This topology is tried and tested and is
widely deployed. The bus cable
lengths are generally limited to a single
building.
Line 2.5
LK
I2_14029
Line 1.5
Area 2
(East wing)
BK
2.0.0
Modern topology
In this modern topology, the backbone
couplers are replaced by N146 IP routers.
N 146 IP router as backbone coupler
1.5.0
2.5.0
Level 5
LK
1.4.0
2.4.0
Level 4
1.3.0
Line 1.3
LK
1.2.0
Line 1.2
Main line 1.0
LK
Level 3
2.2.0
Line 2.2
2.1.0
Level 1
LK
1.0.0
Line 2.1
LK
KNX
Area 1
(West wing)
Other media, such as optical fiber cables
or W-LAN, can also be used to couple
separate building and for the exchange
of group address telegrams.
Line 2.3
LK
LK
1.1.0
Line 1.1
2.3.0
Level 2
LK
Line 2.4
LK
Main line 2.0
Line 1.4
In this case (for example), due to the
use of standard network components,
the linking of 2 building sections is no
longer restricted by the lengths of the
bus cable.
Line 2.5
LK
I2_14027
Line 1.5
Area 2
(East wing)
Data network
(LAN)
14
2.0.0
Innovative topology
In this innovative topology all line
couplers are replaced by
N 146 IP routers.
N 146 IP router as line coupler
1.5.0
LK
2.5.0
Level 5
1.4.0
Line 1.4
LK
2.4.0
Level 4
1.3.0
Line 1.3
LK
1.2.0
Line 1.2
LK
LK
KNX
Area 1
(West wing)
Line 2.3
LK
2.2.0
Level 2
1.1.0
Line 1.1
Line 2.4
LK
2.3.0
Level 3
Data network
(LAN)
Furthermore, the correct configuration
of the N 146 IP router makes the
commissioning of both large projects
and smaller individual projects quicker
and easier to manage.
Line 2.2
LK
2.1.0
Level 1
Backbone couplers are no longer
required. This configuration enables
the linking of each individual building
level over Ethernet (LAN) and through
the utilization of existing LAN networks.
Line 2.5
LK
Line 2.1
LK
I2_14028
Line 1.5
Area 2
(East wing)
An exchange of group address
telegrams is still possible even if
projects are broken down into
individual projects, see chapter
"Application Examples".
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
14/11
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Line couplers
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
N 140/03
N140/13
N 140/03, N140/13 line/backbone couplers1)
• For data exchange between two KNX bus lines with telegrams
of up to 64 byte
• For use as line coupler for connecting a line to the main line or
as backbone coupler for connecting a main line to the
backbone line or as repeater for connecting two segments of
the same line, with electrical isolation of the two bus lines
• Loadable filter table for control of the data exchange between
the two bus lines
• Additional loadable filter table for telegrams with LTE addressing
• Detection of a communication fault on the lower-level line and
signaling to the higher-level line
• 3 LEDs for display of availability and receipt of a telegram per line
• Power supply from the main line
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
N 146
N 140/03 line/backbone couplers
• With bus connection to the line via contact system for
data rail and to the main line via bus terminal
• Width: 1 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
N 140/13 line/backbone couplers
• Bus connection to the line and to the main line via
bus terminal
• Width: 2 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
N 146 IP routers2)3)
• For data exchange between two KNX bus lines with telegrams
of up to 64 byte
• For interconnection of bus lines or bus areas over a fast data
network (Ethernet 10BaseT) with Internet protocol (IP)
• Can be used as line, area or network gateway (worlds gateway)
• Loadable filter table for control of the data exchange between
the two bus lines
• Additional loadable filter table for telegrams with LTE addressing
• Detection of a communication fault on the lower-level line and
signaling to the higher-level line
• For communication between KNX devices and PCs and in
conjunction with a LAN modem for remote access to an
KNX installation
1)
• Uses the KNXnet/IP protocol
• Assignment of the network parameters by the installation
engineer using ETS or automatically by a DHCP service in
the network
• 5 LEDs for indicating that the device is ready-to-run,
KNX communication, IP communication
• Electronics powered over an external power supply unit for
12 ... 30 V
• Plug-in terminal block for the connection of an external
power supply unit
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection via bus terminal
• Ethernet connection over RJ45 socket
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width: 2 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
As far as the hardware is concerned, there is no difference between line coupler, backbone coupler or repeater. They therefore have the same order number.
The function of the device is set during commissioning with the ETS.
2) During configuration of the IP interface, the installation engineer should carry out all the necessary settings; the network parameters can be assigned either
by the installation engineer over the ETS or automatically by a DHCP service in the network.
3)
The N 146 IP router can only function smoothly as a line coupler (KNXnet/IP routing) if it is equipped with network components that support IP multicasting.
In particular, network/LAN routers must support or be configured so that they can relay IP multicast datagrams. The IP multicast address 224.0.23.12 is
reserved internationally for KNXnet/IP routing.
For selection and ordering data, see page 14/13.
14
14/12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Line couplers
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
N 140/03
N 140/03 line/backbone couplers
}
N 140/13
N 140/13 line/backbone couplers
N 146
N 146 IP routers
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 140-1AB03
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.060
}
5WG1 140-1AB13
1
1
030 0.085
}
5WG1 146-1AB01
1
1
030 0.126
5WG1 140-1AB03
5WG1 140-1AB13
5WG1 146-1AB01
14
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
14/13
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Network gateways
■ Technical specifications
Type
N 146
N 148/21
N 350E
N 151
N
N
N
N
✔
✔
✔
✔
2 MW
2 MW
4 MW
4 MW
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
✔
--
12 ... 30
12 ... 30
12 ... 30
12 ... 30
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
✔
✔
✔
Enclosure data
Design
Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
Width (1 MW = 18 mm)
Display/control elements
LEDs for indicating that the device is ready-to-run,
KNX communication, IP communication
LCD
Power supply
Electronics powered over an external
AC/DC power supply unit
V
Bus connection
Integrated bus coupling units
Bus connection via bus terminal
Mains connection
Ethernet connection over RJ45 socket
Plug-in terminal block for the connection of an
external power supply unit
Gateway
Uses the KNXnet/IP protocol
Line coupler function
Interface for visualization
For selection and ordering data, see page 14/15.
14
14/14
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Network gateways
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
N 148/21
N 148/21 IP interfaces
N 146
DT Order No.
}
5WG1 148-1AB21
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.126
N 146 IP routers
}
5WG1 146-1AB01
1
1
030 0.126
N 350E
N 350E IP controllers1)
30 logic gates, 200 event entries,
weekly scheduling program,
integrated IP interface
}
5WG1 350-1EB01
1
1
030 0.184
N 151
N 151 IP viewers
A
5WG1 151-1AB01
1
1
030 0.150
u
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 148-1AB21
5WG1 146-1AB01
5WG1 350-1EB01
5WG1 151-1AB01
1) The software required for parameter assignment over the Ethernet interface is available on CD-ROM and is included in delivery.
14
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
14/15
© Siemens AG 2008
System Products
Notes
14
7
14/16
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
15
© Siemens AG 2008
System Accessories
15/2
Introduction
15/3
Cover strips
15/3
Bus terminals
15/4
Connectors
15/5
Data rails
15/6
Overvoltage protection
15
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
System Accessories
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
15
15/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Cover strips
For snapping onto free data rail segments for enhanced safety.
15/3
Bus terminals
The bus terminal connects bus devices to the bus cable 15/3
and enables the looping through of cables.
Connectors
Connects data rail and bus cable.
15/4
Data rails
For connecting modular installation devices over their
contact system.
15/5
Overvoltage protection
For the overvoltage fine protection of bus devices.
15/6
© Siemens AG 2008
System Accessories
Cover strips
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
192
192 cover strips
For standard mounting rails
• For covering free data rail segments (in accordance
with the SELV regulations for safety extra-low voltage)
• For snapping onto standard mounting rails, separable,
RAL 7035
• Length: 13.5 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
192
192 cover strips
For standard mounting rails, length 242 mm
X
Price
per PU
5WG1 192-8AA01
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
5
030 0.014
5WG1 192-8AA01
Bus terminals
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
193
193 bus terminals
• For connection of bus devices to the bus cable
• For connection of up to 4 bus cables
• Comprising two engaged clamp parts + (red) and - (dark gray),
each with 4 screwless plug-in terminals per clamp part for solid
conductors, ∅ 0.6 mm ... 0.8 mm
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 12.4 x 10 x 10 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
193
Version
DT Order No.
193 bus terminals
}
5WG1 193-8AB01
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
25
030 0.002
2-pole, 4 plug-in connections, red/dark gray
5WG1 193-8AB01
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
15/3
15
© Siemens AG 2008
System Accessories
Connectors
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
REG
191/01
REG 191/01 connectors
Double
Flat connectors for fitting beneath distribution board covers. For
connection of data rail and bus cable. Up to eight bus cables
can be connected over two 193 bus terminals (must be ordered
separately).
Width: 1 MW (1 MW = 18 mm).
REG
191/11
REG 191/11 connectors
2 × double
Same as REG 191/01 connector, but with two additional
connections for two low-voltage terminals (must be ordered
separately). This allows the unchoked voltage to be taken
from the data rail.
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
REG
191/01
REG 191/01 connectors (to be discontinued)
Double
u
}
REG
191/11
REG 191/11 connectors (to be discontinued)
2 × double
u
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG1 191-5AB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.045
5WG1 191-5AB11
1
1
030 0.045
5WG1 191-5AB01
15
15/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
System Accessories
Data rails
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
190/_1
190/_1 data rails
Without connector for TH 35-7.5 standard mounting rail, flat
• For sticking (self-adhesive) in an EN 60715, TH35-7.5 flat
standard mounting rail
190/_2
• For interconnecting modular installation devices over their
contact system
190/_2 data rails
With connector for TH 35-7.5 standard mounting rail, flat
• For sticking (self-adhesive) in an EN 60715, TH35-7.5 flat
standard mounting rail
• 2 bus terminals (red/dark gray) for bus voltage
• 2 low-voltage terminals (white/yellow) for unchoked voltage
190/_3
• For interconnecting modular installation devices over their
contact system
• For connecting data rails to each other and to a bus cable
190/_3 data rails
Without connector for TH 35-15 standard mounting rail, deep
• For sticking (self-adhesive) in an EN 60715, TH35-15 standard
mounting rail, deep, mounting rail size 24 mm
190/_4
• For interconnecting modular installation devices over their
contact system
190/_4 data rails
With connector for TH 35-15 standard mounting rail, deep
• For sticking (self-adhesive) in an EN 60715, TH35-15 standard
mounting rail, deep, mounting rail size 24 mm
• 2 bus terminals (red/dark gray) for bus voltage
• 2 low-voltage terminals (white/yellow) for unchoked voltage
• For interconnecting modular installation devices over their
contact system
• For connecting data rails to each other and to a bus cable
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Data rails for TH35-7.5 standard mounting rails
190/_1
5WG1 190-8AB01
190/_2
5WG1 190-8AB02
190/_1 data rails
Without connector for TH 35-7.5 standard mounting rail, flat
• Length: 214 mm (for max. 12 MW)
• Length: 243 mm (for max. 14 MW)
• Length: 277 mm (for max. 16 MW)
}
B
B
5WG1 190-8AB01
5WG1 190-8AB11
5WG1 190-8AB21
1
1
1
5
5
5
030 0.017
030 0.020
030 0.023
• Length: 324 mm (for max. 18 MW)
• Length: 428 mm (for max. 24 MW)
• Length: 464 mm (for max. 26 MW)
B
B
B
5WG1 190-8AB31
5WG1 190-8AB41
5WG1 190-8AB51
1
1
1
5
5
5
030 0.026
030 0.032
030 0.037
190/_2 data rails
With connector for TH 35-7.5 standard mounting rail, flat
• Length: 214 mm (for max. 12 MW)
• Length: 243 mm (for max. 14 MW)
• Length: 277 mm (for max. 16 MW)
}
B
B
5WG1 190-8AB02
5WG1 190-8AB12
5WG1 190-8AB22
1
1
1
5
5
5
030 0.193
030 0.205
030 0.050
• Length: 324 mm (for max. 18 MW)
• Length: 428 mm (for max. 24 MW)
• Length: 464 mm (for max. 26 MW)
B
B
B
5WG1 190-8AB32
5WG1 190-8AB42
5WG1 190-8AB52
1
1
1
5
5
5
030 0.050
030 0.050
030 0.318
Data rails for TH35-15 standard mounting rails, mounting rail size 24 mm
190/_3
5WG1 190-8AB03
190/_4
5WG1 190-8AB04
190/_3 data rails
Without connector for TH 35-15 standard mounting rail, deep
• Length: 214 mm (for max. 12 MW)
• Length: 243 mm (for max. 14 MW)
• Length: 277 mm (for max. 16 MW)
}
B
B
5WG1 190-8AB03
5WG1 190-8AB13
5WG1 190-8AB23
1
1
1
5
5
5
030 0.027
030 0.032
030 0.025
• Length: 324 mm (for max. 18 MW)
• Length: 428 mm (for max. 24 MW)
• Length: 464 mm (for max. 26 MW)
B
B
B
5WG1 190-8AB33
5WG1 190-8AB43
5WG1 190-8AB53
1
1
1
5
5
5
030 0.037
030 0.048
030 0.051
190/_4 data rails
With connector for TH 35-15 standard mounting rail, deep
• Length: 214 mm (for max. 12 MW)
• Length: 243 mm (for max. 14 MW)
• Length: 277 mm (for max. 16 MW)
}
B
B
5WG1 190-8AB04
5WG1 190-8AB14
5WG1 190-8AB24
1
1
1
5
5
5
030 0.330
030 0.360
030 0.395
• Length: 324 mm (for max. 18 MW)
• Length: 428 mm (for max. 24 MW)
• Length: 464 mm (for max. 26 MW)
B
B
B
5WG1 190-8AB34
5WG1 190-8AB44
5WG1 190-8AB54
1
1
1
5
5
5
030 0.490
030 0.585
030 0.620
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
15/5
15
© Siemens AG 2008
System Accessories
Overvoltage protection
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
190
190 overvoltage protection, fine protection for bus devices
• For the overvoltage fine protection of bus devices
• For inserting in a bus device instead of a 193 bus terminal or for
direct connection to a bus terminal
• For surge protection through connection of the yellow/green
ground conductor to the next grounding point
• 2 socket contacts (1 mm ∅) for insertion in bus devices
• 2 solid wires (0.8 mm ∅) for connection to the bus terminal
•
•
•
•
•
•
1 solid wire (0.75 mm2) for surge protection
Rated voltage 24 V DC
Rated current 6 A
Rated discharge surge current 5 kA
Protection level 350 V
Dimensions (H x W x D): 10.5 x 11.6 x 11.1 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
190
190 overvoltage protection
Fine protection for bus devices
B
Price
per PU
5WG1 190-8AD01
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.010
5WG1 190-8AD01
15
7
15/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
16
© Siemens AG 2008
Counters
16/2
Introduction
16/3
Operating hours/pulse counters
16/4
Counters for electrical energy
16
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Counters
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
16
16/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Operating hours/
pulse counters
This counter can be used to measure binary switching
information and monitor limit values.
16/3
Counters for electrical energy
Overview of electrical energy consumption at a glance.
16/4
© Siemens AG 2008
Counters
Operating hours/pulse counters
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
N 343
N 343 operating hours and switching operations counters
• Recording of operating hours and counting of switching operations for up to 36 sensor/actuator channels with 1- bit switching
objects
• Limit values for all count values
• Indication output over the bus if the current value exceeds or falls
below these limits, with option for monitoring the switching telegrams for all configured channels or cyclic interrogation of the
states
• To-the-second precision recording of operating hours of a channel through evaluation of the ON period
• Incrementation of the switching operations counter when switching from OFF to ON
• Option for querying all counting and limit values during runtime
and setting each to a new user-definable value
• Recording of operating hours with a maximum runtime of approx.
136 years
• Counts a maximum of 4.3 billion switching operations per channel
• Electronics powered over bus voltage
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection over contact system to data rail
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width: 1 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
N 343
N 343 operating hours and switching operations B
counters
36 channels
u
5WG1 343-1AB01
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/
PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s) Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.092
5WG1 343-1AB01
16
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
16/3
© Siemens AG 2008
Counters
Counters for electrical energy
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
N 162
N 165
N 162, N 165 E-counters
• For measuring the import of electrical energy in kWh in 1- and
3-phase systems
• PTB calibrated
• Accuracy class 2
• Short-circuit resistant S0 pulse output
• 3-/4 conductor connection
• LCD for display of active energy, price per kWh, total costs,
reactive energy, current active power (total per phase), device
number
• Manual readout over the built-in LCD
• Readout of data via IR data interface
• Reading/sending of data over the bus
• Screw terminals for connection of L1, L2, L3, N and
S0 pulse output
• Electronics powered over an integrated power supply unit for
230/400 V AC
• Integrated bus coupling units
• Bus connection via bus terminal
• Modular installation devices for mounting on
TH35 EN 60715 mounting rail
• Width: 6 MW (1 MW = 18 mm)
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
N 162
N 162 E-counters
B
N 165
With direct connection to 230 V AC up to 63 A
N 165 E-counters
B
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/
PG
P. unit
7KT1 162
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s) Unit(s)
kg
1
1
027 0.450
7KT1 165
1
1
027 0.390
With transformer connection 5(6) A
7KT1 162
16
7
16/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
17
17/2
Introduction
17/6
17/7
17/10
17/11
Display, Operation
Introduction
Pushbuttons
Pushbutton accessories
Remote controls
17/12
17/13
17/15
Output Devices
Introduction
Binary output devices
Socket outlet switches
17/16
Input Devices
Binary input devices
17/21
Devices for Special Applications
Introduction
Lighting
Sun protection, anti-glare protection,
utilization of daylight
Safety
17/23
17/24
17/25
Gateways, Interface Converters
Introduction
KNX/KNX radio
EnOcean/KNX radio
17/26
17/27
17/29
System Products
Introduction
Transmitters, receivers
Repeaters
17/17
17/18
17/19
17
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
Application
17
17/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Page
Display, operation
Here you can find all you need to know about the display 17/6
and operator devices of GAMMA wave.
Output devices
Whether binary output devices or socket outlet switches, 17/12
this section covers every aspect of output devices.
Input devices
Electrical operating states are recorded and any
changes transmitted over bus.
17/16
Devices for special applications
Whether for lighting, safety or sun/anti-glare protection,
here you will find everything you need.
17/17
Gateways, interface converters
Gateways ensure communication within the system,
as well as with other systems.
17/23
System products
Transmitters, receivers and repeaters round off the
GAMMA wave system.
17/26
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Introduction
GAMMA wave and Synco living in combination
1
The Synco living central apartment unit
Heart and brain of the system. This unit
offers simple control and monitoring of
the functions of up to 12 rooms on a
single display.
2
The Synco living room unit
Measures room temperature and allows settings
entered in the central apartment unit, such as
temperature and operating parameters, to be
adjusted for individual rooms. The comfort mode
can be extended by a simple push of the button.
3
The Synco living heater control actuator
Measures room temperature - wirelessly receives the
preset temperature for the respective room from the
central apartment unit and regulates the room
temperature by adjusting the heater valve. It can also
regulate up to 5 further heaters per room, thus
ensuring an even temperature between the radiators.
4
The Synco living room temperature sensor
Measures the room temperature and wirelessly
communicates this to the central apartment unit.
5
The Synco living heating circuit controller
Compares the actual and set values wirelessly transmitted by the central apartment unit and regulates the required temperature by adjusting the valve settings. Two heating circuit
controllers are available for either 2 or 8 heating circuits.
6
DELTA reflex smoke detector
Immediately detects the smoke emitted by fires and
signals the alarm. Wirelessly transmits the alarm to
the Synco living central apartment unit. The central
apartment unit can then transmit the alarm to one or
more recipients via SMS, pager or email.
7
The GAMMA wave radio integration system for
light and blinds
All GAMMA wave products can be integrated. This
allows quick and convenient control of your light and
blinds, either centrally, locally from individual rooms,
or as a preset scene. It goes without saying that
GAMMA wave components can also
be automated e.g. via switching
programs or using your simulated
presence settings.
8
The GAMMA wave door/window contact
Monitors windows, doors and gates, etc. and
transmits relevant data to the central apartment
unit, e.g. if an oil tank is running low. In the
event of any deviation from preset values you
can program the system to signal you in a variety
of ways. High comfort, low energy.
You will find more information on Synco living
at: http://www.siemens.com/syncoliving
6
8
2
3
7
7
1
4
17
5
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/3
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Introduction
GAMMA wave – the multifunctional system
Enjoy all the advantages of a modern building management
system without the need for additional cable installation – the
new GAMMA wave radio system makes it possible.
Sensors, actuators, etc, do not require any additional cable
installation. This means that this type of radio transmission is
particularly suitable for renovation work, the expansion of
existing systems and all types of new installations. And all
complete with absolutely failsafe and problem-free transmission.
Furthermore:
GAMMA wave is a unique bi-directional radio system – this
means that the products and components can be both
transmitter and receiver.
And:
GAMMA wave is based on the new, uniform standard for building
management systems; KNX in the 868 MHz range.
Services
Services offered through third parties.
Consumption data acquisition and emergency call systems
Products of other Siemens ranges or other manufacturers on the
basis of KNX standards.
KNX
GE 561/01
switch actuator
GE 520
shutter/blind
actuator
UP 140
coupler
5TC1 290
DELTA Reflex
smoke detector
5TC1 233
switch
insert
5TC1 231
shutter/blind
control
UP 210 wave
pushbutton
Light
Light
UP 211 wave
pushbutton
Shutter/blind
Shutter/blind
wave UNI M 255
smoke detector
module
UP 110
wall-mounted transmitter
battery link
KNX
S 425
hand-held transmitter
instabus
pushbutton
AP 250
window contact
QAX910
central apartment unit
I2_16005
QAC910
Meteo sensor
17
RRV918 / RRV912
heating circuit controllers
QAA910
room temperature
sensor
Due to its implementation of future-pointing technology, the
"wave" device range is ideally suited for the retrofitting and
modification of room control functions in existing buildings.
These products offer simple installation and commissioning,
thus enabling the wireless remote control of switching, dimming
and shutter/blind/scene functions.
The system operates in the 868 MHz fail-safe frequency band
that is reserved for safety and system applications. A sensor can
control an unlimited number of actuators within its range (e.g.
closed residential unit).
As well as the wave pushbutton for lighting control, the product
range includes the wave shutter/blind pushbuttons for shutter/
blind control as well as a range of wall-mounted transmitters,
hand-held transmitters, door/window contacts and smoke
detectors.
The wave pushbuttons and wave shutter/blind pushbuttons
must be used in combination with universal dimmer sys inserts,
switch sys inserts or shutter/blind control sys inserts. This
enables the local operation and remote control of the inserts
located beneath the pushbuttons, as well as the remote control
of additional universal dimmer, switch dimmer or shutter/blind
control inserts linked over KNX radio.
17/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
SSA955 heater control
actuator
Single or double instabus pushbuttons are snapped onto wave
wall-mounted transmitters as operator interfaces. In accordance
with their intended purpose, pushbutton rockers enable the
remote control of universal dimmer sys inserts, switch sys inserts
or shutter/blind control sys inserts, which are equipped with
wave pushbuttons or wave shutter/blind pushbuttons.
The device contact units are fitted with fixing claws and have a
maximum mounting depth of 32 mm. This greatly facilitates
mounting standard flush-mounting switch boxes.
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Introduction
GAMMA wave flush-mounting combinations
sys pushbuttons1)
Operator interfaces
UP 210 wave
pushbuttons
sys shutter/blind
pushbuttons1)
UP 211 wave shutter/ instabus pushbuttons,
blind pushbuttons
single, double
✔
✔
---
---
---
✔
✔
----
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
Device inserts
Universal dimmer sys inserts
sys switching inserts
Shutter/blind control sys inserts
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
"Batterie" wave
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
230 V wave
UP 560 wall-mounted transmitters
"Aktor" 230 V wave
1)
✔
----
See Catalog ET D1.
Previously
After
Lighting and shutter/blind control of a conventional
installation
Lighting and shutter/blind control with GAMMA wave
("bi-directional" radio system)
Example of a conventional installation with lighting and
electrically operated shutters/blinds.
Modification of the installation for shared operation of lighting
and shutters/blinds from various operating points.
• Light (C) can only be switched with switch (A)
• Light (D) can only be switched with switch (B)
• Shutter/blind (E) can only be moved with switch (G)
• Shutter/blind (F) can only be moved with switch (H)
Replacement of conventional switch inserts (A, B) with
• Universal dimmer sys inserts
• DELTA UP 210 wave pushbuttons
Replacement of conventional shutter/blind switches (G, H) with
• Shutter/blind control sys inserts
• DELTA UP 211 wave shutter/blind pushbutton
Disadvantages
• Inflexible
• No convenience (each light must be switched individually)
With this switch you can:
• Dim lights C and D from A and/or B
• Operate shutters/blinds E and F from G and/or H.
3
4
M
C
D
E
F
For additional operation of the lights and shutters/blinds
M
• A UP 110 wall-mounted transmitter "Batterie" wave (I) with mounted
double instabus pushbutton must be installed.
3
4
Advantages
A
G
H
B
• Flexible
• Greater operational ease
• Supports group formation
• Few devices required/lower costs
• Simple and clean retrofitting - no structural alterations required
I2_08540a
3
4
I
A
M
C
D
E
F
M
3
4
H
G
B
I2_08541b
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/5
17
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Display, Operation
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
17
17/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Pushbuttons
Radio control of lighting and shutters/blinds using the
radio pushbuttons from the DELTA product ranges.
17/7
Pushbutton accessories
Surface mounting enclosure or blanking cover
plate – you choose.
17/10
Remote controls
The wave hand-held transmitter supports wireless
operation of up to 17 different room functions.
17/11
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Display, Operation
Pushbuttons
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
UP 210
UP 210 wave pushbuttons
• For local and remote operation of a sys switching insert or
universal dimmer sys insert over KNX radio
• Pushbutton rocker, single with intermediate position
• Vertical operation
• With switch over, switch over and dimming, with short and long
button press for switching over and BRIGHTER/DARKER when
dimming, with adjustable timer function with an overrun time of
1 ... 60 min
UP 211
•
•
•
•
UP 211 wave shutter/blind pushbuttons
• For local and remote operation of a shutter/blind control sys
insert over KNX radio
• Pushbutton rocker, single with intermediate position
• Vertical operation
• With short and long button press for shutter/blind control
function for UP/DOWN and adjustment of slats
AP 221/
AP 222
1 LED for indication of different operating modes
KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
Commissioning by pressing the pushbutton surface
10-pole plug for clipping onto a sys switching insert or
universal dimmer sys insert
• 24-hour automatic operation for raising and lowering of
shutters/blinds
• 1 LED for indication of different operating states
• KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
• Commissioning by pressing the pushbutton surface
• 10-pole plug for clipping onto a shutter/blind control sys insert.
EnOcean AP 221 / AP 222 wall-mounted transmitters
• Flat pushbutton rocker, single or double with intermediate
position and vertical operation
• For direct remote control of EnOcean radio actuators and
remote control of wave radio actuators and instabus actuators
over gateways
• Switch ON/OFF and over, with short and long button press for
switching ON/OFF and BRIGHTER/DARKER when dimming
i-system
Dimensions
• Height
• Width
• Depth
mm 55
mm 55
mm 13
DELTA
profil
DELTA
style
Designindependent
65
65
14
68
68
16.5
83
83
15
• Short and long button press for UP/DOWN and adjustment
of slats with the shutter/blind control function
• Commissioning by pressing the pushbutton surface
• Radio transmitter for 868 MHz, with battery-free EnOcean radio
technology, with energy generation through maintenance-free,
electrodynamic energy generator
• Floor plate for easy sticking or screwing to surfaces
GAMMA wave flush-mounting combinations
Operator interfaces
sys pushbuttons1)
UP 210 wave
pushbuttons
sys shutter/blind
pushbuttons1)
UP 211 wave shutter/ instabus pushbuttons,
single, double
blind pushbuttons
✔
✔
---
---
---
✔
✔
----
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
Device inserts
Universal dimmer sys inserts
sys switching inserts
Shutter/blind control sys inserts
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
"Batterie" wave
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
230 V wave
UP 560 wall-mounted transmitters
"Aktor" 230 V wave
1)
✔
----
See Catalog ET D1.
17
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/7
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Display, Operation
Pushbuttons
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
i-system
UP 210
UP 210 wave pushbuttons1)3)
}
B
A
5WG3 210-2HB11
5WG3 210-2HB21
5WG3 210-2HB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.030
022 0.030
022 0.030
}
B
A
5WG3 211-2HB11
5WG3 211-2HB21
5WG3 211-2HB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.035
022 0.030
022 0.030
B
}
B
A
5WG3 210-2AB01
5WG3 210-2AB11
5WG3 210-2AB21
5WG3 210-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.035
0.035
0.035
0.035
B
}
B
A
5WG3 211-2AB01
5WG3 211-2AB11
5WG3 211-2AB21
5WG3 211-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.035
0.035
0.035
0.035
N
}
B
B
5WG3 210-2GB11
5WG3 210-2GB21
5WG3 210-2GB41
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.036
022 0.036
022 0.035
N
A
B
B
5WG3 211-2GB11
5WG3 211-2GB21
5WG3 211-2GB41
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.035
022 0.035
022 0.035
• Titanium white
• Carbon metallic
• Aluminum metallic
5WG3 210-2HB11
UP 211
UP 211 wave shutter/blind pushbuttons2)3)
• Titanium white
• Carbon metallic
• Aluminum metallic
5WG3 211-2HB11
DELTA profil
UP 210
UP 210 wave pushbuttons1)3)
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
5WG3 210-2AB11
UP 211
UP 211 wave shutter/blind pushbuttons2)3)
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
5WG3 211-2AB11
DELTA style
UP 210
UP 210 wave pushbuttons1)3)
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
• Platinum metallic
5WG3 210-2GB11
UP 211
17
UP 211 wave shutter/blind pushbuttons2)3)
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
• Platinum metallic
5WG3 211-2GB11
1) The sys switching insert and universal dimmer sys inserts must be ordered separately.
2) The shutter/blind control sys inserts must be ordered separately.
3) The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
17/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Display, Operation
Pushbuttons
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Design-independent
AP 221
EnOcean AP 221 wall-mounted transmitters,
single
Battery-free, flat, white
}
5WG3 221-3HB11
1
1
030 0.112
AP 222
EnOcean AP 222 wall-mounted transmitters,
double
Battery-free, flat, white
}
5WG3 222-3HB11
1
1
030 0.112
5WG3 221-3HB11
5WG3 222-3HB11
1)
The gateway EnOcean/KNX, AP 631/62 switch actuators (5WG1 631-3AL62) or GE 561/11 switch actuators (5WG3 561-4AB11) must be ordered separately.
17
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/9
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Display, Operation
Pushbutton accessories
■ Technical specifications
Blanking cover plates
Dimensions
• Height
• Width
• Depth
mm
mm
mm
Surface-mounting
enclosures
i-system
DELTA profil
DELTA style
DELTA ambiente
DELTA profil
55
55
--
65
65
--
68
68
--
65
65
--
80
80
30
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
i-system
Blanking cover plates
• Titanium white
• Carbon metallic
• Aluminum metallic
}
A
}
5TG2 558
5TG1 220
5TG1 250
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
021 0.007
021 0.049
021 0.049
D
A
D
D
5WG3 110-8AB01
5WG3 110-8AB11
5WG3 110-8AB21
5WG3 110-8AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
0.048
0.048
0.048
0.048
A
A
A
A
5TG1 810
5TG1 870
5TG1 840
5TG1 770
1
1
1
1
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
021
021
021
021
0.041
0.041
0.041
0.041
}
A
5TG1 330
5TG1 370
1
1
1/10
1/10
021 0.054
021 0.054
A
5TG1 510
1
1/5
021 0.056
5TG2 558
DELTA profil
M 110
M 110 surface-mounting enclosures1)
Single, For surface mounting of UP 110
wall-mounted transmitters "Batterie" wave.
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
5WG3 110-8AB11
Blanking cover plates
•
•
•
•
Titanium white
Pearl gray
Anthracite
Silver
5TG1 810
DELTA style
Blanking cover plates
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
5TG1 330
DELTA ambiente
17
Blanking cover plates (to be discontinued)
• Arctic white
5TG1 510
1)
The matching cut-out frame must be ordered separately.
17/10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Display, Operation
Remote controls
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
S 425
S 425 wave hand-held radio transmitters
• 4 preselection pushbuttons and 4 pushbutton pairs for wireless
operation of 16 different room functions
• Separate pushbutton pair for a central function
(e.g. central ON/OFF)
• Configurable function per pushbutton pair: switch, switch
and dim, shutter/blind control, store and call up scenes
• Radio transmitter: 868 MHz
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 154 x 55 x 24 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
S 425
S 425 wave hand-held radio transmitters1)
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
17 channels
• Black
• Silver
}
}
5WG3 425-7AB21
5WG3 425-7AB71
1
1
1
1
030 0.124
030 0.125
5WG3 425-7AB21
1) The 2 batteries of type LR03/AAA (1.5 V) required for operation are included in delivery.
17
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/11
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Output Devices
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
17
17/12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Application
Page
Binary output devices
For ON/OFF switching of actuators over GAMMA wave.
17/13
Socket outlet switches
For the wireless switching of devices that are plugged
into a socket outlet.
17/15
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Output Devices
Binary output devices
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
sys switching inserts
Flush mounting
• For the switching of incandescent lamps, HV and LV halogen
lamps with electronic or conventional transformers,
rated operational voltage 230 V AC
• 2-wire connection method
• Short-circuit protection through miniature fuse with spare fuse
• Secondary input for auxiliary operation over conventional
pushbuttons
UP 560
• 10-pole socket for plugging in a UP 210 wave pushbutton for
the local and remote control over KNX radio
• For mounting in an installation box (∅ 60 mm, depth: 40 mm)
with screw or claw fixing
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 71 x 71 x 32 mm
UP 560 wall-mounted transmitters "Aktor" 230 V wave
Flush mounting
• For the wireless operation of up to 2 different room functions
and for the control of actuators over KNX radio
• 10-pole plug-in connector for plugging in an instabus
pushbutton, single or double, as operator interface
• Adjustable function; switching, switching and dimming,
shutter/blind control and scene control
• Short and long button press for ON/OFF, BRIGHTER/DARKER
for dimming or UP/DOWN and adjustment of slats for
hutter/blind control
• Storage and call up of up to four scenes
• With integrated switch actuator with relay contact, rated
for 230 V AC, 6 A (resistive load), with option for setting whether
load should be permanently switched on or off (normal mode)
or whether actuator should operate in timer mode with an
adjustable ON period of 1, 5 or 15 minutes
• KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
• Electronics powered over 230 V AC
• Commissioning over six DIL switches located on the
front panel - no additional aids required
• For mounting in an installation box (∅ 60 mm, depth: 40 mm)
with screw or claw fixing
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 71 x 71 x 32 mm
GE 561/01 GE 561/01 wave switch actuators
2 x 230 V AC, 16 A
•
•
•
•
•
KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
One relay contact per output
Contact rated operational voltage, 230 V AC
Rated current 16 A at p.f. = 1
With option for setting whether load should be permanently
switched ON or OFF (normal mode) or whether actuator should
operate in timer mode with an adjustable ON period of
1 ... 60 minutes
• Electronics powered over 230 V AC
• Commissioning over a pushbutton located on the top - no
additional aids required
• Modular installation device
• Dimensions (W x H x L): 42 x 32 x 274.5 mm
GE 561/11 GE 561/11 wave switch actuators
2 x 230 V AC, 16 A, with EnOcean receiver
• KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
• EnOcean radio receiver for 868 MHz
• Converter of EnOcean radio to KNX radio for the control of
KNX radio actuators over EnOcean radio pushbuttons
• Control of internal actuator channels over KNX and/or EnOcean
radio pushbuttons
• One relay contact per output
• Contact rated operational voltage, 230 V AC
• Rated current 16 A at p.f. = 1
• With option for setting whether load should be permanently
switched ON or OFF (normal mode) or whether actuator
should operate in timer mode with an adjustable ON period
of 1 ... 60 minutes
• Electronics powered over 230 V AC
• Commissioning over a pushbutton located on the top - no
additional aids required
• Modular installation device
• Dimensions (W x H x L): 42 x 32 x 274.5 mm
GAMMA wave flush-mounting combinations
Operator interfaces
sys pushbuttons1)
UP 210 wave
pushbuttons
sys shutter/blind
pushbuttons1)
UP 211 wave shutter/ instabus pushbuttons,
blind pushbuttons
single, double
--
✔
✔
---
---
---
---
---
✔
✔
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
Device inserts
Universal dimmer sys inserts
sys switching inserts
Shutter/blind control sys inserts
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
"Batterie" wave
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
230 V wave
UP 560 wall-mounted transmitters
"Aktor" 230 V wave
✔
17
1) See Catalog ET D1.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/13
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Output Devices
Binary output devices
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
sys switching inserts1)2)
Flush mounting
• Rated operational power 25 ... 250 VA
A
5TC1 232
1
1
024 0.100
• Rated operational power 15 ... 500 VA
(for toroidal core transformers 15 ... 250 VA)
A
5TC1 233
1
1
024 0.110
UP 560 wall-mounted transmitters "Aktor" 230 V }
wave1)3)
Flush mounting
5WG3 560-2AB01
1
1
030 0.074
GE 561/01 GE 561/01 wave switch actuators
2 x 230 V AC, 16 A
}
5WG3 561-4AB01
1
1
030 0.220
GE 561/11 GE 561/11 wave switch actuators
2 x 230 V AC, 16 A, with EnOcean receiver
}
5WG3 561-4AB11
1
1
030 0.220
5TC1 232
UP 560
5WG3 560-2AB01
5WG3 561-4AB01
5WG3 561-4AB11
1)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
2) The UP 210 wave pushbutton with KNX radio communication must be ordered separately.
3) The instabus pushbuttons must be ordered separately.
17
17/14
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Output Devices
Socket outlet switches
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
S 564
S 564 wave socket outlet switches
• Intermediate connector for plugging into a protective contact
socket outlet
• Switchable SCHUKO socket outlet integrated in the
intermediate connector
• Integrated actuator for ON/OFF switching of SCHUKO socket
outlet, relay contact rated for 230 V AC, 16 A (resistive load)
• Can also be controlled over up to 10 KNX sensors and can be
integrated into up to 16 KNX scenes
• Pushbutton for local operation and commissioning – no
additional aids required
• LED to indicate the operation/switching state
• KNX radio transmitter/receiver, 868 MHz
• Powered over socket outlet
• Titanium white
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 128 x 72 x 74 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
S 564
S 564 wave socket outlet switches
Intermediate connectors
A
5WG3 564-7AB11
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.245
5WG3 564-7AB11
17
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/15
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Input Devices
Binary input devices
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
AP 261
AP 261 wave binary inputs
With battery
• For detecting the state of an external contact connected to the
sensor and transmission of the state as ON/OFF information to
an actuator with KNX radio communication
• Additional reed contact integrated in the device, activated
through the magnet included in delivery, and electrically
connected in series to the external contact
• 4 plug-in terminals for wire cross-sections of 0.14 ... 0.5 mm2
(solid or finely stranded) for connection of the external contact
and for setting through a wire jumper, whether monitoring is to
cover internal contact only, external contact only, or both
contacts
• KNX radio transmitter for 868 MHz
• Electronics powered over a lithium battery (1/2 AA 3.6 V), with
a battery service life of approx. 5 years, with signaling of battery
status every 24 hours, with LED that flashes every 10 seconds
to indicate that the battery needs replacing
• Commissioning over a pushbutton located on the front of the
sensor – no additional aids required
• Surface mounting
• Comprising one mounting plate for screw or adhesive
fastening, clip-on radio sensor with integrated reed contact
and trigger magnet
• Titanium white
• Dimensions (H x W x D):
Sensor 87 x 36 x 27 mm, magnet 40 x 10 x 10 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
AP 261
AP 261 wave binary inputs1)
With battery
}
Price
per PU
5WG3 261-3AB11
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.096
5WG3 261-3AB11
1)
Battery included in delivery.
17
17/16
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Devices for Special Applications
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
Application
Page
Lighting
The universal dimmer sys insert is a flush-mounting
device for switching and dimming.
17/18
Sun protection, anti-glare
protection, utilization of
daylight
Sun and anti-glare protection is provided by the
appropriate actuators and sensors.
17/19
Safety
The following components for GAMMA wave offer
protection against intrusion and fire.
17/21
17
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/17
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
Universal dimmer sys inserts
Flush mounting
• For switching and dimming of incandescent lamps, HV and
LV halogen lamps with electronic or conventional transformers,
rated operational voltage 230 V AC, rated operational power
50 ... 420 VA for incandescent lamp rating and LV halogen
lamps with conventional transformer and 70 ... 420 VA for
LV halogen lamps with electronic transformers
• 2-wire connection method
• Automatic load detection
• Lamp friendly soft start
• Storing and switching on at one brightness value
• Electronic short-circuit and over temperature protection
• 10-pole socket for plugging in a UP 210 wave pushbutton for
the local and remote control over KNX radio
• Secondary input for auxiliary operation over conventional
pushbuttons
• For mounting in an installation box (∅ 60 mm, depth: 40 mm)
with screw or claw fixing
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 71 x 71 x 32 mm
GAMMA wave flush-mounting combinations
sys pushbuttons1)
Operator interfaces
UP 210 wave
pushbuttons
sys shutter/blind
pushbuttons1)
UP 211 wave shutter/ instabus pushbuttons,
blind pushbuttons
single, double
✔
✔
---
---
---
✔
✔
----
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
Device inserts
Universal dimmer sys inserts
sys switching inserts
Shutter/blind control sys inserts
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
"Batterie" wave
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
230 V wave
UP 560 wall-mounted transmitters
"Aktor" 230 V wave
1) See Catalog ET D1.
✔
----
■ Selection and ordering data
Version
DT Order No.
Universal dimmer sys inserts1)
Flush mounting
}
Price
per PU
5TC1 230
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
024 0.089
5TC1 230
1) The UP 210 wave pushbutton and matching frame must be ordered separately. Battery included in delivery.
17
17/18
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Devices for Special Applications
Sun protection, anti-glare protection,
utilization of daylight
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
GE 520
GE 520 wave shutter/blind actuators
1 x 230 V AC, 6 A
• KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
• For control of a solar protection drive with AC motor for
230 V AC and electromechanical limit switches
• Electrically interlocked relays for reversing direction of rotation
• Relay contacts for rated voltage 230 V AC, 6 A
• Electronics powered over 230 V AC
• Commissioning over a pushbutton located on the top - no
additional aids required
• Dimensions (H x W x L): 42 x 32 x 274.5 mm
Shutter/blind control sys inserts
Flush mounting
• For control of sun/anti-glare protection drive for 230 V AC with
mechanical or electronic limit switches, rated operational
voltage 230 V AC, rated operational capacity 1 motor with max.
1000 VA, with 2 relays which are interlocked against each other
with a minimum switchover time of approx. 1 s
• Secondary input for additional operation over conventional
UP/DOWN pushbuttons, with safety function "wind alarm",
which can be implemented through the secondary input "UP"
AP 260
• 10-pole socket for plugging in a UP 211 wave shutter/blind
pushbutton for local and remote control over KNX radio
• For mounting in an installation box (∅ 60 mm, depth: 40 mm)
with screw or claw fixing
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 71 x 71 x 32 mm
AP 260 wave door/window contacts
With battery, surface mounting
• For detecting the state (closed/open) of a door or window over
the reed contact integrated in the device, with actuation of the
reed contact through the supplied magnet for attachment to the
moving part of the door or window
• Connection for an external floating contact
• Transmission of the switching state to a shutter/blind sys insert
with clipped on wave shutter/blind pushbutton or to the wave
Touch Manager
• 4 plug-in terminals for wire cross-sections of 0.14 ... 0.5 mm2
(solid or finely stranded) for connection of the external contact
and for setting through a wire jumper, whether monitoring is to
cover internal contact only, external contact only, or both
contacts
• KNX radio transmitter for 868 MHz
• Electronics powered over a lithium battery (1/2 AA 3.6 V), with
a battery service life of approx. 5 years, with signaling of battery
status every 24 hours, with LED that flashes every 10 seconds
to indicate that the battery needs replacing
• Commissioning over a pushbutton located on the front of the
sensor - no additional aids required
• Surface mounting
• Comprising one mounting plate for screw or adhesive fixing,
clip-on radio sensor with integrated reed contact and trigger
magnet
• Dimensions (H x W x D):
Sensor 87 x 36 x 27 mm, magnet 40 x 10 x 10 mm
GAMMA wave flush-mounting combinations
Operator interfaces
sys pushbuttons1)
UP 210 wave
pushbuttons
sys shutter/blind
pushbuttons1)
UP 211 wave shutter/ instabus pushbuttons,
blind pushbuttons
single, double
✔
✔
---
---
Device inserts
Universal dimmer sys inserts
sys switching inserts
Shutter/blind control sys inserts
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
"Batterie" wave
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
230 V wave
UP 560 wall-mounted transmitters
"Aktor" 230 V wave
1)
See Catalog ET D1.
✔
--
✔
✔
----
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
--
--
--
--
✔
---
17
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/19
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Devices for Special Applications
Sun protection, anti-glare protection,
utilization of daylight
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
GE 520
GE 520 wave shutter/blind actuators
1 x 230 V AC, 6 A
A
Shutter/blind control sys inserts1)2)
Flush mounting
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG3 520-4AB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.220
}
5TC1 231
1
1
024 0.112
}
B
5WG3 260-3AB11
5WG3 260-3AB81
1
1
1
1
030 0.096
030 0.096
5WG3 520-4AB01
5TC1 231
AP 260
AP 260 wave door/window contacts3)
With battery, surface mounting
• Titanium white
• Brown
5WG3 260-3AB11
1)
Matching frames must be ordered separately.
2)
UP 211 wave shutter/blind pushbuttons must be ordered separately.
3)
Battery included in delivery.
17
17/20
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Devices for Special Applications
Safety
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
DELTA reflex smoke detector "Batterie"
Surface mounting
• For early detection of fires in buildings, with optical measuring
method for smoke detection
• VdS approval
• Integrated acoustic alarm signal generator
• Alarm/acknowledge pushbutton and integrated LED for display
of normal mode, smoke alarm and weak battery
• Base for surface mounting and a screw-on sensor head
• Interface and plug-in terminals for networking up to
40 detectors over a 2-wire cable with an overall length of
up to 400 m
• Module slot for insertion of a smoke detector module "Relais"
or a wave smoke detector module
• Electronics powered by three Mignon batteries
(AA 1.5 V), with a battery service life of 5 years
• Dimensions in mm: ∅ 120, height 44
Accessories
Smoke detector modules "Relais"
• For insertion in the DELTA reflex smoke detector "Batterie"
• For connection of external alarm sensors, such as horns,
sirens and signal generators
• Floating changeover contact, with switching voltage up to
30 V DC/42 V AC, switching current up to DC 1 A/AC 0.5 A
M 255
DELTA reflex wave UNI M 255 smoke detector modules
• Radio modules with KNX radio transmitter for 868 MHz
• For insertion in the DELTA reflex smoke detector "Batterie"
• Alarm transmission over KNX radio when a smoke alarm is
triggered at the smoke detector
• Transmission of the battery status of the smoke detector over
KNX radio
AP 260
• Terminals for cables with ∅ 0.4 ... 0.8 mm
• Powered over smoke detector
• Dimensions (H x W): 43 x 38 mm
• Commissioning over a pushbutton– no additional aids
required
• Powered over smoke detector
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 63 x 38 x 15 mm
AP 260 wave door/window contacts
With battery, surface mounting
• For detecting the state (closed/open) of a door or window over
the reed contact integrated in the device, with actuation of the
reed contact through the supplied magnet for attachment to the
moving part of the door or window
• Connection for an external floating contact
• Transmission of the switching state to a shutter/blind sys insert
with clipped on wave shutter/blind pushbutton
• 4 plug-in terminals for wire cross-sections of 0.14 ... 0.5 mm2
(solid or finely stranded) for connection of the external contact
and for setting over a wire jumper, whether monitoring is to cover internal contact only, external contact only, or both
contacts
• KNX radio transmitter for 868 MHz
• Electronics powered over a lithium battery (1/2 AA 3.6 V), with
a battery service life of approx. 5 years, with signaling of battery
status every 24 hours, with LED that flashes every 10 seconds
to indicate that the battery needs replacing
• Commissioning over a pushbutton located on the front of the
sensor – no additional aids required
• Surface mounting
• Comprising one mounting plate for screw or adhesive
fastening, clip-on radio sensor with integrated reed
contact and trigger magnet
• Dimensions (H x W x D):
Sensor 87 x 36 x 27 mm, magnet 40 x 10 x 10 mm
17
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/21
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Devices for Special Applications
Safety
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DELTA reflex smoke detectors "Batterie"1)
Surface mounting
• Titanium white
• Aluminum metallic
• Tobacco
}
}
A
5TC1 290
5TC1 293
5TC1 294
1
1
1
1
1
1
024 0.375
024 0.352
024 0.352
Accessories
Smoke detector modules "Relais"2)
A
5TC1 291
1
1
024 0.045
A
5WG3 255-8AB01
1
1
030 0.420
}
B
5WG3 260-3AB11
5WG3 260-3AB81
1
1
1
1
030 0.096
030 0.096
5TC1 290
5TC1 291
M 255
DELTA reflex wave UNI M 255 smoke detector
modules2)
AP 260
AP 260 wave door/window contacts1)
5WG3 255-8AB01
With battery, surface mounting
• Titanium white
• Brown
5WG3 260-3AB11
1)
Battery included in delivery.
2)
For insertion in the DELTA reflex smoke detector, titanium white (5TC1 290), aluminum metallic (5TC1 293) or tobacco (5TC1 294).
17
17/22
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Gateways, Interface Converters
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
Application
Page
KNX/KNX radio
wave/instabus couplers make wireless operation easy.
17/24
EnOcean/KNX radio
EnOcean /KNX radio gateways allow integration of
battery-free pushbuttons in the GAMMA wave system.
17/25
17
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/23
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Gateways, Interface Converters
KNX/KNX radio
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
UP 140
UP 140 wave/instabus couplers
• For coupling GAMMA wave with GAMMA instabus
• Coupling of a total of up to 50 GAMMA wave sensor channels
with GAMMA instabus actuator channels or GAMMA instabus
sensor channels with GAMMA wave actuator channels
• Pushbutton rocker, single with intermediate position
• Vertical operation
• ETS3 and higher supports configuration of the functions:
switching, switching and dimming, shutter/blind control or
scene control
Dimensions
• Length
• Width
• Depth
i-system
DELTA
profil
DELTA
style
Single
Single
Single
65
65
14
68
68
16.5
mm 55
mm 55
mm 13
• Short and long button press for ON/OFF,
BRIGHTER/DARKER for dimming or UP/DOWN and
adjustment of slats for shutter/blind control
• Storage and call up of up to two scenes
• 1 LED for the indication of telegram transmissions
• KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
• 10-pole plug for plugging onto a UP 114 bus coupling unit,
version BCU 2.1.
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Unit(s)Unit(s)
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
i-system
UP 140
UP 140 wave couplers/instabus1)2)
• Titanium white
• Carbon metallic
• Aluminum metallic
}
B
A
5WG3 140-2HB11
5WG3 140-2HB21
5WG3 140-2HB31
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.050
022 0.050
022 0.050
B
}
B
A
5WG3 140-2AB01
5WG3 140-2AB11
5WG3 140-2AB21
5WG3 140-2AB71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
022
}
B
B
5WG3 140-2GB11
5WG3 140-2GB21
5WG3 140-2GB41
1
1
1
1
1
1
022 0.050
022 0.050
022 0.036
5WG3 140-2HB11
DELTA profil
UP 140
UP 140 wave couplers/instabus1)2)
•
•
•
•
Pearl gray
Titanium white
Anthracite
Silver
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
5WG3 140-2AB11
DELTA style
UP 140
UP 140 wave couplers/instabus1)2)
• Titanium white
• Basalt black
• Platinum metallic
17
N
5WG3 140-2GB11
1)
The bus coupling unit must be ordered separately.
2)
The matching design frame must be ordered separately.
17/24
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Gateways, Interface Converters
EnOcean/KNX radio
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
GE 561/11 GE 561/11 wave switch actuators
With EnOcean/wave interface converters
• KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
• EnOcean radio receiver for 868 MHz
• Converter of EnOcean radio to KNX radio for the control of
KNX radio actuators over EnOcean radio pushbuttons
• Control of internal actuator channels over KNX and/or EnOcean
radio pushbuttons
• One relay contact per output
• Contact rated operational voltage, 230 V AC
• Rated current 16 A at p.f. = 1
• With option for setting whether load should be permanently
switched ON or OFF (normal mode) or whether actuator
should operate in timer mode with an adjustable ON period of
1 ... 60 minutes
• Electronics powered over 230 V AC
• Commissioning over a pushbutton located on the top – no
additional aids required
• Modular installation device
• Dimensions (W x H x L): 42 x 32 x 274.5 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
GE 561/11 GE 561/11 wave switch actuators
2 x 230 V AC, 16 A,
with EnOcean/wave interface converters
DT Order No.
}
5WG3 561-4AB11
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.220
5WG3 561-4AB11
17
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/25
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
System Products
Introduction
■ Overview
Devices
Application
17
17/26
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Page
Transmitters, receivers
This includes a selection of wall-mounted transmitters for 17/27
wireless operation.
Repeaters
Improves KNX radio communication when greater
distances are required.
17/29
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
System Products
Transmitters, receivers
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
UP 110
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters wave
• For the wireless operation of up to 2 different room functions
and for the control of actuators over KNX radio
• 10-pole plug-in connector for plugging in an instabus
pushbutton, single or double, as operator interface
• Adjustable function; switching, switching and dimming,
shutter/blind control and scene control
• Short and long button press for ON/OFF, BRIGHTER/DARKER
for dimming or UP/DOWN and adjustment of slats for
shutter/blind control
• Storage and call up of up to four scenes
• KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
UP 560
• Commissioning over four DIL switches located on the
front panel - no additional aids required
• For mounting in an installation box (∅ 60 mm, depth: 40 mm)
with screw or claw fixing.
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters "Batterie" wave
• Electronics powered over a lithium battery
(½ AA 3.6 V)
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 71 x 71 x 24 mm.
UP 110/11 wall-mounted transmitters 230 V wave
• Electronics powered over 230 V AC
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 71 x 71 x 32 mm
UP 560 wall-mounted transmitters "Aktor" 230 V wave
• For the wireless operation of up to 2 different room functions
and for the control of actuators over KNX radio
• 10-pole plug-in connector for plugging in an instabus
pushbutton, single or double, as operator interface
• Adjustable function; switching, switching and dimming,
shutter/blind control and scene control
• Short and long button press for ON/OFF, BRIGHTER/DARKER
for dimming or UP/DOWN and adjustment of slats for
shutter/blind control
• Storage and call up of up to four scenes
• With integrated switch actuator with relay contact, rated
for 230 V AC, 6 A (resistive load), with option for setting whether
load should be permanently switched on or off (normal mode)
or whether actuator should operate in timer mode with an
adjustable ON period of 1, 5 or 15 minutes
• KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
• Electronics powered over 230 V AC
• Commissioning over six DIL switches located on the
front panel – no additional aids required
• For mounting in an installation box (∅ 60 mm, depth: 40 mm)
with screw or claw fixing
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 71 x 71 x 32 mm
GAMMA wave flush-mounting combinations
Operator interfaces
sys pushbuttons1)
UP 210 wave
pushbuttons
sys shutter/blind
pushbuttons1)
UP 211 wave shutter/ instabus pushbuttons,
blind pushbuttons
single, double
---
---
Device inserts
Universal dimmer sys inserts
sys switching inserts
Shutter/blind control sys inserts
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
"Batterie" wave
✔
✔
----
✔
---
✔
✔
----
--
--
✔
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters
230 V wave
--
--
--
--
✔
UP 560 wall-mounted transmitters
"Aktor" 230 V wave
--
--
--
--
✔
1) See Catalog ET D1.
17
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/27
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
System Products
Transmitters, receivers
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
UP 110
UP 110 wall-mounted transmitters "Batterie"
wave1)2)3)4)
}
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
5WG3 110-2AB01
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.050
B
5WG3 110-2AB11
1
1
030 0.068
UP 560 wall-mounted transmitters "Aktor" 230 V }
wave1)2)
5WG3 560-2AB01
1
1
030 0.074
5WG3 110-2AB01
UP 110/11 UP 110/11 wall-mounted transmitters 230 V
wave1)2)3)
5WG3 110-2AB11
UP 560
5WG3 560-2AB01
1) instabus pushbuttons and matching frames must be ordered separately.
2) Matching frames and surface-mounting enclosures (where applicable) must be ordered separately.
3) Surface-mounting enclosures, where applicable, must be ordered separately.
4) Battery included in delivery.
17
17/28
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
System Products
Repeaters
■ Technical specifications
Type
Description
UP 141
UP 141 wave repeaters
• For improving the KNX radio communication through the single
repetition of each correctly received KNX radio telegram, if KNX
radio telegrams are so dampened by several walls, ceilings or
fixtures that an assigned receiver can no longer properly
receive the KNX radio telegrams
• No teach-in to other KNX radio devices required
• KNX radio transmitter/receiver for 868 MHz
• Electronics powered over 230 V AC
• For mounting in an installation box (∅ 60 mm, depth: 40 mm)
with screw or claw fixing
• Central threaded hole for screwing onto a blanking cover plate
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 71 x 71 x 32 mm
■ Selection and ordering data
Type
Version
DT Order No.
UP 141
UP 141 wave repeaters1)2)
A
5WG3 141-2AB01
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/ PG
P. unit
Weight
per PU
approx.
Unit(s)Unit(s)
kg
1
1
030 0.065
5WG3 141-2AB01
1) Blanking cover plates must be ordered separately.
2) Matching frames must be ordered separately.
17
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
17/29
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave Radio System
Notes
17
7
17/30
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
18
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
18/2
System overview
18/6
Commissioning over Ethernet
(LAN)
18/7
Commissioning over W-LAN
18/8
Coupling lines over Ethernet
(LAN)
18/9
Remote access over the Internet
(DSL)
18/10
Visualization over Ethernet
(LAN)
18/11
Remote access to several
locations
18/12
Monitoring locations over
Ethernet (LAN)
18/13
Fault indication over Ethernet
(LAN)
18/14
Switch/dimming actuators for
controlling DALI lighting
18/15
Wireless remote control
18
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
System overview
Transmission technology
■ Overview
GAMMA instabus based on KNX is a distributed, event-controlled
bus system with serial data transmission for the controlling,
monitoring and signaling of operational functions.
General information
Controlling, monitoring, signaling
Sensors
(control
stations)
Each recipient acknowledges receipt of the telegram when the
transmission is successful. If no acknowledgement is issued,
transmission is repeated up to three times. If the telegram is still
not acknowledged, the send operation is aborted and the error
noted in the memory of the transmitter.
Bus line
230/400 V
I2_05799c
Actuators
(receivers)
Ever increasing demands made on the flexibility and convenience
of electrical installations, combined with the demand to minimize
energy requirements, have led to the development of building
management systems. The bus technology used in these systems
is based on manufacture-independent and internationally
standardized technology: KNX. More than 100 manufacturers
support this standard and have joined forces to form the
KNX Association.
The member companies ensure the availability of bus-compatible
products. This has made it possible for devices from various
manufacturers to be used in a single KNX system.
Demand for more convenience and the fact that more and more
is technically possible means that an increasing amount of time
and effort is being devoted to electrical installations. While
conventional electrical installation technology has reached the
limits of its capabilities, GAMMA instabus, the intelligent building
management systems from Siemens based on KNX has made it
possible to satisfy these comprehensive demands with solutions
that are both easy to manage and affordable.
System arguments
In conventional electrical installations, each function needs its
own cable and each control system a separate network.
By contrast, GAMMA instabus allows all operational functions
and processes to be controlled, monitored and signaled over a
single common cable. This means that the energy feeder can be
routed directly to consumers without any detours.
Not only does this reduce the amount of cables required, it also
has other huge advantages: electrical installations in buildings
are far simpler to install and it is also easy to add any subsequent extensions and make modifications. If the purpose or
configuration of a building is changed, the GAMMA instabus
system is easy to adapt by simply reassigning the various bus
devices (changing their parameters), without the need to lay any
new cables. These parameters can be reassigned using a PC
connected to GAMMA instabus and the configuration and
commissioning software ETS (Engineering Tool Software).
18
With the right interfaces, GAMMA instabus can also be connected
to the control centers of other building management and automation
systems (e.g. SICLIMAT X) or to a public telephone network (e.g.
ISDN) or using a LAN/Internet connection. It is therefore just as
cost-effective to use the GAMMA instabus in the family home as
in hotels, schools, banks, office buildings or complex nonresidential buildings.
18/2
All the connected bus devices can exchange data over a common
transmission path, the bus. Data is transmitted in serial mode
and in compliance with precisely defined rules (the bus protocol).
The data to be transmitted is packed into a telegram and sent
over the bus from a sensor (the command output) to one or more
actuators (the command receiver).
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Transmission of data using KNX is not electrically isolated as the
power supply for the bus devices (24 V DC) is transmitted at the
same time. The telegrams are modulated on this direct voltage,
whereby a logic zero is transmitted as a pulse. The omission of
a pulse is interpreted as a logic one.
The individual data of the telegrams are transmitted in asynchronous
mode. However, transmission is synchronized by start and stop
bits.
Access to the bus as the shared physical medium of
communication for asynchronous transmission must be
controlled unambiguously. In the case of KNX, the CSMA/CA
procedure is used for this purpose. The CSMA/CA procedure
guarantees collision-free access to the bus without any
reduction of bus data throughput.
All stations listen in but only those actuators actually addressed
respond. If a station wants to transmit, it first has to listen in and
wait until no other station is transmitting (Carrier Sense). When
the bus is unoccupied, any station can begin a transmission
operation (Multiple Access).
If two stations begin to transmit simultaneously, the higher-priority
instantly asserts itself on the bus (Collision Avoidance), while the
other station pulls back and restarts the transmission operation
some time later.
If the two stations have an identical level of priority, the one with
the smaller physical address asserts itself.
Addressing
Every letter needs an address in order for it to be correctly
delivered by the postal service. The addressing of bus devices
is similar, but the form used for postal purposes is unsuitable in
this case.
During configuration with the ETS, each bus device is assigned
its own physical address with which it can be uniquely identified;
just like a postal address is a unique ID for the recipient of a
letter. However, the physical address has to be expressed in the
language of the bus and is based on the topological structure of
the KNX system.
Physical addressing is used by the ETS only for commissioning
the individual bus devices or for servicing and diagnostics
activities. In this case the addressing is performed along the
same lines as for the postal delivery service.
By contrast, the KNX system uses a different address for
telegram traffic: the logical or so-called group address. This
address is not based on the bus topology but on the operational
functions (applications) of the building.
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
System overview
Unlike the postal service, which delivers a letter to the recipient's
address, the configured group address is written into each
telegram sent by the transmitter. Every bus device listens to this
telegram, reads the group address contained in it, and checks
whether the telegram is addressed to it or not.
The group address to which a bus device should respond is
assigned during configuration of the KNX system using ETS.
Unlike the postal delivery service, several group addresses can
be assigned to one bus device.
LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC
1
When a bus device is listening to a telegram on the bus, it will
always receive the telegram if it responds to the group address
entered in the telegram. If not, it will discard the telegram as not
being intended for it.
Topology
Up to 64 bus-compatible devices (stations) can be connected to
and operated on the smallest unit of the KNX system, i.e. on a
single line. Using line couplers connected to the so-called main
line it is possible to bundle up to 15 lines in an area.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
Interfaces (gateways) to third-party systems (SICLIMAT X, LAN,
etc.), or additional KNX systems are connected to the backbone
line.
Although more than 14,000 devices can be interconnected in a
single unit, the clear-cut logic of the system is preserved.
Telegrams only ever overstep the interfaces to other lines and
function areas if they are needed in those areas. This minimizes
the telegram load on the main line. Line/backbone couplers
carry out the necessary filter function.
The physical address is based on this topological structure:
every device can be uniquely identified through the specification
of its area, line and device number. For assignment of the
devices to the operational functions the group addresses are
divided into main groups and subgroups.
During configuration it is possible to divide the group addresses
for different management functions into as many as 14 main
groups, e.g. for
• Lighting control
• Shutter/blind control
• Room control for heating, ventilation, air conditioning.
Each main group can include as many as 2048 subgroups, to
suit the user's requirements. This means that each device is able
to communicate with every other one.
64 64 64
Line 1
LC
2
3
64 64 64 64
4
64
........................
64 64 64 64
12
I2_05798d
Fifteen areas can be joined together by means of backbone
couplers, which are connected to the so-called backbone lines,
in order to form a larger unit.
13 14 15
Line coupler
Technology
Each line requires its own power supply unit for the devices and
is therefore self-sufficient.
The Siemens power supply unit supplies the individual devices
on the line with SELV (safety extra-low voltage) of 24 V DC and,
depending on the version, can be loaded with 160 mA, 320 mA
or 640 mA. It features both voltage and current limiting and is
therefore short-circuit resistant. Short system interruptions are
jumpered with a buffer period of 200 ms.
The bus load depends on the type of devices connected. The
devices are ready for operation at a minimum of 21 V DC and
typically draw 150 mW from the bus. If there is a concentration
of a large number of bus devices in a single location, the power
supply unit must be located in the near vicinity.
A maximum of two power supply units are permissible in one
line. A minimum distance of 200 m of cable length must be
observed between the two power supply units.
The length of a cable plus all junctions must not exceed 1000 m.
The distance between a power supply unit and a device must
not exceed 350 m. In order to guarantee no telegram collisions,
the distance between two devices should be limited to a
maximum 700 m.
The bus cable can be laid parallel to the mains cable. It can
be looped and branched. A cable terminating resistor is not
required. The devices are connected to the bus by means of
either pressure contact or bus terminals. Connection by means
of pressure contact is effected by snap-fitting the devices
(designed for installation in distribution boards) on to the
standard mounting rail (EN 50022-35 mm × 7.5 mm) with
integrated data rail. Transition from the data rail to the bus cable
is effected by a connector. The bus cable is connected to
surface-mounting, flush-mounting, wall-mounting, ceilingmounting and built-in devices by plugging on the bus terminal.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
18/3
18
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
System overview
Devices
To other systems
I2_05796b
Each device generally comprises a universal Bus Coupling Unit
(BCU) and a task-specific Bus Terminal (BT, e.g. pushbutton or
display), which exchanges information with the BCU over the
Peripheral External Interface (PEI). The BCU receives telegrams
from the bus, decodes them and actuates the BT. Conversely,
the BT sends information to the BCU, which encodes it and
sends it as a telegram onto the bus.
1
2
1
BbC
1
2
4
3
4
3
15
4
14
13
4
12
11
3
1
4
10
2
BbC
3
9
4
1
2
BbC
8
3
1
BbC
4
7
2
3
4
1
LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
6
2
1
3
4
5
4
3
64
64
64 64
64
Functional zone 1
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
3
2
BbC
64 64 64 64 64 64 64
18/4
2
1
3
The ROM contains the system-specific software that cannot be
changed by the user. The parameterization data for the function
of the BCU to be performed are saved by the ETS in the EEPROM.
The current data are saved by the MP in the RAM.
18
2
BbC
During configuration and commissioning with the ETS the BCU
receives the parameterization data for the function that is to be
performed. For this purpose, the BCU contains a Microprocessor
(MP) with a non-volatile ROM (Read Only Memory), a volatile
RAM (Random Access Memory) and a non-volatile EEPROM
(Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM).
The assignment of the PEI pins differs on the various BTs.
This ensures that a BT connected through the PEI is able to
communicate error-free with the BCU when the relevant
application program has been loaded by ETS in the EEPROM of
the BCU.
1
BbC
2
LC
Line coupler
BbC
Backbone coupler
1....
Bus devices
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
System overview
System data
Bus cable
mm2
YCYM 2 x 2 x 0.8
One core pair (red, black) for signal transmission and power supply,
One core pair (yellow, white) for additional applications (SELV or voice)
• Cable lengths of one line in total (core diameter: 0.8 mm)
m
Max. 1000 (including all junctions)
• Length between two bus devices
m
Max. 700
• Length between bus device and
power supply unit (320 mA)/reactor
m
Max. 350
• Cable type
Cable length
• Length between power supply unit (320 mA) and reactor
Side-by-side mounting necessary
(on standard mounting rail with integrated data rail)
Bus devices
• Number of areas
Max. 15
• Number of lines per area
Max. 15
• Number of bus devices per line
Max. 64
Topology
Line, star or tree structure
Power supply
• Power supply
V DC
24 (SELV safety extra-low voltage)
• Power supply units per line
One power supply unit (160, 320 or 640 mA)
• Power supply units per line for high current demand
Max. two power supply units at a distance of at least 200 m
Transmission
• Transmission technology
• Baud rate
Distributed, event-controlled, serial, symmetric
bit/s
9600
Device features (unless otherwise specified)
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
IP 20
Protective measure
Bus: safety extra-low voltage SELV 24 V DC
Overvoltage category
Rated insulation voltage Ui
III
V
250
Degree of pollution
2
EMC requirements
Complies with EN 50081-1 and prEN 50082-2 (severity 3),
prEN 50090-2-2, KNX/EIB manual
Resistance to climate
prEN 50090-2-2, KNX/EIB manual
Operating conditions
• Application
For fixed installation indoors, for dry rooms and
installation in heavy-current distribution boards
• Ambient operating temperature
°C
-5 to +45
• Humidity in operation
%
Max. 93
• Storage temperature
°C
-40 to +55
• Humidity in storage
%
Max. 93
Certification
KNX/EIB certified
CE marking
Compliant with EMC Directive (residential and non-residential buildings),
Low Voltage Directive
18
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
18/5
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
Commissioning over Ethernet (LAN)
■ Overview
Faster downloads save time
In every GAMMA instabus project, the devices are commissioned
once they have been installed. Once the physical addresses
have been assigned, application programs, parameters and
addresses are loaded to the devices. Particularly in the case of
larger projects with a large number of devices, this can be a
time-consuming process. However, with the Siemens LAN
connection, this can now all be carried out much faster. This
saves you time and money.
Simply connect your notebook to the GAMMA instabus over the
N 148/21 IP interface and start the download. By comparison:
Using LAN, the download now only takes about half the time it
required using RS232 or USB.
KNX
I2_15412
The solution:
LAN (Ethernet cross cable)
N 148/21
IP interface
LAN-capable notebook
KNX device
KNX device
KNX device
The benefits:
• Planning, configuring, commissioning and diagnosis with
ETS3 (KNX commissioning software)
• Simply connect your notebook and start the download
• Downloading twice as fast saves you considerable time
during commissioning
Proceed as follows:
• Connect the N 148/21 IP interface to the KNX
• Connect the notebook to the N 148/21 IP interface over the
Ethernet cross cable – and start downloading. If using a setup
with cross cable, the IP addresses of the N 148/21 IP interface
and PC must be assigned manually.
18
You require the following:
• N 148/21 IP interface (5WG1 148-1AB21)
• 24 V power supply for N 148/21 IP interface
(e.g. 4AC2 402)
• Ethernet cross cable
• LAN-capable notebook
• ETS3 (current version see http://www.knx.org)
Note:
LAN stands for Local Area Network. In LANs, data transport is organized over
the IP (Internet Protocol) – the standard network protocol on the Internet.
18/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
Commissioning over W-LAN
■ Overview
Commissioning – Now you can do it yourself
In every GAMMA instabus project, the devices are commissioned
once they have been installed. First you need to assign the
physical addresses. To do this, select the device in the ETS3
(KNX commissioning software) on your notebook and press
the programming pushbutton on the device. In the case of
distributed devices, such as flush mounting bus coupling
units, this means a lot of running around! One reason why
these commissioning tasks are usually carried out in pairs.
But now you no longer have to go to all this trouble. Simply
wirelessly connect your notebook to the KNX over W-LAN. And
now you are free to roam during the commissioning process –
simply take your notebook with you, wherever it's needed. It
really couldn't be any quicker or easier. And there is no risk of
errors, such as mixing up the devices due to ambiguous calling.
The solution:
I2_15411
W-LAN
(wireless)
LAN (Ethernet cable)
KNX
W-LAN router
N 148/21
IP interface
Notebook W-LAN-capable
KNX device
KNX device
KNX device
The benefits:
• Wireless GAMMA instabus commissioning over W-LAN
• Freedom of movement within the building
• Single-person commissioning
Proceed as follows:
Connect the N 148/21 IP interface to the KNX, connect the
W-LAN router to the IP interface using the Ethernet cable – and
you're off - free to roam the entire building with your notebook
and the ETS.
You require the following:
• N 148/21 IP interface (5WG1 148-1AB21)
• 24 V power supply for N 148/21 IP interface
(e.g. 4AC2 402)
• Ethernet
• W-LAN router
• W-LAN-capable notebook
• ETS3 (current version see http://www.knx.org)
18
Note:
W-LAN stands for Wireless Local Area Network. W-LANs are quick and easy
to install, cover large areas and operate cost-effectively.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
18/7
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
Coupling lines over Ethernet (LAN)
■ Overview
Connect main and backbone lines over KNXnet/IP
With the new KNXnet/IP standard, KNX telegrams can be transmitted
over Ethernet (LAN). This enables new applications and solutions.
Existing network infrastructures and technologies are used to
transmit KNXdata over greater distances.
Links between buildings and/or building levels can be clearly
and easily implemented using KNXnet/IP.
The solution:
KNX
KNX
LAN (multicast-capable)
N 146
IP router
N 146
IP router
KNX device
I2_15413
KNX device
KNX device
The benefits:
• LAN as main and backbone line
• Supports data transmission over greater distances
• Utilization of existing data networks and components (LAN)
Proceed as follows:
• Connect an N 146 IP router to each KNX line
(instead of an N 140/03 line coupler)
• Connect the N 146 IP router over a multicast-capable LAN
• Commission each N 146 IP router like a "conventional"
line/backbone coupler using the ETS3.
You require the following:
• N 146 IP router (5WG1 146-1AB01), 1 x per line
• 24 V power supply for N 146 IP router (e.g. 4AC2 402)
• Ethernet patch cable or LAN, depending on the size
• ETS3 (current version see http://www.knx.org)
Note:
18
LAN stands for Local Area Network. In LANs, data transport is organized over
the IP (Internet Protocol) – the standard network protocol on the Internet.
Multicast-capable: Multicast telegrams can simultaneously operate several IP
devices in the LAN. In the case of network components (network switches,
routers) this requires the appropriate configuration.
18/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
Remote access over the Internet (DSL)
■ Overview
Simple modification using remote access
In virtually any project, during completion of a building, or prior
to the building being used, you will be faced with the need for
modifications, e.g. lighting times are too long or too short. Until
now generally involved making an appointment with the customer, driving to the site, changing the parameterization, driving
back to the office. Now you can carry out these modifications
from the comfort of your office: With LAN/Internet, you can now
carry out parameterization tasks simply, practically and
remotely. These days, virtually all buildings have LAN and Internet connections - so you always have global access. Because
buildings are not always manned, it is essential to ensure data
security using VPN, DSL or dial-up routers.
This saves time and money and demonstrates to your customers
the degree of flexibility they can enjoy using a GAMMA instabus
system.
The solution:
KNX
LAN
DSL router with VPN or
ISDN/analog dial-up router
N 148/21
IP interface
KNX device
Internet (over VPN connection
or dial-up modem)
DSL router or modem
I2_15414
KNX device
LAN
KNX device
The benefits:
• Parameters can be changed quickly and easily over remote
access
• Remote access saves travel times and costs
• Date security is ensured
Proceed as follows:
• Connect the N 148/21 IP interface to the KNX
• Connect the N 148/21 IP interface to the LAN
• Configure the VPN/DSL or dial-up router
You require the following:
• N 148/21 IP interface (5WG1 148-1AB21)
• 24 V power supply for N 148/21 IP interface
(e.g. 4AC2 402)
• ETS3 (current version see http://www.knx.org)
• VPN/DSL or ISDN/analog dial-up router
18
Note:
• LAN stands for Local Area Network. In LANs, data transport is organized
over the IP (Internet Protocol) – the standard network protocol on the Internet.
• VPN (Virtual Private Network) lets you set up a secure subnetwork over
an open, unsecured network (Internet, wireless network) by protecting
all communication against access or being tapped into by unauthorized
third parties. This is achieved by means of "tunneling" the data traffic over a
VPN server, which means that any connections must be authenticated and
that all data is also encoded.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
18/9
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
Visualization over Ethernet (LAN)
■ Overview
Visualization – up to 200 times faster with KNXnet/IP
When larger projects require the cyclic polling of large volumes
of data points for the purposes of visualization, this can often
lead to prolonged periods of waiting until the values are updated.
Use the LAN as the main and backbone line and link your
visualization PC to the LAN.
Visualization is then up to 200 times faster – and you can monitor
larger volumes of data points. No further need for data concentrators. The data volume is irrelevant and the LAN can easily
cope with that "little bit of KNX" on the side.
The solution:
LAN-capable PC with visualization
KNX
KNX
LAN (multicast-capable)
N 146
IP router
N 146
IP router
KNX device
I2_15415
KNX device
KNX device
The benefits:
• LAN as main and backbone line
• Visualization now up to 200 times faster
• High data volumes possible
• No data concentrators required
Proceed as follows:
• Commission the KNX devices, including the N 146 IP router
• Install visualization software
• Search for the N 146 IP router as visualization software and
connect
• Configuring the visualization
You require the following:
• N 146 IP router (5WG1 146-1AB01), 1 x per line
• 24 V power supply for N 146 IP interface (e.g. 4AC2 402)
• Ethernet network (LAN)
• PC LAN-capable
• IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software
(see chapter "Display, Operation")
• ETS3 (current version see http://www.knx.org)
Note:
LAN stands for Local Area Network. In LANs, data transport is organized over
the IP (Internet Protocol) – the standard network protocol on the Internet.
Multicast-capable: Multicast telegrams can simultaneously operate several IP
devices in the LAN. In the case of network components (network switches,
routers) this requires the appropriate configuration.
18
18/10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
Remote access to several locations
■ Overview
Remote operation and remote visualization
In many cases, several locations need to be managed
simultaneously. There are many such examples:
• Monitoring of cooling temperatures in several supermarkets or
storage houses
• Monitoring of fans for failure
• Monitoring of temperature and dampness in several
greenhouses.
It is now possible to carry out these monitoring tasks centrally
over the Internet/Intranet from absolutely anywhere. This saves
you human resources, time and money. And the Internet/Intranet
is available everywhere. Commissioning is further facilitated by
the fact that distributed locations can be configured identically.
The solution:
KNX
I2_15416
N 148/21
IP interface
KNX device
Location 1
KNX
KNX device
Internet VPN connection
or Intranet/LAN
N 148/21
IP interface
Location 2
KNX
KNX device
N 148/21
IP interface
Location 3
The benefits:
• Plants and locations can be remotely visualized, controlled
and monitored over existing networks
• Simple commissioning thanks to options for identical
configuration of different locations
Proceed as follows:
• Connect one N 148/21 IP interface per location to the KNX
• Connect the N 148/21 IP interface to the LAN
• Configure the N 148/21 IP interface over the Intranet/Internet
• Define the N 148/21 IP interface in your visualization
program/ETS3
Note:
• LAN stands for Local Area Network. In LANs, data transport is organized
over the IP (Internet Protocol) – the standard network protocol on the
Internet.
• VPN (Virtual Private Network) lets you set up a secure subnetwork over
an open, unsecured network (Internet, wireless network) by protecting
all communication against access or being tapped into by unauthorized
third parties. This is achieved by means of "tunneling" the data traffic over a
VPN server, which means that any connections must be authenticated and
that all data is also encoded.
You require the following:
• N 148/21 IP interface (5WG1 148-1AB21), 1 per location
• 24 V power supply for N 148/21 IP interface
(e.g. 4AC2 402)
• IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software
(see chapter "Display, Operation")
• ETS3 (current version see http://www.knx.org)
18
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
18/11
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
Monitoring locations over Ethernet (LAN)
■ Overview
Demand-oriented maintenance through remote signaling
Some distributed locations need to be regularly checked for
specific states and maintained accordingly. For example, the
states of oil tanks in distributed apartment houses, or the
operating hours of consumers. These states can now be signaled centrally at any location of your choice. This dispenses
with the need for inspections and maintenance at regular
intervals, for example, oil tanks in distributed apartment houses
only need to be topped up when necessary. And the fact that
this method of operation even permits consumers to wait for
favourable oil prices is just one further advantage.
The solution:
KNX
I2_15416
N 148/21
IP interface
KNX device
Location 1
KNX
KNX device
Internet VPN connection
or Intranet/LAN
N 148/21
IP interface
Location 2
KNX
KNX device
N 148/21
IP interface
Location 3
The benefits:
• Central status signaling of distributed locations
• Lower maintenance costs
• Optimization of maintenance costs
Proceed as follows:
• Connect one N 148/21 IP interface per location to the KNX
• Connect the N 148/21 IP interface to the LAN
• Configure the N 148/21 IP interface over the Intranet/Internet
• Define the N 148/21 IP interface in your visualization
program/ETS3
18
You require the following:
• N 148/21 IP interface (5WG1 148-1AB21), 1 per location
• 24 V power supply for N 148/21 IP interface
(e.g. 4AC2 402)
• IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software
(see chapter "Display, Operation")
• ETS3 (current version see http://www.knx.org)
18/12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
Note:
• LAN stands for Local Area Network. In LANs, data transport is organized
over the IP (Internet Protocol) – the standard network protocol on the
Internet.
• VPN (Virtual Private Network) lets you set up a secure subnetwork over
an open, unsecured network (Internet, wireless network) by protecting
all communication against access or being tapped into by unauthorized
third parties. This is achieved by means of "tunneling" the data traffic over a
VPN server, which means that any connections must be authenticated and
that all data is also encoded.
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
Fault indication over Ethernet (LAN)
■ Overview
Enhanced plant availability due to early fault detection
Whether dealing with a lamp failure in depots or offices, a
drop in pressure in filters, or pump failure - automated plants
in distributed locations are constantly subject to possible
faults/malfunctions. The earlier such faults are detected, the less
costly they are to remedy. If such plants are being controlled with
GAMMA instabus and are connected over LAN/IP, these types
of fault indications can be forwarded over the Internet. A fast
response means that the functionality of the plant is quickly restored and costs are kept to a minimum.
The solution:
KNX
I2_15416
N 148/21
IP interface
KNX device
Location 1
KNX
KNX device
Internet VPN connection
or Intranet/LAN
N 148/21
IP interface
Location 2
KNX
KNX device
N 148/21
IP interface
Location 3
The benefits:
• Central solution for distributed locations
• Fast forwarding of fault indications
• Fast responses mean less damage
Proceed as follows:
• Connect one N 148/21 IP interface per location to the KNX
• Connect the N 148/21 IP interface to the LAN
• Configure the N 148/21 IP interface over the Intranet/Internet
• Define the N 148/21 IP interface in your visualization
program/ETS3
Note:
• LAN stands for Local Area Network. In LANs, data transport is organized
over the IP (Internet Protocol) – the standard network protocol on the
Internet.
• VPN (Virtual Private Network) lets you set up a secure subnetwork over
an open, unsecured network (Internet, wireless network) by protecting
all communication against access or being tapped into by unauthorized
third parties. This is achieved by means of "tunneling" the data traffic over a
VPN server, which means that any connections must be authenticated and
that all data is also encoded.
You require the following:
• N 148/21 IP interface (5WG1 148-1AB21), 1 per location
• 24 V power supply for N 148/21 IP interface
(e.g. 4AC2 402)
• IPAS ComBridge Studio visualization software
(see chapter "Display, Operation")
• ETS3 (current version see http://www.knx.org)
18
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
18/13
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
Switch/dimming actuators for controlling
DALI lighting
■ Overview
Using DALI lighting without complicated DALI commissioning
The lighting control system uses ECGs with DALI interfaces, for
example, in order to be able to signal lamp failures.
Using the N 525E switch/dimming actuators, it is now possible
to use DALI devices in GAMMA instabus without any prior
knowledge of the DALI system and DALI commissioning.
The N 525E switch/dimming actuators switches and dims eight
mutually independent groups of fluorescent lamps with
dimmable ECG with DALI interface. Up to eight DALI ECGs
can be connected to each of the eight channels.
The solution:
N 525E switch/dimming actuator, 8 x DALI
I2_15419
KNX
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI ECG
DALI
max. 8 DALI ECGs per channel
The benefits:
• Real 0 to 100% luminosity control
• High operating safety due to selective disconnection in the
event of a fault
• Fault indications for light groups
• For individual room light control
Proceed as follows:
• Connect the N 525E switch/dimming actuator to the KNX
• Connect each group of DALI ECGs that are to be jointly
controlled, to an output of the
N 525E switch/dimming actuator
• Configure each channel as a conventional actuator in the ETS
and program the device
You require the following:
• N 525E switch/dimming actuators (5WG1 525-1EB01)
• Dimmable ECGs with DALI interface
• ETS3 (current version see http://www.knx.org)
18
Note:
DALI stands for Digital Adressable Lighting Interface. DALI is a digital
interface that is integrated in the controlgear of lamps and enables flexible
wiring and commissioning. As well as switching and dimming functions, they
are also able to detect and signal lighting failures.
18/14
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
Wireless remote control
■ Overview
GAMMA wave – making life simple
Occasionally, wires are not wanted for some applications in
buildings, or cables are expensive to install, e.g. cables to the
window for the window contact. Or no cables are possible, as is
the case with remote control applications.
In such cases, the GAMMA wave wireless system is the ideal
solution. The simplest way to integrate GAMMA wave in a
GAMMA instabus system is to use the UP 140 wave
coupler/instabus.
The solution:
UP 114 bus coupling unit
KNX
I2_15420
UP 140 wave / instabus coupler
KNX device
KNX radio
KNX device
KNX device
S 425
wave
hand-held
transmitter
The benefits:
• The ability to enjoy all the advantages of wireless applications
in GAMMA instabus projects, e.g. wave hand-held transmitter,
battery-operated wave door/window contacts, pushbuttons
(battery-operated)
• Group telegrams from GAMMA instabus to GAMMA wave and
vice versa
• Retrofitting without the need for new cables
• No separate device required as a gateway
Proceed as follows:
• Connect the UP 114 bus coupling units to the KNX
• Plug in the UP 140 wave/instabus coupler
• Configure the UP 140 wave coupler/instabus in the ETS3
(KNX commissioning software)
• Program the UP 140 wave/instabus coupler
• Teach GAMMA wave devices
(e.g. wave hand-held transmitters)
18
You require the following:
• UP 140 wave coupler/instabus (e.g. in the design DELTA style,
titanium white: 5WG3 140-2AB11)
• UP 114 bus coupling unit (5WG1 114-2AB02)
• Additional wave devices, depending on the application, e.g.
S 425 wave hand-held transmitters (5WG3 425-7AB71)
• ETS3 (current version see http://www.knx.org)
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
18/15
© Siemens AG 2008
Application Examples
Notes
18
7
18/16
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
19
© Siemens AG 2008
Technical Information
19/2
Switch actuators
19/4
Switch/dimming actuators
19/5
Shutter/blind actuators
19
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Technical Information
Switch actuators
■ Technical specifications
16
N 567/21 switch actuators
16
3680
600/
0.15
N 567/12 switch actuators
16
3680
600/
0.15
N 567/11 switch actuators
N 512 load switches
16
2500
400/
0.15
N 567 switch actuators
N 510/04 load switches
N 511/02 switch actuators
N 510/03 load switches
N 562 binary outputs
N 512/11 switch actuators,
main module
N 512/21 switch actuators,
expansion
Load data for switch actuators per channel
8
500
110/50
2
10
500
80/20
Contact current
Rated current, AC
A
16
AC3 operation (p.f. = 0.45)
VA
3680
Maximum switch-on peak current A/ms 1)
(if more than one, specification of
the highest current value)
10
500
1)
1)
8
500
1)
1)
1)
1)
Contact voltage
Rated voltage, AC
V
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
1
50
1
1
1
1)
2
10
20
30
0.1
0.1
1)
1)
1)
1)
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
3.5
3.3
26.4
20.4
41.5
1)
7.3
12.7
1)
1)
3680
12/100
24/16
200
2300
24/10
30/10
35
3680
12/100
24/10
140
3680
12/100
24/10
200
3680
12/100
24/10
200
1)
1840
5/100
24/8
35
1840
24/10
30/10
35
460
5/10
24/8
12
2300
3680
3680
2000
1000
1000
500
2500
2500
500
3680
3680
2000
3680
3680
2000
1000
1000
1000
200 ...
500
1000
1000
200 ...
500
500
500
200
1000
1000
500
VA
W
3680
2500
500
2 x 58
2500
1300
3680
2500
3680
2500
1)
500
2 x 58
500
2 x 58
200
200
500
2 x 58
VA
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
3680
59
31
21
9
1000
37
14
10
5
2500
59
31
21
9
3680
59
31
21
9
3680
59
31
21
9
1)
1000
22
14
10
5
1000
22
14
10
5
200
11
7
5
2
1000
VA
W
3680
3000
500
300
1600
1100
3680
3000
3680
3000
1)
1)
500
300
500
300
200
200
500
300
Unit(s) 25
15
25
25
25
1)
15
15
7
15
Unit(s) 14
Unit(s) 8
7
4
14
8
14
8
14
8
1)
7
4
7
4
3
2
7
4
Service life
Mechanical service life
Switching operations in millions
Electrical service life
Switching operations in millions
Power loss
Maximum power loss per device W
Switching capacities/
load types, loads
Resistive load
Minimum switching capacity
DC switching capacity
Maximum capacitive load
W
V/mA
V/A
µF
1)
1)
1)
1)
24/16
35
Incandescent lamps
Incandescent lamps
W
Halogen lamp, 230 V
W
LV halogen lamp with conventional VA
transformer (inductive)
1)
1)
T5/T8 fluorescent lamps
Uncorrected
Parallel corrected
(at max. possible C)
DUO circuit
ECG Osram QTI 1 x 28/54 W
ECG Osram QTP 1 x 18/24/36 W
ECG Osram QTP 1 x 58 W
ECG Osram QTP 2 x 18/24/58 W;
3 x 18 W; 4 x 18 W
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
14
10
5
Compact lamps
Uncorrected
Parallel corrected
(at max. possible C)
ECG Osram Duluxtronics DT
Mercury-vapor lamps
ECG Osram PTI 35/220-240S
ECG Osram PTI 70/220-240S
1)
On request.
For complete technical specifications, see:
http://www.siemens.com/gamma-td.
19
19/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1)
© Siemens AG 2008
Technical Information
N 670 universal I/O modules
230
230
230
10
1)
1)
30
10
0.1
0.1
1)
1)
0.1
0.1
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
9
2300
24/10
30/10
35
1)
3680
1380
3680
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
24/16
35
2300
24/10
30/10
35
3680
1)
1)
1)
105
14
24/16
35
2300
24/10
30/10
35
1000
1000
500
1000
1000
1000
1000
500
1000
1000
200 ...
500
2500
2200
1000
1200
1200
500
1000
1000
500
1000
1000
200 ...
500
500
2 x 58
1)
500
2 x 58
500
2 x 58
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
500
2 x 58
500
2 x 58
1000
37
14
10
5
1)
1000
1)
1000
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
14
10
5
1000
37
14
10
5
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
14
10
5
1000
37
14
10
5
500
300
1)
500
300
500
300
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
500
300
500
300
15
1)
15
15
1)
1)
15
15
7
4
1)
7
4
7
4
1)
1)
1)
1)
7
4
7
4
16
500
80/20
10
500
110/50
16
6
1)
1)
400/20
230
230
230
50
1)
30
0.1
1)
1)
GE 561/02 binary outputs
UP 562/31 switch actuators
230
UP 511/10 switch actuators
10
500
110/50
UP 562 binary outputs
UP 562/11 binary outputs
120/20
16
500
80/20
GE 561/01 wave switch actuators
GE 561/11 wave switch actuators
N 502 combination switch actuators
S 564 wave socket outlet switches
Switch actuators
10
500
16
1)
1)
230
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
19
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
19/3
© Siemens AG 2008
Technical Information
Switch/dimming actuators
■ Technical specifications
N 526E02 switch/dimming actuators
6
120/20
16
400/0.15
230
230
230
1)
10
1
0.05
0.4
1)
4.3
1)
1)
3680
12/500
30/16
48
1380
30/8
163
3680
12/100
24/10
140
2000
2000
1380
1380
500
2500
2500
500
N 525/02 switch/dimming actuators
N 526/02 switch/dimming actuators
Load data for switch/dimming actuators per channel
Contact current
Rated current, AC
A
16
Maximum switch-on peak current A/ms 1)
(if more than one, specification of
the highest current value)
Contact voltage
Rated voltage, AC
V
Service life
Mechanical service life
Switching operations in millions
Electrical service life
Switching operations in millions
Power loss
Maximum power loss per device W
Switching capacities/
load types, loads
Resistive load
Minimum switching capacity
DC switching capacity
Maximum capacitive load
W
V/mA
V/A
µF
1)
Incandescent lamps
Incandescent lamps
W
Halogen lamp, 230 V
W
LV halogen lamp with conventional VA
transformer (inductive)
1)
T5/T8 fluorescent lamps
Uncorrected
Parallel corrected
(at max. possible C)
DUO circuit
ECG Osram QTI 1 x 28/54 W
ECG Osram QTP 1 x 18/24/36 W
ECG Osram QTP 1 x 58 W
ECG Osram QTP 2 x 18/24/58 W;
3 x 18 W; 4 x 18 W
VA
W
2000
25 x 58
1380
1380
2500
1300
VA
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
Unit(s)
2000
59
13
10
5
1380
22
9
6
2
2500
59
31
21
9
VA
W
2000
920
1380
1380
1600
1100
Unit(s) 13
9
25
Unit(s) 8
Unit(s) 5
4
2
14
8
Compact lamps
Uncorrected
Parallel corrected
(at max. possible C)
ECG Osram Duluxtronics DT
Mercury-vapor lamps
ECG Osram PTI 35/220-240S
ECG Osram PTI 70/220-240S
1)
On request.
For complete technical specifications, see:
http://www.siemens.com/gamma-td.
19
19/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Technical Information
Shutter/blind actuators
■ Technical specifications
N 521 shutter/blind actuators
N 523/02 shutter/blind actuators
N 523/03 roller shutter actuators
N 523/04 shutter/blind actuators
N 523/11 shutter/blind actuators
N 522/03 shutter/blind actuators
N 524 shutter/blind actuators
UP 520 shutter/blind actuators
UP 520/11 shutter/blind actuators
UP 520/31 shutter/blind actuators
GE 521/02 shutter/blind switches
Load data for shutter/blind actuators per channel
A
VA
6 (AC)
500
6 (AC)
200
8 (AC)
200
1 (DC)
200
6 (AC)
500
6 (AC)
1000
6 (AC)
500
V
230 AC
230 AC
230 AC
24 DC
230 AC
230 AC
230 AC
50
20
20
20
10
1)
50
0.1
Contact current
Rated current
AC3 operation (p.f. ϕ = 0.45)
Contact voltage
Rated voltage
Service life
Mechanical service life
Switching operations in millions
Electrical service life
Switching operations in millions
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
1)
1.3
10.5
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1380
5/10
24/8
1840
5/10
24/8
24
5/10
24/8
1380
24/10
30/10
1)
1380
24/10
30/10
Power loss
Max. power loss per device
W
Switching capacities/load types,
loads
Resistive load
Minimum switching capacity
DC switching capacity
1)
W
1380
V/mA 24/10
V/A
30/10
1)
1)
On request.
For complete technical specifications, see:
http://www.siemens.com/gamma-td.
19
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
19/5
© Siemens AG 2008
Technical Information
Notes
19
7
19/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
20/2
Order information
20/3
Contacts
20/4
Online services
20/5
Customer support
20/6
Subject index
20/9
Order number index
20/17
Terms and conditions of
sale and delivery
Export regulations
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Order information
Trademarks
Internet
All product designations may be trademarks or product names
of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties
for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
When ordering products that differ from the standard designs,
the Order No. in the catalog must be supplemented by a "—Z";
the required characteristics must then be specified either by
means of brief alphanumeric data or in plain text.
Visit us on the Internet. Our addresses are as follows:
• For Building Technologies:
http://www.siemens.com/buildingtechnologies
• For Electrical Installation Technology:
http://www.siemens.com/e-installation
• For the offline mall CA 01:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/ca01
• For the online mall:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall
Ordering very small quantities
Notes
When ordering very small quantities, the cost of order processing often exceeds the order value. We therefore recommend that
you combine several small orders. Where this is not possible,
please note that we are obliged to make a small processing
charge: for orders with a net goods value of less than € 100.– we
charge a € 15.– supplement to cover our order processing and
invoicing costs.
All technical data, dimensions and weights are subject to
change without notice unless otherwise specified on the pages
of this catalog. All dimensions are specified in mm, the illustrations are for reference purposes only.
Ordering special designs
The technical data are for general information. The instruction
manuals and the instructions on the products must be observed
during assembly, operation and maintenance.
Explanations on the Selection and Ordering Data
DT (delivery time
class)
Preferred types are device types that can be delivered immediately ex works, i.e. they are dispatched
within 24 hours.
LK
Meaning
}
preferred type
A
two workdays
B
one week
C
three weeks
D
six weeks
X
on request
If ordered in normal quantities, the products are usually delivered within the specified delivery times,
calculated from the date we receive your order.
In exceptional cases, delivery times may vary from those specified.
The delivery times are valid ex works from Siemens AG (products ready for dispatch).
Shipping times depend on the destination and the method of shipping. The standard shipping time for
Germany is one day.
The delivery time classes specified in the catalog are valid as of 10/2008 and are constantly being
optimized. For more up-to-the-minute information, please visit our site at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall.
PU (price unit)
The PU column (price unit) specifies the quantity to which the price and weight refer.
PS/P. unit
(packaging size/
packaging unit)
The first digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) indicates the minimum order quantity. You can only order this
specified quantity or a multiple thereof.
The second digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) specifies the number of units contained in larger packaging
(e.g. in a carton). You must order this quantity or a multiple thereof if you want the item to be delivered in a larger packaging quantity.
Examples:
PS/P. unit
Significance
1
You can order one item or a multiple thereof.
5
For example, five units are packed in a bag. Because the bags cannot be opened, you can only order a multiple of
the quantity contained in the bag: 5, 10, 15, 20 etc.
5/100
One carton contains (for example) 20 bags, each containing 5 units, i.e. a total of 100 units. If only cartons are
available for delivery, you need to order a multiple of the carton quantity: 100, 200, 300, etc.
Ordering a quantity of 220 units, would produce the following delivery: two cartons, each containing 100 units
(= 200 units) and 4 bags, each containing 5 units (= 20 units).
20
PG (price group)
Each product is assigned to a price group.
Weight
The value specified in the Weight column specifies the weight in kg for the quantity specified in the PU column (price unit).
Dimensions
Unless stated otherwise, all dimensions are specified in mm.
20/2
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Contacts
Siemens contacts worldwide
■ Siemens contacts on the World Wide Web
At
http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner
you can find details of Siemens contact partners worldwide
responsible for particular technologies.
You can obtain in most cases a contact partner for
• Technical Support,
• Spare parts/repairs,
• Service,
• Training,
• Sales or
• Consultation/engineering.
You start by selecting a
• Country,
• Product or
• Sector.
By further specifying the remaining criteria you will find exactly
the right contact partner with his/her respective expertise.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
20/3
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Online Services
Information and ordering
in the Internet and on CD-ROM
■ Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies in the WWW
A detailed knowledge of the range of products and services
available is essential when planning and configuring automation
systems. It goes without saying that this information must always
be fully up-to-date.
Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies has
therefore built up a comprehensive range of information in the
World Wide Web, which offers quick and easy access to all data
required.
Under the address
http://www.siemens.com/automation
you will find everything you need to know about products, systems and services.
■ Product selection using the Offline Mall
Detailed information together with convenient interactive
functions:
The Offline Mall CA 01 covers more than 80 000 products and
thus provides a full summary of the Siemens Automation and
Drives product base.
Here you will find everything that you need to solve tasks in the
fields of automation, switchgear, installation and drives.
All information is linked into a user interface which is easy to
work with and intuitive.
After selecting the product of your choice you can order at the
press of a button, by fax or by online link.
Information on the Offline Mall CA 01 can be found in the Internet
under
http://www.siemens.com/automation/ca01
or on CD-ROM or DVD.
■ Easy shopping with the Online Mall
The Online Mall is the virtual department store of Siemens AG in
the Internet. Here you have access to a huge range of products
presented in electronic catalogs in an informative and attractive
way.
Data transfer via EDIFACT allows the whole procedure from
selection through ordering to tracking of the order to be carried
out online via the Internet.
Numerous functions are available to support you.
For example, powerful search functions make it easy to find the
required products, which can be immediately checked for availability. Customer-specific discounts and preparation of quotes
can be carried out online as well as order tracking and tracing.
Please visit the Online Mall on the Internet under:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall
20
20/4
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Customer Support
Our services for every phase of your project
■ Configuration and Software Engineering
Support in configuring and developing with customer-oriented
services from actual configuration to implementation of the automation project.1)
■ Service on Site
With Service On Site we offer
services for startup and maintenance, essential for ensuring
system availability.
.I
In the face of harsh competition you need optimum conditions to
keep ahead all the time:
A strong starting position. A sophisticated strategy and team for
the necessary support – in every phase.
Service & Support from Siemens provides this support with a
complete range of different services for automation and drives.
In Germany
+49 (0)180 50 50 4441)
(0.14 €/min from a German landline network, mobile telephone
prices my vary)
In every phase: from planning and startup to maintenance and
upgrading.
Our specialists know when and where to act to keep the productivity and cost-effectiveness of your system running in top form.
■ Online Support
■ Repairs and Spare Parts
In the operating phase of a machine or automation system we
provide a comprehensive repair
and spare parts service ensuring the highest degree of operating safety and reliability.
The comprehensive information
system available round the
clock via Internet ranging from
Product Support and Service &
Support services to Support
Tools in the Shop.
In Germany
+49 (0)180 50 50 4461)
(0.14 €/min from a German landline network, mobile telephone
prices my vary)
http://www.siemens.com/
automation/service&support
■ Optimization and Upgrading
■ Technical Support
To enhance productivity and
save costs in your project we offer high-quality services in optimization and upgrading.1)
Competent consulting in technical questions covering a wide
range of customer-oriented services for all our products and
systems.
Tel.: +49 (0)180 50 50 222
Fax: +49 (0)180 50 50 223
(0.14 €/min from a German landline network, mobile telephone
prices my vary)
http://www.siemens.com/
automation/support-request
■ Technical Consulting
Support in the planning and designing of your project from detailed actual-state analysis,
target definition and consulting
on product and system questions right to the creation of the
automation solution.1)
1)
For country-specific telephone numbers go to our Internet site at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
20/5
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Subject index
A
Actuators for HCVA 7/10 ... 7/12
Aluminum frames 1/27
Analog
Input devices 3/6
Output devices 2/7
Anti-glare/sun protection actuators 6/4 ... 6/7
B
Backbone couplers 14/12
Binary
Inputs 3/5
Output devices 2/3 ... 2/6
Outputs 2/6
wave inputs with battery 17/16
Binary input devices 3/1 ... 3/5
Binary inputs 3/5
Binary output devices 2/3 ... 2/6
Blanking cover plates 17/10
Bus coupling units 14/4
Bus terminals 15/3
Bus Transceiver Module Plus 14/4
C
Cable holders 1/35
Central weather/sun protection systems 6/8
Color elements
DELTA vita 1/23
Color frames 1/24
Combination devices 4/1 ... 4/7
Connectors 15/4
Cover strips 15/3
D
Data rails 15/5
DCF-77 aerials 13/7
DEHN overvoltage protection 15/6
DELTA ambiente
Blanking cover plates 17/10
Display units 1/20
Frames 1/30
Interfaces 11/10, 11/12
Motion detectors 12/5, 12/6
Pushbuttons 1/7
Pushbuttons with IR receiver 1/18, 11/15
Room temperature controllers 7/8
DELTA bus coupling units 1/9, 1/11, 14/5
DELTA i-system
Blanking cover plates 17/10
Fan coil unit controllers
Hotels 7/5
Offices 7/5
Motion detectors 12/5
Pushbuttons 1/5
Room temperature controllers 7/7
wave pushbuttons 17/8
wave shutter/blind pushbuttons 17/8
wave/instabus couplers 11/16, 17/24
DELTA line
Frames 1/22
Surface-mounting enclosures 1/31
DELTA millennium
Accessories 1/33 ... 1/35
Cable holders 1/35
Disassembly tools 1/35
Grounding sets 1/35
Masking modules 1/35
Pushbuttons 1/7
Room temperature controllers 7/8
Sets of end plates 1/35
Socket outlet covers 1/35
Trunking bases 1/35
Trunking lids 1/35
Wall junction covers 1/35
20
20/6
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
DELTA miro
Frames
Aluminum 1/27
Color 1/24
Glas 1/25
Wood 1/26
DELTA profil
Blanking cover plates 17/10
Display units 1/19
Fan coil unit controllers
Hotels 7/6
Offices 7/6
Frames 1/28
Interfaces 11/10, 11/12
Motion detectors 12/5
Pictographs for pushbuttons 1/32
Pushbuttons 1/6, 1/14, 1/17, 11/14
with IR receiver 1/17, 11/14
with motion detectors 1/15
with room temperature controllers 7/9
Room temperature controllers 7/7
Surface-mounting enclosures 1/31
Water sensors 9/4, 12/8
DELTA reflex
Smoke detectors "Batterie" 17/22
wave smoke detector modules 17/22
DELTA style
Blanking cover plates 17/10
Display units 1/20
Fan coil unit controllers
Hotels 7/6
Offices 7/6
Frames 1/29
Interfaces 11/10
Intermediate frames 1/29
Motion detectors 12/5
Physical sensors 9/4, 12/5, 12/8
Pictographs for pushbuttons 1/32
Pushbuttons 1/7, 1/14
with IR receiver 1/17, 11/15
with motion detectors 1/15
with room temperature controllers 7/9
Room temperature controllers 7/8
Surface-mounting enclosures 1/31
Water sensors 9/4, 12/8
DELTA vita
Color elements 1/23
Frames 1/23
Detector group terminals 4/6, 9/3
Devices for special applications 5/1 ... 10/6
Dimmers 5/5, 5/7
Trailing-edge 5/7
Disassembly tools 1/35
Display units 1/19
Display/control units 1/19, 1/20
Displays 1/19, 1/20
Dual sensors 5/17, 7/4, 12/7, 12/8
Dusk sensors 12/11
E
Event modules 13/4
Event, time and logic modules 13/4
F
Fan coil units
Controllers 7/12
Hotel operating devices 7/5, 7/6
Office operating devices 7/5, 7/6
Fire 9/5, 12/9
Fire combination alarms 9/5, 12/9
Frames 1/22 ... 1/30
DELTA ambiente 1/30
DELTA line 1/22
DELTA miro aluminum 1/27
DELTA miro color 1/24
DELTA miro glas 1/25
DELTA miro real wood 1/26
DELTA profil 1/28
DELTA style 1/29
DELTA vita 1/23
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Subject index
G
Gateways 11/12 ... 11/21
Glass frames 1/25
Grounding sets 1/35
H
Heating transformers 12/10, 12/11
Heating, cooling, ventilation, air-conditioning 7/1 ... 7/15
I
Indoor brightness sensors 4/6, 5/16, 12/7
Input devices 3/1 ... 3/5
Input/output devices 4/1 ... 4/7
Interface converters 11/12 ... 11/21
Interfaces
RS 232 11/12
USB 11/10
Intermediate frames 1/29
Intrusion 9/3
IP
Controllers 11/6, 13/4, 13/6, 14/15
Interfaces 11/6, 14/15
Routers 11/6, 14/12, 14/13, 14/15
IR
Hand-held transmitters 1/37
Receivers 11/14
Wall-mounted transmitters 1/37
K
KNX/DALI interfaces 11/8
KNX/EIB2S7 11/20
L
Leakage 9/4, 12/8
Light level control modules 5/15, 5/17
Light level controls 5/14 ... 5/18
Light sensors 12/11
Lighting 5/1 ... 5/18
Line couplers 14/12
Load management 8/1 ... 8/2
Load switches 2/5, 2/6
Logic modules 13/2, 13/3, 13/4
Logic operation modules 13/4
LOGO!
12/24 RC 13/10
230RC 13/10
AM2 Pt100 13/10
LOGO!/KNX communication modules 11/18, 13/11
M
Masking modules 1/35
Mast mountings 12/10, 12/11
Motion sensors 12/5
Mounting brackets 14/4
O
OBELISK 13/7
Outdoor brightness sensors 5/16, 5/18, 12/7
Outdoor temperature sensors 12/11
Output devices 2/1 ... 2/7
Physical sensors 12/1 ... 12/11
Brightness and outdoor temperature sensors 5/17, 7/4
Dusk sensors 12/11
Light sensors 12/11
Motion detectors 12/5, 12/6
Motion sensors 12/5
Outdoor temperature sensors 12/11
Rain sensors 12/11
Room temperature controllers 7/7, 7/8
Temperature sensors 7/4
Water sensors 9/4, 12/8
Pictographs 1/32
Power supply units 14/9
Presence detectors 12/6
Presence-simulation modules 9/3
Programmable logic controllers 13/8
Programming magnets 7/14
Pushbutton interfaces 3/5
Pushbuttons 1/5 ... 1/7
Multifunction 1/14, 1/15, 7/9
Surface mounting 1/11
with IR receiver 1/17, 11/14, 11/15
with motion detectors 1/15
with room temperature controllers 7/9
Q
Quick-assembly systems 10/1 ... 10/6
Modular 10/3, 10/4
R
Rain sensors 12/11
Remote controls
for DELTA reflex motion detector IP55, 290° IR 12/6
Roller shutter actuators 6/6
Room temperature controllers 7/7, 7/8
S
Safety 9/1 ... 9/5
Scene modules 13/2, 13/3, 13/4
Sensors for HCVA 7/3
Sets of end plates 1/35
Shutter/blind actuators 6/6, 6/7
Shutter/blind control sys inserts 17/20
Smoke detector modules "Relais" 17/22
SMS controls, flat 10/5 ... 10/6
Socket outlet covers 1/35
Spare remote controls
for DELTA reflex motion detector IP55, 290° IR 12/6
Special bases for DELTA reflex IP55 motion detector 12/6
Sun protection, anti-glare protection, utilization of daylight 6/1 ... 6/9
Surface-mounting enclosures 1/31, 5/15, 5/17, 12/6, 17/10
Switch actuators 2/5, 4/7
Switch/dimming actuators 4/6, 5/8 ... 5/13, 5/17, 11/8
sys switching inserts 17/14
T
Temperature sensors 7/4, 7/12, 12/8
Text displays 1/19, 1/20
Thermal drive actuators 4/6, 7/12
Time modules 13/4
Time/event modules 13/2, 13/3, 13/4
Touch panels
Design frames for 1/36
Trailing-edge phase dimmers 5/7
Trunking bases 1/35
Trunking lids 1/35
P
Paint covers 14/4
PC programming sets 13/7
Peak load limiters 8/2
U
Universal dimmer sys inserts 17/18
Universal dimmers 5/7
Universal I/O modules 2/7, 3/6, 4/6, 7/4, 7/12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
20/7
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Subject index
V
Valve actuators 7/14
Visualization
Server 1/43
Software 1/38 ... 1/42
W
Wall junction covers 1/35
Wall-mounted transmitters
wave 17/28
wave "Aktor" 17/14, 17/28
Water sensors 9/4, 12/8
wave
Binary inputs with battery 17/16
Couplers 11/16, 17/24
Door/window contacts with battery 17/20, 17/22
Hand-held radio transmitters 1/37, 17/11
Pushbuttons 17/8
reflex smoke detector modules 17/22
Repeaters 17/29
Shutter/blind pushbuttons 17/8
Socket outlet switches 17/15
Wall-mounted transmitters 17/28
Wall-mounted transmitters "Aktor" 17/14, 17/28
wave door/window contacts with battery 17/20, 17/22
wave hand-held radio transmitters 1/37, 17/11
wave pushbuttons 17/8
wave repeaters 17/29
wave shutter/blind pushbuttons 17/8
wave socket outlet switches 17/15
wave/instabus couplers 11/16, 17/24
Weather sensors 12/10
Weekly time switches 13/6
Wood frames 1/26
Y
Year time switches 13/6, 13/7
20
20/8
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Order number index
/
Order No.
Page
DT
5TG1 115-2
1/24
A
1
1/3
021
5TG1 121-0
1/27
}
1
1
021
5TC1
5TG1 122-0
1/27
}
1
1
021
5TC1 230
024
5TG1 123-0
1/27
}
1
1
021
1/27
}
1
1
021
Order No.
Page
DT
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/
P.unit
PG
6/9, 12/7
17/19
B
}
1
1
1
1
PU
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Unit(s) Unit(s)
Unit(s) Unit(s)
4AC2
4AC2 402
Price
per PU
027
5TC1 231
17/21
}
1
1
024
5TG1 124-0
5TC1 232
17/15
A
1
1
024
5TG1 125-0
1/27
}
1
1
021
5TC1 233
17/15
A
1
1
024
5TG1 125-1
1/27
}
1
1
021
5TC1 290
17/23
}
1
1
024
5TG1 125-2
1/27
}
1
1
021
024
5TG1 125-3
1/27
}
1
1
021
024
5TG1 141
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 142
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
5TC1 291
5TC1 293
5TC1 294
17/23
17/23
A
}
1
1
1
1
17/23
A
1
1
024
5TG1 143
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
12/6
A
1
1
024
5TG1 144
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
024
5TG1 145
1/23
A
1
1/5
021
024
5TG1 151
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 152
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
5TC7
5TC7 900
5TC7 901
5TC7 902
12/6
12/6
A
A
1
1
1
1
5TG1 1
5TG1 101-0
1/26
}
1
1
021
5TG1 153
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 101-1
1/26, 1/27
}
1
1
021
5TG1 154
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 101-2
1/26, 1/27
}
1
1
021
5TG1 155
1/23
A
1
1/5
021
021
5TG1 161
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 101-3
1/26, 1/27
}
1
1
5TG1 101-4
1/26
}
1
1
021
5TG1 162
5TG1 102-0
1/26
}
1
1
021
5TG1 163
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 102-1
1/26, 1/27
}
1
1
021
5TG1 164
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 102-2
1/26, 1/27
A
1
1
021
5TG1 165
1/23
A
1
1/5
021
021
5TG1 171
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
021
5TG1 172
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 102-3
5TG1 102-4
1/26, 1/27/
1/26
}
}
1
1
1
1
5TG1 103-0
1/26
A
1
1
021
5TG1 173
5TG1 103-1
1/26, 1/27
A
1
1
021
5TG1 174
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 103-2
1/26, 1/27
A
1
1
021
5TG1 175
1/23
A
1
1/5
021
021
5TG1 177
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
021
5TG1 178
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 103-3
5TG1 103-4
1/26, 1/27
1/26
A
A
1
1
1
1
5TG1 104-0
1/26
A
1
1
021
5TG1 180
5TG1 104-1
1/26, 1/27
A
1
1
021
5TG1 181
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 104-2
1/26, 1/27
A
1
1
021
5TG1 182
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 104-3
1/26, 1/27
A
1
1
021
5TG1 183
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
021
5TG1 184
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 104-4
1/26
A
1
1
5TG1 111-0
1/24
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 185
5TG1 111-1
1/24
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 186
1/23
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 111-2
1/24
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 187
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 112-0
1/24
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 188-1
1/23
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 112-1
1/24
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 2
5TG1 112-2
1/24
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 201
1/25
}
1
1
021
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 113-0
1/24
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 201-1
5TG1 113-1
1/24
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 201-2
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 113-2
1/24
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 201-3
1/25
}
1
1
021
021
5TG1 201-4
1/25
}
1
1
021
021
5TG1 202
1/25
}
1
1
021
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 114-0
5TG1 114-1
1/24
1/24
A
A
1
1
1/10
1/10
5TG1 114-2
1/24
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 202-1
5TG1 115-0
1/24
A
1
1/3
021
5TG1 202-2
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 115-1
1/24
A
1
1/3
021
5TG1 202-3
1/25
}
1
1
021
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
20/9
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Order number index
Order No.
Page
DT
Price
per PU
PU
5TG1 202-4
1/25
}
1
5TG1 203
1/25
}
5TG1 203-1
1/25
5TG1 203-2
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Order No.
Page
DT
1
021
5TG1 763
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
1
1
021
5TG1 764
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
}
1
1
021
5TG1 770
17/11
A
1
1/10
021
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 8
5TG1 203-3
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 801
1/28
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 203-4
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 802
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 204
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 803
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 204-1
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 804
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 204-2
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 810
17/11
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 204-3
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 825
1/31
}
1
1/5
021
5TG1 204-4
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 826
1/31
}
1
1/5
021
5TG1 205
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 831
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 205-1
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 832
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 205-2
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 833
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 205-3
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 834
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 205-4
1/25
}
1
1
021
5TG1 840
17/11
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 220
17/11
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 861
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 250
17/11
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 862
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 863
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
Unit(s) Unit(s)
PU
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Unit(s) Unit(s)
5TG1 3
5TG1 321
1/29
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 864
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 321-1
1/29
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 870
17/11
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 322
1/29
}
1
1/10
021
5TG2
5TG1 322-1
1/29
}
1
1/10
021
5TG2 551-0
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 323
1/29
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 551-1
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 323-1
1/29
}
1
1/10
021
5TG2 551-3
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 324
1/29
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 551-4
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 324-1
1/29
}
1
1/10
021
5TG2 551-6
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 325
1/29
A
1
1/5
021
5TG2 551-7
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 325-1
1/29
}
1
1/5
021
5TG2 552-0
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 328
1/29
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 552-1
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 328-1
1/29
}
1
1/10
021
5TG2 552-2
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 330
17/11
}
1
1/10
021
5TG2 552-3
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 361
1/29
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 552-4
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 362
1/29
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 552-5
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 363
1/29
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 552-6
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 364
1/29
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 552-7
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 365
1/29
A
1
1/5
021
5TG2 552-8
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 368
1/29
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 553-0
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 370
17/11
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 553-1
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5TG2 553-2
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 5
5TG1 510
17/11
A
1
1/5
021
5TG2 553-3
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 511
1/30
}
1
1/5
021
5TG2 553-6
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 512
1/30
}
1
1/5
021
5TG2 554-0
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5TG1 513
1/30
}
1
1/5
021
5TG2 554-1
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 514
1/30
A
1
1/5
021
5TG2 554-2
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 515
1/30
A
1
1/5
021
5TG2 554-3
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5TG2 554-6
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5TG1 7
20
Price
per PU
5TG1 701-1
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 555-0
1/22
A
1
1/5
021
5TG1 741-1
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 555-3
1/22
A
1
1/5
021
5TG1 761
1/28
A
1
1/10
021
5TG2 555-6
1/22
A
1
1/5
021
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
20/10
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Order number index
Order No.
Page
DT
Price
per PU
PU
5TG2 558
17/11
}
1
5TG2 581-0
1/22
}
5TG2 581-1
1/22
5TG2 582-0
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Order No.
Page
DT
1/10
021
5WG1 146-2EB01
11/9
B
1
1
022
1
1/10
021
5WG1 146-2EB11
11/9
}
1
1
022
A
1
1/10
021
5WG1 146-2EB21
11/9
B
1
1
022
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5WG1 146-2EB71
11/9
C
1
1
022
5TG2 582-1
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5WG1 148-1AB02
11/11
}
1
1
030
5TG2 582-2
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5WG1 148-1AB04
11/11
B
1
1
030
5TG2 583-0
1/22
}
1
1/10
021
5WG1 148-1AB11
11/9
}
1
1
030
5TG2 583-1
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5WG1 148-1AB21
11/5, 14/15
}
1
1
030
5TG2 583-2
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5WG1 151-1AB01
A
1
1
030
5TG2 584-0
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
1/43, 11/5,
14/15
5WG1 190-7AU01
11/20
X
1
1
030
5TG2 584-1
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5WG1 190-8AB01
15/5
}
1
5
030
5TG2 584-2
1/22
A
1
1/10
021
5WG1 190-8AB02
15/5
}
1
5
030
5TG2 585-0
1/22
A
1
1/5
021
5WG1 190-8AB03
15/5
}
1
5
030
5TG2 861
1/31
A
1
1/5
021
5WG1 190-8AB04
15/5
}
1
5
030
5TG2 862
1/31
A
1
1/3
021
5WG1 190-8AB11
15/5
B
1
5
030
5TG2 863
1/31
A
1
1/2
021
5WG1 190-8AB12
15/5
B
1
5
030
5TG2 901
1/31
}
1
1/5
021
5WG1 190-8AB13
15/5
B
1
5
030
5TG2 902
1/31
}
1
1/3
021
5WG1 190-8AB14
15/5
B
1
5
030
5TG2 903
1/31
A
1
1/2
021
5WG1 190-8AB21
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB22
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB23
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB24
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB31
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB32
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB33
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB34
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB41
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB42
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB43
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB44
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB51
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB52
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB53
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AB54
15/5
B
1
5
030
5WG1 190-8AD01
15/6
B
1
1
030
5WG1 191-5AB01
15/4
}
1
1
030
5WG1 191-5AB11
15/4
}
1
1
030
5WG1 192-8AA01
15/3
X
1
5
030
5WG1 193-8AB01
15/3
}
1
25
030
5WG1 195-3AB01
1/35
D
1m
1m
030
5WG1 195-8AB01
1/35
D
1
1
030
5WG1 195-8AB11
1/35
D
1
1
030
5WG1 195-8AB21
1/35
D
1
1
030
5WG1 195-8AB31
1/35
D
1
1
030
5WG1 195-8AB41
1/35
D
1
1
030
Unit(s) Unit(s)
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Unit(s) Unit(s)
5Wg1 1
5WG1 110-2AB03
14/4
}
1
1
030
5WG1 110-2AB11
14/4
}
1
1
030
5WG1 114-2AB02
14/4
}
1
1
030
5WG1 115-3AB01
1/11
}
1
1
022
5WG1 115-3AB11
1/11
}
1
1
022
5WG1 115-3AB21
1/11
}
1
1
022
5WG1 115-3AB31
1/11
}
1
1
022
5WG1 116-2AB01
1/9, 14/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 116-2AB11
1/9, 14/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 116-2AB21
1/9, 14/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 116-2AB31
1/9, 14/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 117-2AB11
14/4
}
1
1
030
5WG1 120-1AB02
14/10
}
1
1
030
5WG1 125-1AB01
14/9
}
1
1
030
5WG1 125-1AB11
14/9
}
1
1
030
5WG1 125-1AB21
14/9
}
1
1
030
5WG1 140-1AB03
14/13
}
1
1
030
5WG1 140-1AB13
14/13
}
1
1
030
5WG1 140-7AU02
11/20
C
1
1
030
5WG1 140-7AU22
11/20
C
1
1
030
5WG1 141-1AB01
5/13, 11/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 141-4AB01
11/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 142-2AB01
11/11
B
1
1
022
5WG1 142-2EB01
11/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 146-1AB01
11/5, 14/13,
14/15
}
1
1
030
5WG1 146-2AB01
11/11
B
1
1
022
5WG1 195-8AB51
1/35
D
1
1
030
5WG1 146-2AB11
11/11
}
1
1
022
5WG1 196-2AB01
14/4
B
1
10
030
5WG1 146-2AB21
11/11
B
1
1
022
5WG1 197-8AB01
1/35
D
1m
1m
030
5WG1 146-2AB71
11/11
C
1
1
022
5WG1 198-8AB01
1/35
D
1
1
030
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
20/11
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Order number index
Order No.
Page
DT
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Order No.
Page
DT
5WG1 237-2AB31
7/7
A
Unit(s) Unit(s)
PU
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Unit(s) Unit(s)
1
1
022
5WG1 220-2AB02
3/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 237-2EB11
7/5
A
1
1
022
5WG1 220-2AB03
3/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 237-2EB21
7/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 220-2AB13
3/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 237-2EB31
7/5
A
1
1
022
5WG1 221-2AB01
1/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 237-2FB11
7/5
A
1
1
022
5WG1 221-2AB11
1/5
}
1
1
022
5WG1 237-2FB21
7/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 221-2AB21
1/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 237-2FB31
7/5
A
1
1
022
5WG1 221-2AB31
1/5
A
1
1
022
5WG1 241-2AB01
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 221-2EB01
1/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 241-2AB11
1/6
}
1
1
022
5WG1 221-2EB11
1/5
}
1
1
022
5WG1 241-2AB21
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 221-2EB21
1/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 241-2AB71
1/6
A
1
1
022
5WG1 221-2EB31
1/5
A
1
1
022
5WG1 242-2AB01
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 222-2AB01
1/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 242-2AB11
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 222-2AB11
1/5
}
1
1
022
5WG1 242-2AB21
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 222-2AB21
1/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 242-2AB71
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 222-2AB31
1/5
A
1
1
022
5WG1 243-2AB01
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 222-2EB01
1/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 243-2AB11
1/6
}
1
1
022
5WG1 222-2EB11
1/5
}
1
1
022
5WG1 243-2AB21
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 222-2EB21
1/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 243-2AB71
1/6
A
1
1
022
5WG1 222-2EB31
1/5
A
1
1
022
5WG1 244-2AB01
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 223-2AB01
1/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 244-2AB11
1/6
}
1
1
022
5WG1 223-2AB11
1/5
}
1
1
022
5WG1 244-2AB21
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 223-2AB21
1/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 244-2AB71
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 223-2AB31
1/5
A
1
1
022
5WG1 245-2AB01
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 230-2AB02
1/15
B
1
1
022
5WG1 245-2AB11
1/6
}
1
1
022
5WG1 230-2AB12
1/15
B
1
1
022
5WG1 245-2AB21
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 230-2AB22
1/15
B
1
1
022
5WG1 245-2AB71
1/6
A
1
1
022
5WG1 230-2AB72
1/15
B
1
1
022
5WG1 246-2AB01
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 230-2EB11
1/15
B
1
1
022
5WG1 246-2AB11
1/6
}
1
1
022
5WG1 230-2EB21
1/15
B
1
1
022
5WG1 246-2AB21
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 231-2AB03
1/14, 7/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 246-2AB71
1/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 231-2AB13
1/14, 7/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 250-8AB01
7/8
D
1
1
030
5WG1 231-2AB23
1/14, 7/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 251-3AB11
12/6
A
1
1
030
5WG1 231-2AB73
1/14, 7/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 251-3AB21
12/6
A
1
1
030
5WG1 231-2EB13
1/14, 7/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2AB03
7/7
B
1
1
022
5WG1 231-2EB23
1/14, 7/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2AB13
7/7
}
1
1
022
5WG1 233-2AB01
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2AB23
7/7
B
1
1
022
5WG1 233-2AB11
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2AB73
7/7
A
1
1
022
5WG1 233-2AB21
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2EB01
7/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 233-2AB71
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2EB11
7/6
}
1
1
022
5WG1 234-2AB01
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2EB21
7/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 234-2AB11
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2EB71
7/6
A
1
1
022
5WG1 234-2AB21
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2FB01
7/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 234-2AB71
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2FB11
7/6
}
1
1
022
5WG1 235-2AB01
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2FB21
7/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 235-2AB11
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2FB71
7/6
A
1
1
022
5WG1 235-2AB21
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-2HV11
1/14
C
1
1
030
5WG1 235-2AB71
1/17, 11/13
B
1
1
022
5WG1 252-4AB02
5/18, 12/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 237-2AB11
7/7
}
1
1
022
5WG1 253-2AB03
7/8
B
1
1
022
5WG1 237-2AB21
7/7
B
1
1
022
5WG1 253-4AB01
5/18, 12/7
}
1
1
030
5Wg1 2
20
Price
per PU
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
20/12
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Order number index
Order No.
Page
DT
Price
per PU
PU
5WG1 254-2AB13
7/8
}
1
5WG1 254-2AB23
7/8
B
5WG1 254-2AB43
7/8
5WG1 254-2EB11
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Order No.
Page
DT
1
022
5WG1 258-3AB41
12/11
B
1
1
030
1
1
022
5WG1 258-3EB21
5/17, 12/6
}
1
5
030
B
1
1
022
5WG1 258-7AB02
12/11
B
1
1
030
7/6
A
1
1
022
5WG1 258-7AB03
12/11
B
1
1
030
5WG1 254-2EB21
7/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 258-7AB13
12/11
B
1
1
030
5WG1 254-2EB41
7/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 258-8AB01
12/11
B
1
1
030
5WG1 254-2FB11
7/6
A
1
1
022
5WG1 258-8AB21
12/11
B
1
1
030
5WG1 254-2FB21
7/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 260-1AB01
3/5
X
1
1
030
5WG1 254-2FB41
7/6
B
1
1
022
5WG1 261-1AB01
3/5
X
1
1
030
5WG1 254-3EY02
5/17, 7/4,
12/7, 12/8
}
1
1
030
5WG1 262-1EB01
3/5
}
1
1
030
5/18, 12/7
}
1
1
030
3/5
}
5WG1 254-4AB01
5WG1 262-1EB11
1
1
030
12/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 262-4AB02
3/5
}
5WG1 255-2AB01
1
1
030
5WG1 263-1EB01
3/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 263-1EB11
3/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 264-1EB11
3/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 266-1AB01
4/6, 9/3
B
1
1
030
5WG1 272-2AB01
9/4, 12/8
B
1
1
022
5WG1 272-2AB11
9/4, 12/8
}
1
1
022
5WG1 272-2AB21
9/4, 12/8
B
1
1
022
5WG1 272-2AB71
9/4, 12/8
C
1
1
022
5WG1 281-8AB01
1/7
D
1
1
030
030
5WG1 282-8AB01
1/7
D
1
1
030
030
5WG1 283-8AB01
1/7
D
1
1
030
030
5WG1 284-2AB01
1/7
B
1
1
022
022
5WG1 284-2AB03
1/7
B
1
1
022
022
5WG1 284-2EB01
1/18, 11/14
B
1
1
022
1/18, 11/14
B
1
1
022
Unit(s) Unit(s)
5WG1 255-2AB02
5WG1 255-2AB11
5WG1 255-2AB12
12/5
12/5
12/5
B
}
}
1
1
1
1
1
1
022
022
022
12/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 255-2AB22
12/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 255-2AB72
5WG1 255-4AB01
5WG1 255-4AB02
5WG1 255-4AB11
5WG1 255-4AB12
5WG1 256-2AB01
5WG1 256-2AB02
12/5
12/5
A
A
4/6, 5/13,
5/17
}
4/6, 5/13,
5/17
C
5/16, 12/7
5/16, 12/7
12/5
12/5
B
B
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PU
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Unit(s) Unit(s)
5WG1 255-2AB21
5WG1 255-2AB71
Price
per PU
022
022
030
5WG1 256-3AB01
9/5, 12/9
X
1
1
030
5WG1 284-2EB03
5WG1 257-2AB13
12/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 285-2AB11
1/7
}
1
1
022
022
5WG1 285-2AB21
1/7
B
1
1
022
022
5WG1 285-2AB41
1/7
B
1
1
022
022
5WG1 285-2EB11
1/17, 11/14
C
1
1
022
1/17, 11/14
B
1
1
022
5WG1 257-2AB14
5WG1 257-2AB21
5WG1 257-2AB22
12/5
12/5
12/5
B
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
1
5WG1 257-2AB41
12/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 285-2EB21
5WG1 257-2AB42
12/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 285-2EB41
1/17
B
1
1
022
030
5WG1 286-2AB11
1/7
}
1
1
022
030
5WG1 286-2AB21
1/7
B
1
1
022
030
5WG1 286-2AB41
1/7
B
1
1
022
1/17, 11/14
C
1
1
022
5WG1 257-3AB01
5WG1 257-3AB11
5WG1 257-3AB21
6/9
6/9
6/9
B
B
B
1
1
1
1
1
1
5WG1 257-3AB31
6/9
B
1
1
030
5WG1 286-2EB11
5WG1 257-3AB41
12/7
B
1
1
030
5WG1 286-2EB21
1/17, 11/14
B
1
1
022
030
5WG1 286-2EB41
1/17
B
1
1
022
030
5WG1 287-2AB11
1/7
}
1
1
022
030
5WG1 287-2AB21
1/7
B
1
1
022
022
5WG1 287-2AB41
1/7
B
1
1
022
1/18, 11/14
}
1
1
022
5WG1 258-1AB02
5WG1 258-2AB11
5WG1 258-2AB21
5WG1 258-2HB11
7/4, 12/8
5/17, 12/6
5/17, 12/6
12/5
B
}
}
}
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5WG1 258-2HB12
12/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 287-2EB11
5WG1 258-2HB21
12/5
B
1
1
022
5WG1 287-2EB21
1/18, 11/14
B
1
1
022
022
5WG1 287-2EB41
1/18
B
1
1
022
022
5WG1 293-8AB00
1/32
B
100
10
022
022
5WG1 293-8AB01
1/32
B
100
10
022
1/32
B
100
10
022
5WG1 258-2HB22
5WG1 258-2HB31
5WG1 258-2HB32
12/5
12/5
12/5
B
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
1
5WG1 258-3AB11
12/11
B
1
1
030
5WG1 293-8AB02
5WG1 258-3AB21
12/11
B
1
1
030
5WG1 293-8AB03
1/32
B
100
10
022
030
5WG1 293-8AB04
1/32
B
100
10
022
5WG1 258-3AB31
12/11
B
1
1
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
20/13
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Order number index
Order No.
Page
DT
Price
per PU
PU
5WG1 293-8AB05
1/32
B
100
5WG1 293-8AB06
1/32
B
5WG1 293-8AB07
1/32
5WG1 293-8AB08
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Order No.
Page
DT
10
022
5WG1 523-1AB03
6/6
}
1
1
030
100
10
022
5WG1 523-1AB04
6/6
}
1
1
030
B
100
10
022
5WG1 524-1AB01
6/6
A
1
1
030
1/32
B
100
10
022
5WG1 525-1AB02
5/13
X
1
1
030
5WG1 293-8AB10
1/32
B
100
10
022
5WG1 525-1EB01
5/13, 11/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 294-8AB01
14/4
B
1
10
030
5WG1 525-2AB01
5/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 525-2AB11
5/7
}
1
1
030
Unit(s) Unit(s)
PU
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Unit(s) Unit(s)
5Wg1 3
5WG1 301-1AB01
13/4
}
1
1
030
5WG1 525-2AB31
5/7
}
5WG1 302-1AB01
13/4
B
1
1
030
5WG1 526-1AB02
1
1
030
13/4
}
1
1
030
4/6, 5/13,
5/17
}
5WG1 305-1AB01
5WG1 526-1EB02
5/13
}
1
1
030
5WG1 341-1AB01
13/4
}
1
1
030
5WG1 527-1AB02
5/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 342-1AB01
5/17
B
1
1
030
5WG1 528-1AB02
5/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 343-1AB01
16/3
B
1
1
030
5WG1 540-5AS01
7/12
B
1
1
030
5WG1 345-1AB01
9/3
}
1
1
030
5WG1 540-5AS11
7/12
A
1
1
030
5WG1 347-1AB02
13/4
}
1
1
030
5WG1 540-8AS01
7/12
A
1
1
030
5WG1 350-1AB01
13/4
B
1
1
030
5WG1 560-7AH01
7/14
}
1
1
030
5WG1 350-1EB01
11/5, 13/4,
13/6, 14/15
}
1
1
030
5WG1 560-7AH02
7/14
}
1
1
030
5WG1 360-1AB01
8/2
B
1
1
030
5WG1 561-4AB02
2/6
}
1
1
030
5WG1 371-5EY01
13/6
}
1
1
030
5WG1 561-7AH01
7/15
B
1
5WG1 372-5EY01
13/6
}
1
1
030
5WG1 561-7AH02
7/15
B
1
5WG1 372-5EY02
13/6
}
1
1
030
5WG1 561-7AH03
7/15
B
1
5WG1 373-5EY01
13/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 561-7AH04
7/15
B
1
5WG1 390-3EY01
13/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 561-8AH01
7/15
B
1
5WG1 561-8AH02
7/15
B
1
5Wg1 4
1
5WG1 420-3AB11
1/37
A
1
2
030
5WG1 561-8AH03
7/15
B
1
5WG1 420-3AB12
1/37
C
1
2
030
5WG1 561-8AH04
7/15
B
1
5WG1 421-3AB11
1/37
A
1
2
030
5WG1 561-8AH05
7/15
B
1
5WG1 421-3AB12
1/37
C
1
2
030
5WG1 561-8AH06
7/15
B
5WG1 422-3AB11
1/37
A
1
2
030
5WG1 562-1AB01
2/6
}
1
1
030
5WG1 422-3AB12
1/37
C
1
2
030
5WG1 562-2AB01
2/6
}
1
1
030
5WG1 425-7AB21
1/37
}
1
1
030
5WG1 562-2AB11
2/6
}
1
1
030
5WG1 440-7AB01
11/13
}
1
1
030
5WG1 562-2AB31
2/6, 4/7
}
5WG1 450-1AB02
11/13
}
1
1
030
5WG1 562-7EY01
7/14
A
1
1
030
5WG1 490-8AA81
1/37
D
1
1
030
5WG1 567-1AB01
2/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 567-1AB11
2/5
}
1
1
030
5Wg1 5
20
Price
per PU
1
1
5WG1 502-1AB01
4/6
B
1
1
030
5WG1 567-1AB12
2/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 510-1AB03
2/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 567-1AB21
2/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 510-1AB04
2/5
}
1
1
030
5WG1 584-2AB21
1/20
B
1
1
022
5WG1 511-1AB02
2/6
B
1
1
030
5WG1 584-2AB41
1/20
B
1
1
022
5WG1 511-2AB10
2/6, 4/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 585-2AB01
1/19
B
1
1
022
5WG1 512-1AB01
2/6
}
1
1
030
5WG1 585-2AB11
1/19, 1/20
}
1
1
022
5WG1 512-1AB11
2/5
B
1
1
030
5WG1 585-2AB21
1/19
B
1
1
022
5WG1 512-1AB21
2/5
B
1
1
030
5WG1 585-2AB71
1/19
B
1
1
022
5WG1 520-2AB01
6/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 586-2AB01
1/20
B
1
1
022
5WG1 520-2AB11
6/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 587-2AB01
1/19
B
1
1
022
5WG1 520-2AB31
6/7
}
5WG1 587-2AB02
1/19
B
1
1
022
5WG1 521-1AB01
6/6
}
1
1
030
5WG1 587-2AB11
1/19
}
1
1
022
5WG1 521-4AB02
6/7
}
1
1
030
5WG1 587-2AB12
1/19
}
1
1
022
5WG1 522-1AB03
6/6
}
1
1
030
5WG1 587-2AB21
1/19
B
1
1
022
5WG1 523-1AB02
6/6
}
1
1
030
5WG1 587-2AB22
1/19
B
1
1
022
1
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
20/14
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Order number index
Order No.
Page
DT
Price
per PU
PU
5WG1 587-2AB31
1/19
A
1
5WG1 587-2AB32
1/19
A
5WG1 588-2AB11
1/36
}
5WG1 588-2AB12
1/36
B
5WG1 588-2AB21
1/36
B
5WG1 588-2AB22
1/36
B
5WG1 588-8AB01
1/36
}
5WG1 588-8AB02
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Order No.
Page
DT
1
022
5WG3 140-2AB71
11/15, 17/25 A
1
1
022
1
1
022
5WG3 140-2GB11
11/15, 17/25 }
1
1
022
1
1
030
5WG3 140-2GB21
11/15, 17/25 B
1
1
022
5WG3 140-2GB41
17/25
B
1
1
022
5WG3 140-2HB11
11/15, 17/25 }
1
1
022
5WG3 140-2HB21
11/15, 17/25 B
1
1
022
5WG3 140-2HB31
11/15, 17/25 A
1
1
022
1/36
5WG3 141-2AB01
17/30
A
1
1
030
5WG1 588-8AB03
1/36
5WG3 210-2AB01
17/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 588-8AB04
1/36
5WG3 210-2AB11
17/9
}
1
1
022
5WG1 588-8AB05
1/36
5WG3 210-2AB21
17/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 588-8EB01
1/36
C
1
1
030
5WG3 210-2AB71
17/9
A
1
1
022
5WG1 590-8AH01
7/14
C
1
1
030
5WG3 210-2GB11
17/9
}
1
1
022
5WG3 210-2GB21
17/9
B
1
1
022
Unit(s) Unit(s)
1
030
1
1
1
PU
PS*/
P.unit
PG
Unit(s) Unit(s)
1
1
Price
per PU
030
5Wg1 6
5WG1 605-1AB01
4/6, 7/12
}
1
1
030
5WG3 210-2GB41
17/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 605-1AB11
4/6, 7/12
}
1
1
030
5WG3 210-2HB11
17/9
}
1
1
022
5WG1 611-3AL01
10/4
B
1
1
030
5WG3 210-2HB21
17/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 611-3AL11
10/4
B
1
1
030
5WG3 210-2HB31
17/9
A
1
1
022
5WG1 611-3AL21
10/4
B
1
1
030
5WG3 211-2AB01
17/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 611-3AL31
10/4
B
1
1
030
5WG3 211-2AB11
17/9
}
1
1
022
5WG1 611-3AL51
10/4
B
1
1
030
5WG3 211-2AB21
17/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 611-3AL61
10/4
B
1
1
030
5WG3 211-2AB71
17/9
A
1
1
022
5WG1 631-3AL01
10/6
B
1
1
030
5WG3 211-2GB11
17/9
A
1
1
022
5WG1 631-3AL02
10/6
B
1
1
030
5WG3 211-2GB21
17/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 631-3AL11
10/6
B
1
1
030
5WG3 211-2GB41
17/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 631-3AL12
10/6
B
1
1
030
5WG3 211-2HB11
17/9
}
1
1
022
5WG1 631-3AL21
10/6
B
1
1
030
5WG3 211-2HB21
17/9
B
1
1
022
5WG1 631-3AL22
10/6
B
1
1
030
5WG3 211-2HB31
17/9
A
1
1
022
5WG1 631-3AL32
10/6
B
1
1
030
5WG3 221-3HB11
17/10
}
1
1
030
5WG1 631-3AL43
10/6
B
1
1
030
5WG3 222-3HB11
17/10
}
1
1
030
5WG1 631-3AL44
10/6
B
1
1
030
5WG3 255-8AB01
17/23
A
1
1
030
5WG1 631-3AL51
10/6
B
1
1
030
5WG3 260-3AB11
17/21, 17/23 }
1
1
030
5WG1 631-3AL52
10/6
B
1
1
030
5WG3 260-3AB81
17/21, 17/23 B
1
1
030
5WG1 631-3AL62
10/6, 11/16
B
1
1
030
5WG3 261-3AB11
17/17
}
1
1
030
5WG1 670-1AB03
2/7, 3/6, 4/6, }
7/4, 7/12
1
1
030
5WG3 425-7AB21
1/37, 17/12
}
1
1
030
5WG3 425-7AB71
1/37, 17/12
}
1
1
030
5WG3 520-4AB01
17/21
A
1
1
030
5WG3 560-2AB01
17/15, 17/29 }
1
1
030
5WG3 561-4AB01
17/15
}
1
1
030
5WG3 561-4AB11
17/15, 17/26 }
1
1
030
5WG3 564-7AB11
17/16
A
1
1
030
11/17, 13/11 B
1
1
475
5Wg1 8
5WG1 810-0EY01
13/7
B
1
1
030
5WG1 810-8EY01
13/7
B
1
1
030
5WG1 810-8EY02
5WG1 523-1AB11
13/7
6/6
B
}
1
1
1
1
030
030
5Wg1 3
5WG3 110-2AB01
17/29
}
1
1
030
6AV6
6AV6643-7AC100AA0
5WG3 110-2AB11
17/29
B
1
1
030
5WG3 110-8AB01
1/31, 17/11
D
1
1
022
6BK1
5WG3 110-8AB11
1/31, 17/11
A
1
1
022
5WG3 110-8AB21
1/31, 17/11
D
1
1
022
6BK1700-0BA000AA1
5WG3 110-8AB71
1/31, 17/11
D
1
1
022
5WG3 140-2AB01
11/15, 17/25 B
1
1
022
5WG3 140-2AB11
11/15, 17/25 }
1
1
022
5WG3 140-2AB21
11/15, 17/25 B
1
1
022
11/19
6ED1
6ED1 050-1AA00- 13/11
0AE6
A
1
1
2A0
6ED1 050-1AA00- 13/11
0BE6
A
1
1
2A0
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
20/15
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Order number index
Order No.
Page
DT
Price
per PU
PU
PS*/
P.unit
PG
6ED1 052-1FB000BA5
13/10
A
1
1
200
6ED1 052-1MD00- 13/10
0BA5
A
1
1
200
13/10
A
1
1
200
6ED1 055-1MA00- 13/10
0BA0
A
1
1
200
6ED1 055-1MB00- 13/10
0BA1
A
1
1
200
6ED1 055-1MD00- 13/10
0BA0
A
1
1
200
6ED1 055-1MM00- 13/11
0BA0
A
1
1
200
6ED1 056-5CA00- 13/11
0BA0
A
1
1
200
6ED1 057-1AA00- 13/11
0BA0
A
1
1
200
13/11
A
1
1
2A0
6EP1 321-1SH02
13/11
}
1
1
401
6EP1 331-1SH02
13/11
}
1
1
401
7KT1 162
16/4
B
1
1
027
7KT1 165
16/4
B
1
1
027
Unit(s) Unit(s)
6ED1 055-1FB000BA1
6ED1 058-0BA010YA0
6EP1
7KT1
ZNX
20
ZNX:63101-32-70
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-71
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-72
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-73
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-74
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-75
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-76
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-77
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-78
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-79
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-80
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-81
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-82
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-83
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-84
1/42
ZNX:63101-32-85
1/42
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
20/16
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Terms and conditions of sale and delivery
Export regulations
■ Terms and conditions of sale and delivery
By using this catalog you can acquire hardware and software
products described therein from Siemens AG subject to the following terms. Please note! The scope, the quality and the conditions for supplies and services, including software products, by
any Siemens entity having a registered office outside of Germany, shall be subject exclusively to the General Terms and
Conditions of the respective Siemens entity. The following terms
apply exclusively for orders placed with Siemens AG.
For customers with a seat or registered office in Germany
The "General Terms of Payment" as well as the "General Conditions for the Supply of Products and Services of the Electrical
and Electronics Industry" shall apply.
For software products, the "General License Conditions for Software Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a
Seat or registered Office in Germany" shall apply.
For customers with a seat or registered office outside of
Germany
The "General Terms of Payment" as well as the "General Conditions for Supplies of Siemens, Automation and Drives for Customers with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany" shall
apply.
For software products, the "General License Conditions for Software Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a
Seat or registered Office outside of Germany" shall apply.
General
The dimensions are in mm. In Germany, according to the German law on units in measuring technology, data in inches only
apply to devices for export.
Illustrations are not binding.
Insofar as there are no remarks on the corresponding pages,
- especially with regard to data, dimensions and weights given these are subject to change without prior notice.
The prices are in € (Euro) ex works, exclusive packaging.
The sales tax (value added tax) is not included in the prices.
It shall be debited separately at the respective rate according to
the applicable legal regulations.
Prices are subject to change without prior notice. We will debit
the prices valid at the time of delivery.
Surcharges will be added to the prices of products that contain
silver, copper, aluminum, lead and/or gold if the respective basic
official prices for these metals are exceeded. These surcharges
will be determined based on the official price and the metal factor of the respective product.
The surcharge will be calculated on the basis of the official price
on the day prior to receipt of the order or prior to the release
order. The metal factor determines the official price as of which
the metal surcharges are charged and the calculation method
used. The metal factor, provided it is relevant, is included with
the price information of the respective products.
An exact explanation of the metal factor and the text of the
Comprehensive Terms and Conditions of Sale and Delivery are
available free of charge from your local Siemens business office
under the following Order Nos.:
• 6ZB5310-0KR30-0BA1
(for customers based in Germany)
• 6ZB5310-0KS53-0BA1
(for customers based outside Germany)
or download them from the Internet
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall
(Germany: A&D Mall Online-Help System)
■ Export regulations
The products listed in this catalog / price list may be subject to
European / German and/or US export regulations.
Therefore, any export requiring a license is subject to approval
by the competent authorities.
According to current provisions, the following export regulations
must be observed with respect to the products featured in this
catalog / price list:
AL
Number of the German Export List
Products marked other than "N" require an export
license.
In the case of software products, the export designations of the relevant data medium must also
be generally adhered to.
Goods labeled with an "AL" not equal to "N" are
subject to a European or German export authorization when being exported out of the EU.
ECCN
Export Control Classification Number
Products marked other than "N" are subject to a
reexport license to specific countries.
In the case of software products, the export
designations of the relevant data medium must
also be generally adhered to.
Goods labeled with an "ECCN" not equal to "N"
are subject to a US re-export authorization.
Even without a label or with an "AL: N" or "ECCN: N", authorization may be required due to the final destination and purpose for
which the goods are to be used.
The deciding factors are the AL or ECCN export authorization
indicated on order confirmations, delivery notes and invoices.
Errors excepted and subject to change without prior notice.
A&D/VuL_ohne MZ/En 05.09.06
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
20/17
20
© Siemens AG 2008
Appendix
Notes
20
20/18
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Explanations
DT (delivery time
class)
Preferred types are device types that can be delivered immediately ex works, i.e. they are dispatched
within 24 hours.
DT
Meaning
}
preferred type
A
two workdays
B
one week
C
three weeks
D
six weeks
X
on request
If ordered in normal quantities, the products are usually delivered within the specified delivery times,
calculated from the date we receive your order.
In exceptional cases, delivery times may vary from those specified.
The delivery times are valid ex works from Siemens AG (products ready for dispatch).
Shipping times depend on the destination and the method of shipping. The standard shipping time for
Germany is one day.
The delivery time classes specified in the catalog are valid as of 10/2008 and are constantly being
optimized. For more up-to-the-minute information, please visit our site at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall.
PU (price unit)
The PU column (price unit) specifies the quantity to which the price and weight refer.
PS/P. unit
(packaging size/
packaging unit)
The first digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) indicates the minimum order quantity. You can only order this
specified quantity or a multiple thereof.
The second digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) specifies the number of units contained in larger packaging
(e.g. in a carton). You must order this quantity or a multiple thereof if you want the item to be delivered in a larger packaging quantity.
Examples:
PS/P. unit
Significance
1
You can order one item or a multiple thereof.
5
For example, five units are packed in a bag. Because the bags cannot be opened, you can only order a multiple of
the quantity contained in the bag: 5, 10, 15, 20 etc.
5/100
One carton contains (for example) 20 bags, each containing 5 units, i.e. a total of 100 units. If only cartons are
available for delivery, you need to order a multiple of the carton quantity: 100, 200, 300, etc.
Ordering a quantity of 220 units, would produce the following delivery: two cartons, each containing 100 units
(= 200 units) and 4 bags, each containing 5 units (= 20 units).
PG (Price Group)
Each product is assigned to a price group.
Weight
The value specified in the Weight column specifies the weight in kg for the quantity specified in the PU column (price unit).
Dimensions
Unless stated otherwise, all dimensions are specified in mm.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
1
GAMMA instabus
Display, Operation
2
Output Devices
3
Input Devices
4
Combination Devices
5
Devices for Special Applications
Lighting
6
Sun-Protection, Anti-Glare
Protection, Utilization of Daylight
7
Heating, Cooling, Ventilation,
Air-Conditioning
8
Load Management
9
Safety
Quick-Assembly Systems
10
11
Gateways, Interface Converters
12
Physical Sensors
13
Control and Automation Devices
14
System Products
15
System Accessories
16
Counters
17
© Siemens AG 2008
GAMMA wave
GAMMA wave Radio System
18
Application Examples
19
Technical Information
20
Appendix
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Catalogs
Industry Automation, Drive Technologies and Electrical Installation Technology
Further information can be obtained from our branch offices listed
in the appendix or at www.siemens.com/automation/partner
Automation and Drives
Interactive catalog on DVD
Catalog
CA 01
Drive Systems
Variable-Speed Drives
SINAMICS G110/SINAMICS G120
Inverter Chassis Units
SINAMICS G120D
Distributed Frequency Inverters
D 11.1
SINAMICS G130 Drive Converter Chassis Units,
SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units
D 11
SINAMICS GM150/SINAMICS SM150
Medium-Voltage Converters
D 12
SINAMICS S150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units
D 21.3
Asynchronous Motors Standardline
D 86.1
Synchronous Motors with Permanent-Magnet
Technology, HT-direct
D 86.2
DC Motors
DA 12
SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RA70 Digital Chassis
Converters
DA 21.1
SIMOREG K 6RA22 Analog Chassis Converters
DA 21.2
PDF: SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RM70 Digital Converter
Cabinet Units
DA 22
SIMOVERT PM Modular Converter Systems
DA 45
SIEMOSYN Motors
DA 48
MICROMASTER 420/430/440 Inverters
DA 51.2
MICROMASTER 411/COMBIMASTER 411
DA 51.3
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Vector Control
DA 65.10
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Motion Control
DA 65.11
Synchronous and asynchronous servomotors for
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
DA 65.3
SIMODRIVE 611 universal and POSMO
DA 65.4
Catalog
Low-Voltage
Controls and Distribution –
SIRIUS, SENTRON, SIVACON
LV 1
Controls and Distribution –
Technical Information
SIRIUS, SENTRON, SIVACON
LV 1 T
SIDAC Reactors and Filters
LV 60
SIVENT Fans
LV 65
SIVACON 8PS Busbar Trunking Systems
LV 70
Motion Control
SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE
Automation Systems for Machine Tools
NC 60
SINUMERIK & SINAMICS
Automation Systems for Machine Tools
NC 61
SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and
Motors for Production Machines
PM 21
Process Instrumentation and Analytics
Field Instruments for Process Automation
Measuring Instruments for Pressure,
Differential Pressure, Flow, Level and Temperature,
Positioners and Liquid Meters
FI 01
PDF: Indicators for panel mounting
MP 12
SIREC Recorders and Accessories
MP 20
SIPART, Controllers and Software
MP 31
SIWAREX Weighing Systems
WT 01
Continuous Weighing and Process Protection
WT 02
Process Analytical Instruments
PA 01
PDF: Process Analytics,
Components for the System Integration
PA 11
ST 70
IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors
D 81.1
SIMATIC Industrial Automation Systems
Products for Totally Integrated Automation and
Micro Automation
MOTOX Geared Motors
D 87.1
SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System
ST PCS 7
NC 60
Add-ons for the SIMATIC PCS 7
Process Control System
ST PCS 7.1
Migration solutions with the SIMATIC PCS 7
Process Control System
ST PCS 7.2
pc-based Automation
ST PC
SIMATIC Control Systems
ST DA
SIMATIC NET
Industrial Communication
IK PI
SIMATIC Sensors
Sensors for Factory Automation
FS 10
Systems Engineering
Power supplies SITOP power and LOGO! Power
KT 10.1
System cabling SIMATIC TOP connect
KT 10.2
Low-Voltage Three-Phase-Motors
Automation Systems for Machine Tools SIMODRIVE
• Motors
• Converter Systems SIMODRIVE 611/POSMO
Automation Systems for Machine Tools SINAMICS
NC 61
• Motors
• Drive System SINAMICS S120
SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and
Motors for Production Machines
PM 21
Drive and Control Components for Hoisting Equipment
HE 1
Mechanical Driving Machines
Flender Standard Couplings
MD 10.1
Electrical Installation Technology
PDF: ALPHA Distribution Boards and Terminal Blocks
ET A1
PDF: ALPHA 8HP Molded-Plastic Distribution System
ET A3
PDF: BETA Low-Voltage Circuit Protection
ET B1
PDF: DELTA Switches and Socket Outlets
ET D1
PDF: GAMMA Building Management Systems
ET G1
Human Machine Interface Systems SIMATIC HMI
ST 80
System Solutions
Applications and Products for Industry are part of the
interactive catalog CA 01
TELEPERM M Process Control System
PDF: AS 488/TM automation systems
PLT 112
IA DT ET/3U/En 17.11.08
PDF: These catalogs are only available as pdf files.
Siemens ET G1 · 10/2008
© Siemens AG 2008
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Building Technologies
Electrical Installation Technology
Postfach 10 09 53
93009 REGENSBURG
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/gamma
www.siemens.com/buildingtechnologies
Subject to change without prior notice
PDF only: (E86060-K8230-A101-A9-7600)
3P.8103.62.02
KG 1108 284 En
© Siemens AG 2008
The information provided in this catalog contains descriptions or
characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not
always apply as described or which may change as a result of
further development of the products. An obligation to provide
the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed
in the terms of contract. Availability and technical specifications
are subject to change without notice.
All product designations may be trademarks or product names
of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties
for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
www.siemens.com/e-installation